Home

T/HIS 12.0 user manual

1. Page J 63 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 optional Curve Power Input Curve Curve Power float Output Curve optional Curve Rave Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Rec Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Reg Input Curve Curve X axis interval float Output Curve optional Curve Res Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve Rev Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Rs Input Curve Curve Damping Factor float Sampling Points int X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve Sin Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Smooth Input Curve Curve Smoothing Factor integer Output Curve optional Curve Sqr Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Stress Input Curve Curve Convert to string Output Curve optional Curve Sub I1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Sum Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve Sux Ist Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Tan Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Thiv X Acceleration Curve Y Acceleration Curve Yaw Rate Curve Dx float Dy float XO float Tm
2. OA_INSTALL Executables local preference file OA_INSTALL Executables local preference file Machine 1 Machine 2 c Large corporate network There is no need to worry about separating administration and installation directories and the default installation of all files in and below the single installation directory will suffice OA_ADMIN_xx Top level oa_pref file User manuals Timeouts file Many machines each with OA_INSTALL Page L 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Dynamic configuration using the top level oa_pref file A further improvement is that all environment variables below OA_ADMIN xx may either be set explicitly or dynamically using the options in the oa_pref file at the top OA ADMIN xx level This permits parallel installations of different versions of the software to co exist with only the top level administration directory names being distinct For example Release 12 0 Release 12 1 Top level directory OA ADMIN 12 Top level directory OA ADMIN 121 oa_pref file in OA ADMIN 12 contains oa_pref file in OA_ADMIN_ 121 contains oasys install dir lt pathname for 12 0 oasys install dir lt pathname for 12 1 installation gt installation gt oasys manuals dir lt pathname for 12 0 oasys manuals dir lt pathname for12 1 manuals gt manuals gt oasys home dir lt pathname for home directory gt would almost certainly be unchanged between major oasys temp dir lt pa
3. Output Type Write to file y Output Format THIS cur y Output ARUP_SLED default cur 5 2 1 WRITE TO FILE Output Type Write to file a Writes a group of curves out to a file for later use if required The user is prompted for the list of curves to write out after a filename has been specified 5 2 1 1 FILE FORMAT THIS cur THIS cur Writes a group of curves out to a file for later use if required The user is prompted for the list of curves to write out after a filename has been specified LS DYNA Keyword NASTRAN TABLEDI CSV KY XKYXY CSV KYYYYY Summary Summary CSV T HIS cur format This option will write out curves using the default T HIS curve format One curve file will be written containing all the selected curves along with their Titles Axis Labels Line Labels and styles From version 9 4 onwards the curve file can also contain information on the UNIT system and the X and Y axis units for each curve see_Appendix B for more details on the curve file format LS DYNA Keyword One file will be written containing all the selected curves using the LS DYNA DEFINE CURVE format so that the file is suitable for inclusion in a LS DYNA keyword file NASTRAN D1 This option will write out curves using the NASTRAN TABLE D1 format Curves are listed sequentially in the file CSV X Y X Y X Y This option will write out curves using as a CSV comma separated variable file that can be read into other programs like Micros
4. Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m and store as curve p p Operate Ad m Add Input Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Add Y axis values Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Example To add curves m and n together and store as curve p p Operate Add m n To add 20 0 to the values in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Add m 20 0 Adx 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Add X axis values Page J 66 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Example To add X axis values for curves m and n together and store as curve p p Operate Adx m n To add 20 0 to the X axis values in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Adx m 20 0 Asi X Acceleration Curve Y Acceleration Curve Z Acceleration Curve Acceleration conversion factor float X Acceleration Limit float Y Acceleration Limit float Z Acceleration Limit float Calculation method string X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Acceleration Severity Index This value is used to assess the performance of road side crash barriers The calculation method can
5. Page 7 17 T HIS Part group Page 7 18 Node id Group id Group id User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 emperature urrent Vector asic Y coord asic Z coord asic Vector Xrotation O OoOO rotational acceleration rotational acceleration nergy force force momentum momentum momentum inetic energy nternal energy ourglass energy otal energy te mperature djisplacement vJelocity a cceleration i 7 lt INI lt Xx O NI lt Xx w 3 DINI lt Xx N T lt lt Io a vo lo DO TO TO T gt INT lt x x N force elnergy D lt x TIN x m force TIN m x y m K NI lt IX lt II2 3 3 x velocity y velocity gt gt fel AIlmIm gt gt ay o Y all ee Te Tr po dl pF Gr u He ZZ sl E Gr a gt e rce iii O Rigid part NRB Part id d is placement v velocity a Jacceleration User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS lip Rate lobal X force Rigid wall Segment Rigid_seg Wall id lobal X force Displacement Pulleys Pul Pulley id ffoee e sip rate fanjle Wrap Angle Retractor Ret Retractor id foe Force plpullout Po Puo O fop ooo JForce v Pullout Global force gt eiobalZiorce y force lobal Y force lobal Z force Displacement Rigid wall Rig Wall Wall id nergy Displacement isplacement Magnitude Velocity Velocity Velocity
6. ABS YD TRA VA REV AD CLIP AY ZERO DS ORDER RS WINDA c60 R AVE c180 NOR x C600 MON c1000 6 4 4 Update Curve Update Curve If any of the operations used to create a curve are modified or if a new operation is inserted then this option can be used to automatically update the curve T HIS will automatically rebuild the curve using the updated set of curve operations and will replace the old curve with the new one 6 4 5 Update Curve Dependants Update Curve Dependants This option will update the selected curve and any dependant curves As T HIS stores all of the operations used to create every curve it knows if a curve has been used as an input to any other curves The selected curve will be automatically rebuilt and replaced with the new curve and then any curves that use the selected curve as an input will also be rebuilt and replaced 6 4 6 List Dependants List Dependants This option will display a list containing any curves that have been created which use the currently selected curve as an input somewhere in their chain of curve operations Page 6 14 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 6 4 7 Reset Curve This option can be used to reset all of the curve operations used to create a curve if any of them have been modified 6 5 Keyboard Shortcuts Command File Settings Some panels and actions can be accessed through pre programmed shortcuts and FAST TCF from version 9 4
7. CtrlPressed PixelsPerUnit ShiftPressed StringLength text string monospace optional boolean Member functions TtemAt index integer Line colour constant x1 integer y integer x2 integer y2 integer Polygon colour constant fillf boolean x1l integer y1 integer x2 integer y2 integer xn integer yn integer e ReadImageFile filename string justify optional constant e ReadlmageString string string justify optional constant e Rectangle colour constant fill boolean x1 integer y1 integer x2 integer y2 integer e RemoveAllWidgetltems e RemoveWidgetltem item Widgetltem e AddWidgetltem item Widgert tem position optional integer e Circle colour constant fill boolean xc integer yc integer radius integer e Clear e Cross colour optional constant e Delete e DumpImageString filename string Hide Show Static Tick colour optional constant Totalltems Widgetltems Widget constants Name Description Widget BUTTON Button widget Widget CHECKBOX Checkbox widget Widget COMBOBOX Combobox widget Widget LABEL Label widget Widget LISTBOX Listbox widget Widget TEXTBOX Text input widget Constants for Justification Widget CENTRE Centre horizontal justification Constants for Selection Page J 110 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Widget SELECT_ENHANCED Multipl
8. IsFile filename string static Description Check if a filename is a file See also File Exists File IsDirectory File IsReadable and File IsWritable Arguments Filename you want to check Return type true false Example To see if the filename data test is a file if File IsFile data test do something IsReadable filename string static Description Check if a filename has read permissions See also File Exists File IsDirectory and File IsWritable Arguments Filename you want to check Return type true false Page J 40 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To see if the filename data test is writable if File IsWritable data test do something IsWritable filename string static Description Check if a filename has write permissions See also File Exists File IsDirectory and File IsReadable Arguments Filename you want to check Return type true false Example To see if the filename data test is writable if File IsWritable data test do something Mkdir directory string static Description Make a directory Arguments The name of the directory you want to create Return type true if successfully created false if not Example To make the directory data test var success File Mkdir data test Mktemp static Description Make a temporary filename for writing a temporary fi
9. O Foreground Colour BA Background Colour U Curve through points ON OFF SY Symbols ON OFF T HIS ED lt curve ID gt Edit option OP Operate Page K 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Mae Label y value at maximum move to Top aa curve E move to End one umber move to line n n Change line n un ete from line weeds LS PE Plot Edited cure u 4 ADV Ad U SSSA SUX Y Suwa SSS DIX Y Divide CAT Concatenate2 curves COM Combine ewes III DIF Differentiaie SMO Smooth S O 2 INO Ju ZERO Translate the curve to 0 0 ORDER Reverse the order of the curve points EC Vector magnitude EC2 Vector Magnitude 2D SuM Sa o NV Envelope of n curves MIN Minimum of n curves o ooo SN MAX Maximum of n curves o ooo SN O AVE Average of n curves R AV Rolling Average of n curves STR Convert stress strain curve User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS AM Automotive options X xcee e Plo C Viscous Criteria ECER95 C2 Viscous Criteria IIHS ASI Acceleration Severity Index BS EN 1317 1 1998 ASI2 Acceleration Severity Index BS EN 1317 1 2010 HIV Theoretical Head Impact Velocit IJ Neck Injur Qora auma Index OR Normal se REG Regularise EC Vector Magnitude EC2 Vector Magnitude 2D ACU Airbag Control Unit MA Maths operations SQRT Squre Root OG Natural Log XP e to power of OG10 Log to ba
10. P1 Curve Point r bel Delete Point Type P1 Curve Point x Curve Point Use the popup to select the point type to annotate on Screen Point sabe bel O This is the annotation that will be displayed on the graph Delete D D D o This will delete the current annotation Page 5 106 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 18 3 Format These options can be used to control the display of the measurements and annotations Values Default Measurements can be displayed with both the X and Y values just the X value just the Y value A or neither automatic If only one of the values is shown the line between the two points will be drawn like so Background 7 X 4 2006 03 m e v Y 8 900e 02 25 sE Text The font font size and colour of the values can be selected Background To make it easier to read the values a background can also be specified In addition to specifying the background colour a transparency value can be used to control the visibility of curves under the text Border and Border Colour Specify a border and border colour to be added around the value Symbols The symbols drawn on the measurement points can be turned on off The size of the symbol can also be specified Page 5 107 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Number Format Specify the format of the values displayed on the graph Page 5 108 User manual Version 12 0 October 201
11. Page 6 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 1 3 Plotting The Plotting drop down menu can be used to access the following plotting commands Plot see Section 4 1 for more details Zoom see Section 4 4 for more details Point see Section 4 2 for more details Autoscale see Section 4 5 for more details Centre see Section 4 6 for more details 6 1 4 Functions The Functions drop down menu can be used to access all of the curve functions Automotive see Section 5 11 for more details Operate see Section 5 9 for more details Maths see Section 5 10 for more details Seismic see Section 5 12 for more details 6 1 5 Display The Display drop down menu can be used to access the Title Axis and Display menus and to dynamically modify the appearance of graphs This menu changes all of the currently active graphs see section 3 5 Title Axis see Section 5 15 for more details Legend see Section 5 15 5 for more details Display see Section 5 16 for more details Grid Turns the gird on off see Section 5 16 4 for more details Symbols Turns graph symbols on off see Section 5 16 4 for more details Lines Turns graph lines on off see Section 5 16 1 for more details Border Turns the plot border on off see Section 5 16 6 for more details Foreground Sets the foreground colour see Section 5 16 9 for more details Background Sets the background colour see Section 5 16 8 for more details Swap Swaps the current
12. User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Ave Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve static Description Average a group of curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Average the array of curves stored in curve array x and store as curve p p Operate Ave x Blc Input Curve Curve static Description Carry out a baseline correction on an accleration time history Arguments Moment Time Curve Return type Array of Curve objects 1st curve Corrected curve 2nd curve Integrated Velocity 3rd curve Integrated Displacement Example Calculate baseline correction on curve m c_array Operate Blc m corrected curve c_array 0 vel_curve c_array 1 j disp curve c_arrayl2 But Input Curve Curve Frequency float Order integer X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Butterworth Filter Page J 69 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Frequency Cut off Frequency Hz Order Filter order X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Output Curve optional Curve to overwrite Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m using a cut off of 400Hz and order 2 and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate But m 400 0 2
13. symbol next to the name of the current curve operation will display a menu containing a list of all of the curve operations that are available which have the same number of input curves If for example the current curve operation is CLIP then the popup menu of available operations will contain all of the other curve functions that have a single input curve X Maximum Wale Right clicking on the popup Maximum 1e 006 SMO LSQ SQR NOR y REC ABS TRA REV CLIP ZERO ORDER WINDOW R AVE NOR x MON SQR SIN cos TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN LOG EXP BUTP N UNITS LOG10 JavaScript LOG x LOG10 x DY DA YD AD AN DS RS c60 C180 c00 21000 BUT FIR 3ms CLIP EXC YC REG ACU C2 Page 6 13 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 4 3 Inserting New Read Operations ia ADD y SQR BUT New operations can be inserted into o the chain of curve operations by ADD x a BE SEE right clicking on one of the SUB y Sms CLIP symbols between the existing operations SUB x The popup menu that is displayed o me o me ASIN e will contain all of the curve MUL x ACOS operations that take a single curve as input and produce a single output Read DIV y ATAN curve Y Dy z rn BUTP DIF N UNITS SMO LOG10 JavaScript LSQ LOG x SOR LOG10 x NOR y DY REC DA
14. 0 200 0 400 0 800 0 600 0 400 0 200 0 000 0 200 0 400 0 600 0 800 This function first normalises the curves using two factors specified either by the user or defaults calculated by the program the maximum absolute X and Y values of both graphs For each point on the first normalised curve the shortest distance to the second normalised curve is calculated the thick black lines on the image above The root mean square value of all these distances is subtracted from 1 and then multiplied by 100 to get an index between 0 and 100 The process is repeated along the second curve the thick red lines show the distances and the two indices are averaged to get a final index The higher the index the closer the correlation between the two curves Note that the choice of normalising factors is important Incorrect factors may lead to a correlation index outside the range of 0 to 100 WIF The Correlation function WIF provides another measure of the degree to which two curves match It uses the Weighted Integrated Factor method eae gt max 0 fIn gin y a p Pp l j i Im x In eln max Fin eink vit 1 cm gt max fin eln Page F 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page F 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX G The ERROR Calculation The ERROR function outputs a number of values to indicate the degree of correlation between 2 curves The function require
15. Arguments ArrayBuffer ArrayBuffer to write to file length integer Number of bytes to write to the file If omitted all the data in the ArrayBuffer will be optional written buffer byteLength bytes Return type No return value Example To write ArrayBuffer ab to File object f f WriteArrayBuffer ab Writeln string Any valid javascript type Description Write a string to a file opened for writing by a File object adding a carriage return Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to write Return type No return value Example To write string Hello world to File object f automatically adding a carriage return writeln Hello world To write the title of model m to File object f automatically adding a carriage return f Wwriteln The title of model 2 is m title Page J 48 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Graph class The Graph class gives you access to graphs in T HIS More Class functions e Total Graph properties Graph ID read only Detailed Description The Graph class contains information on the number of graphs See the documentation below for more details Constructor new Graph index integer Description Create a new Graph Arguments index integer Graph index to copy initial display and axis settings from optional If not defined then the display and axis settings will be copied from thos
16. END INDEX ERRORS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 7 3 INDEX MARKS Index marks can set at any line in a file They are not interpreted as commands but rather treated STOP IGNORE are lt lt FIND NEXT FIND NEXT gt gt SET Set an index mark on this line IGNORE Ignore index marks during PLAY REVIEW searching forwards CLEAR Clear all index marks in the file as markers which are used as targets of_ Index mark action CLEAR Clear an index mark set on this line CLEAR ALL DISMISS HELP STOP Stop in PLAY REVIEW mode FIND Finds the next index mark lt lt ALL Index marks are optional flags that you Index at this line SET CLEAR SEARCH operation Index mark functions when index found INDEX searching backwards gt gt 5 7 4 SEARCH The SEARCH buttons can be used to find a specific command when in REVIEW mode You can search through the command file for a match to any permutation of the following Box name The name of a screen menu box inside which an event occurred Function The screen menu function type This is button press dialogue etc CommandThe command word s to look f for Function Key The default for all of these is lt any gt ie a wildcard search but you can specify a a value by typing into the appropriate text Command Ei box When you have filled in all the fields you need press APPLY to start the search Box name and Function fiel
17. ItemAt index integer Description Returns the Widgetltem object used at index in this Widget See also Widget Totalltems and Widget Widgetltems Page J 118 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments index to return Widgetltem for Note that indices start at 0 Return type Widgetltem object Example To loop over the Widgetltems used in Widget w for i 0 i lt w TotalItems i wi w ItemAt i Line colour constant x1 integer y1 integer x2 integer y2 integer Description Draws a line on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets The coordinates are local to the Widget not the Window See properties xResolution and yResolution for more details Note that the widget graphics will only be updated when the widget is redrawn This is to allow the user to do multiple drawing commands on a widget To force the widget to be redrawn call ShowQ Arguments Colour of line See foreground for colours x coordinate of start of line y coordinate of start of line x coordinate of end of line y coordinate of end of line Return type no return value Example To draw a red line from 10 90 to 90 10 on widget w w Line Widget RED 10 90 90 10 PixelsPerUnit static Description Returns the number of pixels per unit coordinate This will vary depending on the monitor T HIS is running on Arguments No arguments Page J 119 T HIS Us
18. List Delete i f Group File SAGE EEn eT E En The 1st time T HIS finds a group file groupXXX asc in a directory it will automatically read the file and create the PART groups After reading the Ist group file T HIS will by Auto Read Options default ignore any other group files it finds in directones when kopen a model lf THIS finds a group file when opening a model This option can be changed as follows v Ignore the Group file _ Delete existing groups and read the file Ignore This option the default will make T HIS ignore any more Overwrite Groups with matching IDs group files it finds _ Increment all Group IDs Delete If T HIS finds a group file when a new model is read in Do you want T HIS to then all existing group definitions will be deleted MV Use this option for all group files before the new file is read _ Prompt for each group file Overwrite If T HIS finds a group file when a new model is read in then all the new group definitions will be added to the existing ones If the new file contains a group with the same ID as an existing group then the old definition will be overwritten Increment If T HIS finds a group file when a new model is read in then all the new group definitions will be added to the existing ones but the group ID s will be incremented to ensure that they do not clash with existing ones The default option can be changed using the preference option this read_gr
19. No arguments Return type true false Example To test if someone has the Ctrl key pressed if Widget CtrlPressed Delete Description Deletes the widget from T HIS removing it from the window it is defined in and returns any memory resources used for the widget This function should not normally need to be called However sometimes a script may want to recreate widgets in a window many times and unless the old widgets are deleted T HIS will reach the maximum number of widgets for a window Options max_widgets To avoid this problem this method can be used to force T HIS to delete and return the resources for a widget Do not use the Widget object after calling this method Arguments No arguments Return type no return value Page J 117 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To delete widget w w Delete DumplmageString filename string Description Dumps a string representation of an image for a widget to a file in a form that can be used by Widget ReadImageString Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets Arguments Filename to dump string representation to Return type no return value Example To dump the image data to file image_data for widget w w DumpImageString image_ data Hide Description Hides the widget on the screen Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To hide widget w w Hide
20. T HIS 5 15 5 Legend 5 15 5 1 Curve Labels Show Prefix This option can be used to automatically add a prefix to each of the curve legends when a curve is plotted This option has 3 settings Automatic If there is more that 1 model loaded in T HIS then a prefix will automatically be added to any curves that have been read in from a model Curves read in from other files will not be prefixed On A prefix will automatically be added to any curves that have been read in from a model regardless of the number of models currently loaded in T HIS Curves read in from other files will not be prefixed Off No prefixes will be added Prefix Format This option can be used to set the format used for the curve prefix This option has 4 settings The model number will be used as the prefix e g M1 Directory The directory name the model was read from will be used at the prefix e g run1 THF File The root name of the THF file will be used as the prefix e g sled_test User A used defined prefix Defined will be used The prefix can be defined on a model by model case using the Model Menu The font size and colour of the text used to display the legends can also be specified Page 5 92 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Title Axes 2x Title X Axis Y Axis Y2 Avis Legend Curve Labels Show Prefix Automatic Prefix Format Model Number Font Default e Size aut
21. T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 8 3 Automotive operation commands Description keywordjoperation following following jadditional command _ word 1 word 2 words Delta V oper acu feurve 1 offset tmeperod Acceleration severity oper Accn x curve Accn y curve Accn z curve word6 acceleration index conversion factor word8 y limit word9 z limit Butterworth filter oper curve 1 cut off order a c60 fitter joper e60 eure pP 0 Ceoofilter per ceo curves b Eo o S y C e r fF ___f ____ _____ oper curve 1 time window Label displayed on Value is stored with screen e the nn curve pomme _ loper auto es Ho Me __ppet curve 1 nn scale time an a is stored with factor the output curve ea hicd curve 1 division scale time period Value is stored with cion the output curve u inn Regularise pr reg curve tt new dt value __ i Pesan D o ii papai rib curve ma rib curve Lower spine curve Value is stored with the output curve Viscous criteria R BE a a ECER95 method Viscous criteria IHS IIHS method Curve Correlation strict oper corr strict curve 1 curve 2 Value is stored with the output curves Curve Correlation loose oper corr loose curve 1 curve 2 Value is stored with the output curves Weighted Integrated oper curve 1 curve 2 Value is stored with Factor Curve Correlation the output curve WIFAC 7 8 4 Seismic operation commands Description keywordlop
22. T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To seek to the end of File f Seek 0 File END To seek to the beginning of File f Seek 0 File START To move forward 10 characters in File f Seek 10 File CURRENT Size filename string static Description Return the size of a file in bytes Arguments Filename you want the size of Return type size in bytes Example To get the size of the file data test file key var size File Size data test file key Tell Description Return the current file position for a File object Note that on Windows when reading files if the file is not opened with File BINARY this may not return the correct file position for files with unix line endings Arguments No arguments Return type integer Example To get the current file position for File f var pos f Tell Page J 46 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Upload filename string url string options optional object static Description Uploads a file to a remote location See also File Proxy File ProxyPassword and File ProxyUsername Arguments Filename you want to upload url string URL uniform resource locator of the remote location you want to upload the file to Currently only http is supported Give the full address including the leading http e g http www example com file html options object Options for upload C
23. This option will create one group for each component Node X displacement Contact X Force etc that data is read from If data is read from multiple models then a single group for each component will be created containing curves from multiple models The component groups can be named using either the component name Disp X Vel X or the component name and the entity type Disp X Node Vel X Node Curve File If curves are read in from curve files CUR or CSV then this option will create one group for the Index Ist curves read form each file a second group for the 2nd curve read from each file and so on Multiple options can be selected at the same time Update GroupsThis option will create and update the contents of automatic curve groups if the options are changed The following preference options can be used to change the default options see Appendix H for more details group_by model group _by type group _by component group by file index component group _name Page 5 111 T HIS 5 20 GRAPHS This panel can be used to create additional graphs within T HIS In addition to creating graphs this menu can also be used to control the layout of the graphs and to set up pages of graphs within T HIS See Section 3 0 for more details Page 5 112 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Graph Layout Create Create Graphs s Number of graphs to create IV Create using preference settings _
24. User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 13 Outputting curve properties to text files variables and REPORTER These requests output a curve property eg its maximum Y value into a specified tabulation file to a REPORTER variable in a text file or into a variable within FAST TCF Output keyword extra Format variable variable description type words optional word name words Tabulation tab filename curve property fif values format varf variable description file to outputjneeded name Tabulation taba filename curve property fif values format varf variable description file append to output needed name tabc filename curve property fif values format varf variable description Each output is name appended to the current line in the file taber filename curve property fif values format varf variable description Each output is name appended to the current line in the file followed by a carrage return so that the next output starts a new line FAST TCF varf variable curve property Jif values format description variable name to outputineeded REPORTER var variable curve property if values format varf variable description variable name to outputjneeded name REPORTER vara variable curve property if values format varf variable description variable name to outputineeded name append 7 13 1 Available Curve Properties Various advanced requests can be performed e g
25. User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Strain The Strain tensors output is optional By default values are in the local element coordinate systems and only values at the top and bottom integration points are output T HIS will average these values for the mid surface Extra By default Extra data components are not written to the LSDA file Some recent versions of LS DYNA can now write the Extra data components to the LSDA file if the parameters OPTION OPTION2 OPTION3 and OPTION4 are set on the DATABASE_ELOUT card Global v Local coordinate system results The LSDA file can contain both ELOUT and ELOUTDET data components By default T HIS uses the data from ELOUTDET as ELOUT only contains a subset of the data in ELOUDET In some versions of LS DYNA it is possible to change the Shell and ThickShell data components written to the ELOUT so that they are defined using the Global coordinate system see EOCS on CONTROL_OUTPUT instead of the default local element coordinate system If this option is used then only the ELOUT file is modified the ELOUDET file is still written using the local element coordinate system If T HIS detects that the LSDA file contains both ELOUT and ELOUDET and that they are using different coordinate systems then T HIS will display an additional option can be used to force T HIS to use the ELOUT file data instead of the ELOUTDET data Through Thickness Integration Points surfaces layers Unli
26. YC calculation method Curve palette Default x By default T HIS uses 6 colours White Red Green Blue Cyan and Magenta for any curves that have not had a colour explicitly defined for them Curves 1 7 13 will be White 2 8 14 will be Red This option can be used to change the default number of colours T HIS uses Use the default 6 colours Use the first 13 colours Use all 30 predefined colours except the 3 grey ones Use all 30 predefined colours plus any user defined ones The default value for the curve palette can also be specified in the preferences file see Appendix H for more details Page 5 102 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 17 4 Layout Settings Save Settings This option can be used to save a T HIS settings file which can be reloaded later The settings file uses the same syntax as a FAST TCE script except it only contains layout and setup commands The settings file can contain all of the commands required to reproduce the current page and graph layout or a subset of the commands MS as qs Page 5 103 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Reload Settings This option can be used to reload a previously saved settings file In addition to reloading a file interactively a settings file can also be specified on the command line set filename or via the Preference File this settings_file filename Page 5 104 User manual Version 12 0 October
27. esn u TE For a random vibration analysis PSD the following nodal data components are available Component THF XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCH d3thdt Stress components sxx sees E _ vy stessinvy es sz smemzz sd es i xy smsna tes svz_stesin v2 es sex resna Dj i A 7 1 THF d3thdt File Page A 9 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Stress Stress tensors are in the global cartesian system unless the option to use material axes has been invoked for orthotropic materials CMPFLG on DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY By default results are available at top and bottom integration points and mid surface but values can be output for all through thickness integration points by using MAXINT on DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY Strain The Strain tensors output is optional Values are in the global cartesian system unless the option to use material axes has been invoked for orthotropic materials CMPFLG on DATABASE EXTENT_BINARY Only values at the top and bottom integration points are output T HIS will average these values for the mid surface Forces amp Force and moment resultants are lt data gt per unit width and are written in the element local axis system Moments _ Refer to Theory of Plates and Shells Timoshenko for a precise definition of these values Extra The Extra History data components will only appear in the menu if they have been selected for output NEIPS on DATABASE_EXTENT_BI
28. 1 accel mag tag the curve node_1_acc for ease of use later in the script following word 2 60 600 1000 scale factor scale factor abel word 1 label word 2 etc ag word Gr hic hic15 hicd rn SSS SC ASCII file ASC request LSDA file LSD request HF file request TF file request XTF 7 9 1 Using extra options on multiple curve outputs From version 9 2 onwards multiple curve outputs can be generated from one FAST TCF input line Unfortunately most of the extra options displayed below will NOT work on these multiple outputs However support has been added to allow tagging and labeling of all the multiple curves outputted in one go see section 7 6 1 Page 7 34 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 10 Setting properties for curves The folowing options can be used to set up properties for curves 7 10 1 Setting curve Labels Titles and tags keyword jescond wordlthird word farts fab paver fans label word 2 etc CurveTitle tt cuve ortag labelword1 __llabelword2etc faved bt berry fp on the 1sty axis an version 9 4 Fe curve properties such as the minimum and maximum values can be EN in the legend area as well as within the graph area The following commands use a new properties keyword and can be used to specify the font colour and background used to display values as well as selecting which values are displayed on each curve ree Pe ri a word properties format f
29. 2 5 amp z vjs 213 5 o jL z D 2 gt 5 TIN lt Xlm m gt I 5 on D in in S 5 lt lt y Solid id tress in XX stra in plalstic elxtra yp SPC SPC id florce SPH tress in ZZ SPH id djensity stra in stre ss l ength olololololololz z z 3 3 a D o 3 an HD Im m Page 7 21 T HIS Page 7 22 Sp Da Spotweld id Spring id User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 co nstrained gt xial force Tr 1 aximum failure value ailure Time gelneralised ial force x hear force ength m 1 aximum failure value ailure Time alePI n I lt Z TY aximum failure value ailure Time esultant Moment MEARI A ES C Failure Function nf ormal Failure Term a Z O hear Failure Trem potweld Area f no n local ial force ailure failed if gt 1 0 ending Failure Term soJlid hear force aximum failure value ailure Time ss ele low e splotweld xial force length ailure failed if gt 1 0 e aximum failure value ailure Time ass embly ial force hear force esultant Moment ff ormal Failure Term hear Failure Trem ending Failure Term potweld Area rce longation nergy oment v Rotation lobal X force lobal Y force lobal Z force oment in X oment in Z otational Energy IM 1 C Failure Function WIM z O n e fore bo o o y y elongation bo o
30. 2 5 2 Dynamic Magnification Scaling Dynamic scaling uses lt right mouse gt lt left shift gt The cursor symbol is green and looks like al Mouse motion to the right and up makes the image larger left and down smaller The initial position of the mouse is irrelevant A horizontal movement will scale Just the x axis while a vertical movement will scale just the y axis 2 6 Tool Bar Options Across the top of the main graphics window are a number of buttons that can be used to access other T HIS menus see Section 6 1 for more details File Graphs Plotting Functions Display Images Options Style 577 3046 If the graphics box is maximised to take up the whole of the main window these buttons can be used to access the rest of the T HIS menus without having to resize the graphics box between commands Almost all of the options and functions in these menus may also be accessed from other menu locations e g the Main Menu area Page 2 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 3 Graphs and Pages 3 1 Creating Graphs 3 2 Page Size 3 3 Page Layouts 3 4 Pages 3 5 Active Inactive Graphs T HIS 9 4 can display a maximum of 32 graphs Each graph can have a different appearance and they can display different curves Graphs can be laid out using a number of different formats and they can be organised into Pages 3 1 Creating Graphs Create Graphs Create a new graph The sh
31. 5 FRONT LH EUROSID HEAD X ACC Note The filtering ignores case _ 6 FRONT LH EUROSID HEAD Y ACC Normally one of the DIAdem data channels X Axis 1 TIME CHANNEL contains the x axis time values By default T HIS assumes this is channel 1 but this can be changed V using the button labelled Start 1 0000E 00 Interval If none of the channels contain the x axis values then a start value and an increment can be specified to generate curves with evenly spaced x axis values 5 1 11 1 Supported DIAdem header file blocks The following DIAdem header file data blocks are supported All other data blocks are ignored GLOBAL HEADER 111 Value for NoValues in the data file 112 Interchange high and low bytes CHANNEL HEADER 200 Channel name 201 Channel comment 210 Channel type 211 File from which channel data is read 213 Method of storing the data 214 Data type 220 No of values in the channel 221 Pointer to the Ist value in the channel 222 Offset for ASCII block files Offset for binary block files with header 223 Local ASCI pointer in the case of ASCII block files 230 Separator character for ASCH block files 231 Decimal character in ASCII files 232 Exponential character in ASCII files 240 Exponential character in ASCII files 241 Step width Factor 252 Keyword for NoValues in the channel 254 Value for NoValues in the channel Page 5 26 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 12 NASTRAN This option can be used t
32. 5 23 6 Examples By far the easiest way to learn Javascript is by example and more specifically by modified existing scripts to do what you want The software comes supplied with examples in the SOASYS programme_library examples directory for T HIS SOASYS this library examples and you are free to use and modify these files for your own purposes Page 5 128 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 24 Datum Lines ac i Curves Models Properties Datum lines can be added to graphs to show limits and reference curves Unlike normal curves DATUM lines are not used to calculate graph limits when auto scaling and are not shown in the curve legend Each graph can contain multiple DATUM lines all DATUM lines are drawn in the order thye have been defined before any curves are plotted Upper Limit Lower Limit Acceleration x1E 3 m s 2 0 000 0 010 0 020 0 030 0 040 0 050 0 060 0 070 0 080 0 090 0 100 Time s Accel mag Node 1343 C 150 Accel mag Node 1345 C 160 5 24 1 List GO Datumlinss SOX This option lists ant DATUM line Create Red Sae definitions that have been created Graphs 47 This menu can also be used to select which DATUM lines appear Acronym Type Yalue v vi nn ee 7 nic_1000 Constant Y D 100E 04 WAY _ A range of DATUM lines can be hic_700 Constant Y 700 A v m ea upper_limit Constant Y 750 M IM coun SHIFT while selecting the lower_limit Constant Y 5
33. Arguments Warning message to show in window Window NO If this is omitted an OK button will be used By default the window will be optional modal If Window NONMODAL is also given the window will be non modal instead buttons The buttons to use Can be bitwise OR of Window OK Window CANCEL Window YES or Return type Button pressed Example To show warning Title is blank nSet to ID in window with title Warning with Yes and No buttons var answer Window Warning Warning Title is blank nSet to ID Window YES Window NO if answer Window NO Message You pressed No Page J 141 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page J 142 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX K Typed Commands N G O v lt D gt Cc entre F Write Postscript file use default C Write Postscript file Colour B Write Postscript file Blank White nolan Re e Kemo d opa O PU DL x s X s 5 5 5 OU Double Y axis ON OFF F Command file read SF Session file write ession file Backspace Q Abort operation End of command string K 2 List Commands S List all files in current directo LC List all files cur in current director B List all files bdf in current director LK List all files key in current director List all files ASCII files in current director KV obal Vien Top level menu Page K 1 T HIS User manua
34. Bd LS DYNA Groups THIS Cure Bulk Data Keyboard Screen LS PREPOST DlAdem NASTRAN Filename Output Curve highest 1 LS PREPOST Curve File y LS PREPOST Curve File LS PREPOST XY Pairs File Format Read Read Data x LS DYNA Groups Keyword T HIS Curve Bulk Data Keyboard csv Screen ISO karrere DlAdem NASTRAN Header File Roger DIAdem 3 1 R32 Output Curve highest 1 Display Channel Comments x x Axis 1 TIME CHANNEL Be _ O 0000E 00 Star 1 0000E 00 Interval Read Filter x All Channels 1 TIME CHANNEL a gl a By default T HIS will display the channel comments header block 201 for each channel This can be changed to the channel names header block 200 using the popup menu if required Display When channels are read in this option is also used to create the labels for each curve 2 SLED CENTRE X ACC 3 YEHICLE FRONT LH DOOR TOP ACC 4 FRONT LH EUROSID HEAD Z ACC Channel Comments x Channel Names Channel Comments Page 5 25 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 As well as displaying either the channel comments te ant Int or the channels names the list of channels can also v Filter iront Ih be filtered if required io A X All Channels The filter string can contain the following wildcards _ 3 VEHICLE FRONT LH DOOR TOP Y ACC matches multiple characters _ 4 FRONT LH EUROSID HEAD Z ACC 8 DE cn _
35. C Curve Menu gt Curve Menu Page Layout Cascade D F Curve Table Page Layout 1x1 E F Model Menu Page Layout 2x2 F FAST TCF Menu gt Edit Menu Page Layout 3x3 G Create Graph gt Style Menu H F Curve Properties Menu F Image Menu J F Operate Menu K F Maths Menu E F Automotive Menu M F Seismic Menu N Change edit to the next pointisegmen Macros Menu 0 F FAST TCF Menu P Plot F Titlei xes Menu Q Restart Quick Pick F Display Menu R Reverse All e Settings Menu Page 6 16 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS To assign a Macros FAST TCF script or accel from vel JavaScript a to a key right click on FAST TCF Scrips Butterworth filter Macros FAST TCF Scripts or Autoscale convert to g C180 JavaScripts Autoscale Y axis Taam This will bring up another popup from which you can select the Macro or FAST TCE script The popup will contain a list of Scripts that T HIS has picked up from the OASYS and home directory If the script you want is not in this list you can browse for it by clicking on the folder icon The listing of assigned keys is colour coded to easily distinguish between pre programmed shortcuts white FAST TCF scripts light blue Macros dark blue and JavaScripts dark green ee Fi Page Layout Tile Tall ai F2 i ERF oasys94this_li ostacc_from_velthm Page 6 17 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Pre programmed Shortcuts Defaults sh
36. Calculate Sine Page J 93 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Sine of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Sin m Smooth Input Curve Curve Smoothing Factor integer Output Curve optional Curve static Description Apply a smoothing factor to a curve Arguments Smoothing Factor Number of points to average over Output Curve optional Curve Curve to overwrite Return type Curve object or NULL Example Smooth curve m using 7 points and store as curve p p Operate Smooth m 7 Sar Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Square root of a curve Arguments Page J 94 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Return type Curve object or NULL Example Square root curve m and store as curve p p Operate Sqr m Stress Input Curve Curve Convert to string Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert between true and engineering stress Arguments Type to convert to True or Engineering Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m from engineering to true strees and store as curve p p Operate Stress m True Sub 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Subtract Y axis values Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Ret
37. Execute one or more lines of command line dialogue input Arguments string_1 string_2 One or more Javascript The command s that are to be executed as if they had been typed string _n strings into the dialogue box Return type No return value Example To mulitple curves 1 and 2 by 10 DialogueInputNoEcho op mul 1 10 op mul 2 10 Note that each call to DialogueInput starts afresh at the top of the T HIS command line tree so where multiple commands need to be given at sub menu levels they need to be included in a single call Page J 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS DialoguelnputNoEcho string_1 string_2 string_n One or more Javascript strings static Description Execute one or more lines of command line dialogue input with no echo of commands to dialogue box Arguments string_1 string_2 One or more Javascript The command s that are to be executed as if they had been typed string _n strings into the dialogue box Return type No return value Example To mulitple curves 1 and 2 by 10 DialogueInputNoEcho op mul 1 10 op mul 2 10 As with DialogueInput above each call starts at the top of the T HIS command tree structure so any commands destined for sub menus must all be arguments to a single call DisableUpdate static Description Temporarily disable the plotting of curves within graphs Arguments No arguments Return type No retur
38. GetFtcfVar name string Getenv name string Message string Any valid javascript type MilliSleep time integer NumberToString number integer float width integer Plot Print string Any valid javascript type Println string Any valid javascript type ReturnFlag flag Flag SetFtcfVar name string Sleep time integer System string Any valid javascript type Unix WarningMessage string Any valid javascript type Windows Detailed Description The global class declares the global object in JavaScript that contains the global properties and methods As well as the core JavaScript methods T HIS also defines other additional ones e g Message Print etc See the documentation below for more details Details of functions AllocateFlag static Description Allocate a flag for use in the script See also ReturnFlag and Once allocated the flag is automatically cleared for all the curves currently in T HIS Arguments No arguments Return type Flag integer Page J 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To allocate a flag var flag AllocateFlag ClearFlag flag Flag static Description Clears a flag on all curves Arguments flag Flag The flag to return Return type No return value Example To clear flag f ClearFlag f Dialoguelnput string_1 string_2 string_n One or more Javascript strings static Description
39. ISO LS PREPOS j DlAdem NASTRAN ii Search directories for results and open open multiple models see Section 5 1 1 1 2 Open Single Model a ii Open a model database and select the models you want to read see Section 5 1 1 1 3 Filename Single Model Extract Multiple Models Search Directories Select models from database Overwrite Page 5 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 1 1 1 Select Model Fan man X Select ANY results file from a model T HIS will LS DYNA Groups THIS Curve then search for all the results files in that directory produced by the same analysis as the Bulk Data Keyboard Screen selected file as illustrated on the right and ISO LS PREPOST DlAdem NASTRAN display a list of all the files found The user can then select which files to open The default is to open all the available results files Open single Model y If you are using the Oasys Ltd SHELL to submit Filename SACHE E C jobs then the default filenames will be ooo eae II jobname thf jobname xtf binout abstat Extract curves to match model 1 etc If you use the standard LSTC output file names then the filenames will be d3thdt Overwrite existing curves xtfile binout abstat Ww Copy curve styles Use default styles The T HIS preference option this file_names can be used to set the default filenames that Set styles Colour Width Style Symbol T HIS searches fo
40. If a CSV file is written out from within a FAST TCF script see section 7 14 then by default it will contain rows containing UNIT information for the curves if UNITS have been defined Some third party applications and scripts can not read T HIS CSV files containing this additional UNIT information correctly The following option can be added to FAST TCF scripts to turn on and off the output of this additional information Keyword second word third wordInotes _ csv on Turns on the output of UNIT information to CSV files off Turms off the output of UNIT information to CSV files Page 7 26 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 6 CURVE TAGS In FAST TCF any operation that uses one or more curves as an input can reference the curve using either the curve number or a curve tag The use of curve Tags is strongly recommended as it enables scripts to be easily modified and sections added deleted without having to renumber all the curve references within the script Curve tags are defined for a curve by adding the keyword TAG to the data extraction command followed by the tag e g node 42 force y dir tag curve 1 node i d 42 force in y direction tag the curve as curve_1 node end of roof accel z tag point 2 node i d end of roof z acceleration tag the curve as point_2 Tags cannot begin with a numeric character e g tag 1_curve is not allowed If a tag is not specified for a curve then FAST TCF w
41. Jeither Octave or 1 3rd Octave bands mean linear _ db __ Yalue for each band can be calculated using either mean or RMS values and the third rms linear input can either be linear or in dB db mean db Order oper foa fuves E o Eo T peepee pee fee te pd Reverse fope cuvest k Rolling averagejoper r av curve 1 averaging If the averaging window is undefined nee or set to 0 0 then the y values at each point are calculated by averaging all lof the proceeding curve points If the averaging window is set to T then the y values at each point are Senet by averaging between T 2 Br Bee 1 smoothing DET m be an integer factor curve 1 true or engineering a a a A a constant gt Teer constant vet 2D oper a T R Mester mag fer pes farang pase pees oper curve 1 han cos lead in only meaa out 2 curves exp for cos option Zero curve X joper curve 1 Shifts curve to 0 0 X and Y values and Y only only 7 8 2 Maths operation commands Description keywordloperation following word ee word jadditional gt Arc cosine oper Fr curve euveHt en e e Arctangent per fatan uwen 3 o e S Cosine oper feos uven Eo e S Logbase10 per fogto buven 3 e S Natural Exp oper l cuve 1 Natural log X per len uwen Poo o e S o D poe are T Sine joper sin uven oo e S Square root joper fs wwen Eo e S Tangent rer fan uwen Eoo e d Page 7 31
42. Leaz fioc Rotational Acceleration EEE bes A 22 Spotweld Data Components For spotwelds the following data components are available I i omon From as nan Pen om ESDA imou asn ax fact u es sa Sharan Sd yes Fr Jean tms ste Fa raue JIG be The following additional data components are also available for Solid Spotwelds and Spotweld Assemblies if the DCFAIL file is written Bending Failure Term Spotweld Area The DCFAIL file contains additional data for spotweld solids and clusters models using the DAIMLERCHRYSLER version of MAT_SPOTWELD this version of the material does not support beam elements The file contains additional failure data showing how close to failure the spotweld is in tension shear bending and torsion in addition it contains another copy the normal spotweld forces written to the SWFORC file The new data components appear under the SOLID and ASSEMBLY sub types within the SPOTWELD menu Ifthe SWFORC file is also present then the normal forces and read from the SWFORC file if the SWFORC file doesn t exist but the DCFAIL file does then the data components Normal shear forces etc that are mirrored in the DCFAIL file are read from there instead As the DCFAIL file only contains the ID s and not the types or each connection then it is not possible to tell from the DCFAIL file alone which items are solids and which ones are spotweld clusters If the SWFORC file is present then T HIS used the inform
43. Nn i a N A Xo Lo WI oo A o bo O Nadal Puch Ka Pah Slaj aa k n N EN ON N gt N en N N endix A endix A 22 endix A 6 ppendix A 28 i Manual Section gt ppendix A 15 Manual Section D T Nn 23 amp Appendix J 6 amp 5 17 3 Nn Nn I lox w 9 en 14 1 Appendix A16 Appendix A 27 Page 0 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 New Features for version 9 4 1 Description Added support for CONSTRAINED_JOINT_STIFFNESS_TRANSLATIONAL New Features for version 9 4 Description Automatic results extraction New MONotonic curve function New Normalise X axis values function New Pure Butterworth filter function New curve correlation function COR3 New Inverse FFT function Curve Properties Units User Defined Shortcuts New FAST TCF commands for setting curve properties New FAST_TCF plot setup commands Added support for new DBFSI data components and DBSENSOR ASCII file Added support for RELAX ASCII file Added support for TPRINT ASCII file Updated T HIS curve file format New Features for version 9 3 Description Multiple Graphs and Pages Quick Pick Curve Options New Screen option for creating curves interactively Floating legend User controlled formatting of Axis values Interactive curve editing PNG and GIF image output formats New Postscript Driver PDF output option 2 and 4 times screen res
44. Ntf is the tension flexion condition Nce is the compression extension condition Ncf is the compression flexion condition Page 5 77 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 11 16 TTI 5 11 17 NOR y 5 11 18 NOR x 5 11 19 REG 5 11 20 VEC 5 11 21 VEC2D 5 11 22 ACU Page 5 78 Thorax Trauma Index This option Upper Rib Acceleration requires 3 input curves to Lower Rib Acceleration Upper Rib Acer tint 146 T12 Acceleration represent the yrs Lower Rib Write To Scree En AN Acceleration anda _ third to represent File default tti the Lower Spine Acceleration Enter these curves in the corresponding input boxes The output can either be written to the screen appearing in a listing box or written to a file specified in the File input box or both If the write to screen tab is highlighted the following window will appear For more information on the calculation of TTI refer to Appendix E LISTING BOX NEXT_PAGE MANUAL Max Rib Accel 7 02475E 05 at t Max T12 Accel z 7 25456E 05 at t TTI value 7 13966E 05 End of list A Normalise the curve so that the Y values are within the range 1 1 Normalise the curve so that the X values are within the range 1 1 Make a curve have a constant time step It is necessary for a curve to have a constant time step between points for it to be filtered This option takes an existing curve and prom
45. O O O 10 0 1 A W N DY FP Oo DH ow NURAN Ae Ww FF O O O 13 0 Page C 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page C 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX D FILTERING This Appendix describes the filtering options within T HIS Curves can be filtered to remove high frequency noise The technique is typically applied to acceleration and force traces Options available include standard filters Channel Frequency Classes 60 180 600 and 1000 as per British Standard BS AU 228 Part 1 1989 and the USA s National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA FIR filter The standard filters except the FIR filter are all special cases of the Butterworth filter D 1 Curve Regulation All filtering options require the curves to have a constant time increment between points This will generally be the case if the curves are LS DYNA time history results If not the REGULARISE option will convert the curve to constant time increment Typically the time increment should be at least 10 times the cut off frequency 10KHz a 0 0001 second interval time base is a good choice for automotive crash applications D 2 Use of the Butterworth Filter Option The Butterworth filter is a low pass filter with two input variables order and cut off frequency The order of the filter controls the Buttenworth filter Gain Characteristics roll off rate as shown here in the figure right This is a 300
46. Return type No return value Example To unset the flag f on all of the curves var curve Curve UnflagAll f Update Description Updates a curve properties min max average values etc Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To update the properties of curve 1 1 Update Page J 25 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Datum class The Datum class gives you access to datums in T HIS More Class functions Delete datum string Exists datum string First GetFromAcronym datum string Member functions e AddToGraph graph graph int e Next e RemoveFromGraph graph graph int Datum constants Datum CONSTANT_X Datum CONSTANT_Y Datum FILL_ABOVE_BELOW Datum FILL_RIGHT_LEFT Datum LABEL_ABOVE_CENTRE Datum LABEL_ABOVE_LEFT Datum LABEL_ABOVE_RIGHT Datum LABEL_BELOW_CENTRE Datum LABEL_BELOW_LEFT Datum LABEL_BELOW_RIGHT Datum LABEL_BOTTOM_LEFT Datum LABEL_BOTTOM_RIGHT Datum LABEL_MIDDLE_LEFT Datum LABEL_MIDDLE_RIGHT Label position middle right Datum LABEL_NONE No label Datum LABEL_TOP_LEFT Label position top left Datum LABEL_TOP_RIGHT Label position top right Datum POINTS Points type datum Datum properties fill_ colour_above The colour above the datum line fill_colour_below The colour below the datum line fill_colour_left The colour left of the datum line fill_colour_right The colour right of the datum line Page J 26 User
47. Timesep je Jiemenweneng yes yes yes fe haas hes MEE WE stonewall energy EN yes spe spring and damper enogy bes yes HG hessas ies BME yes spe system damping cnerey S bes u fues yes yes a Sc en Extemal wok Rs es ies a sinn uam a To ies es es Pe pre a a he Peer Is Mn pr angeben Exe JerodeaKinetiener Eyes Ee Jerodedimernatenegg pes ies no foenore I o peoo e en energy Raio wotee he DRCO Convergence ocr DRKE Tota Kinetic Enerey bes A 2 Part Data Components For Parts the following data components are available COO omo SF aan Berk tio EDA moug ASC BE mie he he m Page A 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS kM fenomenon _ OH ses YM momentum Sd pes ifs zm momentum yes es Wx average x va ies es ies Wy Average velocity yes B yes e AverageZvelociy yes ME yes MA ess ies he yes ee fiosam T ER Energy Raro wo Ered bes bes A 3 Part Group Data Components For Part Groups the following data components are available COO omon RF aman PRT Gato spa isn fasc e Kinescenergy ies Mes es e lnternalenergy es B yes Ba Hourglssenergy yes es ifs ire ___ Totalenergy hes hy MA Dr es SSRs yes A 4 Nodal Data Components For nodes the following data components are available I Teomponent aman Per Gato spa omong fasc Te Temperate fps es fe DX Pie Displacement yes h yes DY Displace
48. To set the display unit system Be gt 00 worditird word _ display UI Setthe display u u2 oO t the displ lus Setin 7 5 3 Curve Axis units By default T HIS will automatically set the Unit System for any curves read from a model to those of the model In addition to setting the curve Unit System T HIS will automatically set a unit type for the X and Y axis of the curve These unit types are maintained through curve operations so that the correct units can be displayed for each curve The X and Y Axis units for a curve can be manually set if required Page 7 25 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Keyword second word third wordladditional words mies cx est fears 2 to curve n Ne ends the curve list name Set the X axis unit for curves name Set the X axis unit for all curves euve 1 une 2 to curve n Me ends the curve list name Set the Y axis unit for curves name Set the Y axis unit for all curves The Unit name can be any of the following Displacement Velocity Volume Moment Force width a oT 7 5 4 Curve Unit Systems If a curve has been read in from any source other than a model then the Unit System can also be set Keyword second word third wordladditional words notes sd cu curve 1 curve 2 to curve n Unit System namel ends the curve list Set the Unit System for curves fe Unit System namel ends the curve list Set the Unit System for all curves 7 5 5 Other UNIT options
49. User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 11 9 HIC d 5 11 10 CLI 5 11 11 EXC 5 11 12 VC HIC d is used to calculate the Head Injury Criteria for the Free Motion Headform used within the FMVSS201 legislation The equivalent dummy HID d is calculated as follows HIC d 0 75446x free motion headform HIC 166 Calculates the i 3ms clip Clip Period s KORON ooa value from an acceleration Screen Label KUE value time history Normally this Show 3ms Clip value _ option writes the value to Write To Screen Write To File the screen and produces File default cip I a curve of the clip region By default the screen value will be labeled as 3ms value This label can be modified by specifying a different Screen Label If required the values may also be written out to a file using the WRITE TO FILE option In addition to calculating and reporting the 3ms clip value the time window and value can be displayed on the graph using the Show 3ms Clip Value option See Appendix E for more details on the 3ms clip calculation Calculate and displays an EXCeedence plot This is a plot of force y axis versus cumulative time x axis for Automatic which the force level has been exceeded By default the a Automatic option will create an exceedence plot using Positive either the ve OR the ve values depending on which the input curve contains most of The Positive option will E Negative calcu
50. Y Z Y Z X For TRACERS the following data components are available Page A 27 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Component mar 3 tht XTF xt file LSDA binout ASCII a a O OO E a a vo zvetciy U van Velocity Magmiuge yes Sa euss Ses s _ swessinvy S T O 1 sxy_ swessinxy O T syz sussmyz ves sex susme DD EF __ etfeaive Pinse suun yes DE ewiy u RV Reise volame yes O ac ae u A 28 PULLEY Data Components yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes For PULLEYs the following data components are available Component THF d3thdt XTF LSDA binout ASCII xtfile Force Slip Rate Warp Angle es i su sip ies es a E a yes yes Page A 28 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX B T HIS CURVE FILE FORMAT A curve file is a file of x y values which can be read into T HIS for plotting It can be written by T HIS or by another program or created using a text editor The format is as flexible as possible to allow many types of data to be handled Line 1 Title Line 2 X axis label Line 3 Y axis label Line 4 Curve label Line 5 X Y point 1 Line 6 X Y point 2 Line n 4 X Y pointn The X and Y values can be in any format as long as the two values are separated by either a space or comma Up to 500000 points can be input Several curves can be put in one file
51. e g shell 99 stress xx tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 middle surface centre value shell 99 stress xx ipoint 1 tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 middle surface in plane integration point 1 shell 99 stress xx surface middle ipoint 1 tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 middle surface in plane integration point 1 shell 99 stress xx surface 5 ipoint 2 tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 layer 5 in plane integration point 2 7 4 4 3 Specifying integration points for Solids In recent versions of LS DYNA it is possible to write out data at all 8 integration points or fully integrated solid elements Page 7 12 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS By default T HIS will automatically read the average value for each element If the element isn t fully integrated then the data for the 1st point will be used if it is fully integrated and has multiple integration points then the average value will be calculated e g solid 99 stress xx tag curve 1 read x stress for solid 99 centre value solid 99 stress xx ipoint 1 tag curve 1 read x stress for solid 99 integration point 1 7 4 4 4 Selecting data at element nodal positions In recent versions of LS DYNA it is possible to write out data for Solid Shells and Thick Shells that has been extrapolated from the integration points to the elements nodes For Shells the values at all through thickness layers can be extrapolated to the nodes For Thick Shells the
52. file In order to save these commands to disk they must be written explicitly using the SAVE TO DISK button They can then be read back in and replayed File position and control A variety of features are available to help lt lt SEARCH RECORD gt SEARCH gt gt move around the file These are shown in the FILE POSITION AND CONTROL area of the panel The file can be indexed lt STEP STOP STEP gt at particular user defined points using the INDEX MARKS menu is accessed by pressing the INDEX button These may TOP et END be used as targets of a search and also to Goto line control recording INDEX SPEED Current command status Line no ornare uneton conan The scratch file is random access and can be moved back and forth and reviewed at will To help with this it is possible to switch between RECORD and REVIEW modes in the session file control box RECORD records all your commands when running REVIEW plays back your recorded commands A command file can be stepped through or run backwards or forwards It may also be searched for a particular command As with a real tape recorder if the pointer is moved backwards and recording continued the commands that were previously stored will be overwritten from that point The session file recording and command file playback operations are totally separate they can be thought of as two separate tape recorders As a consequence it is possible to record commands that ar
53. filenames must all be one word e Rigidwall command must now have n for the xtf file output rather than nothing at all e Shell and Solid effective strain must have the fourth word eff to distinguish them from other types of strain that have been added e No FAST TCE defaults for plot setup defaults are now the T HIS standard ones New features since version 9 1 e Reading of keyword csv csv2 and bulk data files keyboard entry e Operation commands order cat rave stress logx logx10 translate vector2D window e Variables are processed on a line by line basis e Variables can be defined using curve properties for example a variable could be set to equal max of a curve and then used to divide another curve Continuation lines added defined using a at the very end of a line Tabulation commands yatmax and yatmin added for Y values at maximum and minimum X All extraction commands are supported Boundary Geo contacts FSI Joints SPH Thick shells and so on All the missing components for previous data types are now supported Multiple data extraction on one line e g node 100 last acc X Multiple generic tagging and labeling of output curves using wildcard Multiple curves can be operated upon in one line e g oper ADD acc_ 10 0 Multiple curves can be plotted using wildcards in tag names Integration point output can be changed Multiple models supported Extended plotting syntax for setting
54. lt unused gt lt unused gt 5 23 2 5 Maintaining a library of Javascripts It is also convenient to have a library of scripts in a defined location HE SE By default T HIS looks in SEHR engen OA INSTALL this library scripts but File encoding LATING y you can define a different directory by setting the ER preference Memory size MB 9 ate this script directory some_different_ directory name Assign script to function key F1 y In the your oa_pref file All scripts found in the relevant directory will be listed s in the Javascript panel as shown in this example a Using the description comment at the top of a script to identify its purpose To help to identify scripts special comments are searched for in the top 10 lines of each script and if description is found for example the comment line description Some description of the script s purpose Page 5 126 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Then the description line is shown as hover text when the mouse is placed over that filename In the example above the princ2d script has the line description Colour curve by model number Using the name comment at the top of a script to change its name Normally the name shown for a script will be its filename stripped of any leading pathname and trailing js extension However if the string name is found in the first ten lines of the script then the following
55. magnitude or real Return type Curve object or NULL Example Generate curve from magnitude m and phase p data and return as curve q q Operate Ifft m p magnitude Int Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Integrate a curve Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example To integrate curve m and store as curve p p Operate Int m Log Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Natural Log of Y axis values Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 82 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example Calculate Natural Log of Y axis values for curve m and store as curve p p Operate Log m Log10 Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Log base 10 of Y axis values Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Log base 10 of Y axis values for curve m and store as curve p p Operate Logl0 m Log10x Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Log base 10 of X axis values Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Log base 10 of X axis values for curve m and store as curve p p Operate Log10x m Logx Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Natural Log of X
56. ne les p lt lt oO na Plastic Bending energy end 1 m se oO na Plastic Bending energy end 2 lt oO n Y rotation end 1 Y rotation end 2 o n re Oo oO on Io gt REEE ii js Z rotation end 1 Z rotation end 2 yes User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Torsional rotation yes IMzi___ z Bending moment end yes ff mz2 Z Bending moment end yes ff ACE Axial collapse enerey yes Si IE Invest energy fs _ sxx NT So s yes o sxy Por Shearsuess yes MU EN szx zx shearstess yes MU Err Effective plastic sain yes Si er a Discrete Beams Only available if DISBOUT ASCII file has bene written to LSDA binout file AXD Axial displacement Le d yD Displacementin ves Z gt Displacement in ves AXR Axitontion I ug ve Rowtionin Yd ves ZR Rotatiominz yes 3 Frequency Domain Analysis For a steady state dynamic analysis SSD the following nodal data components are available For each data component both amplitude and phase angle data components are available Component THF XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCH d3thdt Basic data components A LL ll NY ET DE NZ Stearn Os a par Momentiny tes DE Mz Momentinz Js uu Mx Torsional moment o TE For a random vibration analysis PSD the following nodal data components are available Component THF XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCTI d3thdt Basic data components d
57. r Pc PDF c ti tite string Specify the plot title postscript PDF igure Number fi figure number Specify the umber postscript ori ___lland port __ Speeify th Image resolution image bmp outputl bmp graph all generate a bitmap called outputl bmp containing all the current graphs image jpeg output2 jpg page 3 generate a JPEG image called output2 jpg containing page 3 image 2x i res set the resolution used for all following images to 2 x the screen resolution Page 7 45 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 image ti Run number 2 set the plot title to Run number 2 for any following postscript or PDF images image ori landscape set the page layout to landscape for any following postscript or PDF images 7 12 6 Pre 9 3 Image Output The following pre T HIS 9 3 image output commands are still supported but users are recommended to use the new format described above Curve styles that have been previously defined can be applied to the curves in the plot and various other settings can be made with regards to the axes and titles Images that require a second yaxis need to determine which curves go on which axis To do this use a in the curve listing to switch to the second axis The options are described in the tables below Curve files can be included within the curves to plot FAST TCF detects a curve file to read in using the pattern string cur at the end of the name The curves are read in
58. renumbers all curves to fill any gaps in curve numbers Gives the current program limits File tracking lists the 20 files which have been accessed most recently by T HIS giving details of the type of file and whether it was read from or written to Exits leaves the program Page 4 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page 4 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 Main Menu Be ii ea 5 1 READ Options 5 2 WRITE Options 5 3 CURVE Manager 5 4 MODEL Manager 5 5 EDIT Options 5 6 STYLE Menu 5 7 Command File 5 8 IMAGE Options 5 9 OPERATE Options 5 10 MATHS Options 5 11 AUTOMOTIVE Options The MAIN MENU provides access to a number of separate menus that perform 5 12 SEISMIC Options most of the operations available within T HIS from reading in data to producing 5 13 MACRO Options postscript laser files 5 14 FAST TCF Options 5 15 TITLE AXES Options 5 16 DISPLAY Options 5 17 SETTINGS Menu 5 18 MEASURE Menu 5 19 GROUPS Menu 5 20 GRAPHS Menu 5 21 PROPERTIES Menu 5 22 UNITS Menu 5 23 JavaScript Menu 5 24 Datum Menu 5 0 Selecting Curves 5 0 1 Input Curves By Curve ID highest 1 A number of the menus require a range of Group 1 40 All None Visible P Pick curves to be selected When a range of curves 4a 3 has to be selected a menu containing alist of Filter Show Groups Key in B the available curves will be displayed see figure right
59. see Section 3 5 IV Draw Right Axis Border M Width FG Colour Fix Styles Background Image E Foreground P Swap Foreground Background Save Display settings in preference file 5 16 1 LEGEND This option will map the Legend settings panel see Section 5 25 5 5 16 2 LINES Lines v Default Line Width This is an ON OFF switch for the lines between points to be drawn for all curves The default is ON The Default Line Width is used for all curves that have not had their widths explicitly set in the CURVE CONTROL menu The default line width can be specified in the preferences file see Appendix H for more details 5 16 3 SYMBOLS symbols Symbol Frequency This is an ON OFF switch which controls whether symbols are plotted on top of the curves to help identify them This option affects all the curves that are currently being used If you wish to turn the symbols on for only some of the curves then this switch should be set to ON and the CURVE CONTROL menu should be used to turn the symbols off on the curves for which you do not want symbols drawn on The default is OFF The Symbols Frequency is used for all curves that have not had a frequency explicitly set in the CURVE CONTROL menu This value controls how often a symbol is drawn on a curve Page 5 96 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 16 3 GRID Grid v r Width This is an ON OFF switch which determines whether or not grid lines are shown o
60. styles are applied and the image is plotted The curves are then deleted The user can use wildcards in the tag names to select multiple curves for plotting bit d bmp 1 3 CRV2 2 4 head accen Title 2nd axis example 2 curves on Ist yaxis and 3 on 2nd yaxis Title bit h bmp 1 3 CRV2 style ONE xax 0 5E 3 Time Title Head curves style to apply xaxis min and max XLabel Title bit 1 bmp 1 100 reference cur line cur 1000 style reference curves and curve files to plot style to apply bmp test bmp accn all curves with tags beginning with accn peg ip jpeg fflename euves additional formatting Pixel map Additional format following word following word format word 1 2 Style application a Il Curves have styles applied in the order they were defined BE We word 1 title word 2 etc Takes following words as a title until another keyword is found X axis options xax if numeric 1 xaxis ifmumeric 2 xexis iy following words as a label until another min max keyword is found otherwise xaxis label_Jotherwise xaxis label Y axis options yax if numeric 1 yaxis if numeric 2 yaxis Takes following words as a label until another min max keyword is found otherwise yaxis label otherwise yaxis label 2nd Y axis options 2ya if numeric 1 yaxis if numeric 2 yaxis Takes following words as a label until another min max keyword is found otherwise yaxis label jotherwise yaxis label Page 7 46
61. the lowest free curve meaning the highest free curve In all cases output will start at the relevant curve number however defined and will rise sequentially with no gaps This can cause an existing curve to be overwritten or the output curve number to exceed the limit of 999 Both conditions are checked for a warning is given if either will occur should the operation go ahead and an opportunity given to modify or abort the pending operation There is a further output option that is only valid for operations where the input is a curve group meaning overwrite the input curve s In this case the input curves are overwritten without warning For example this option might be used to integrate a set of curves overwriting the original results with the integrated values Any curve number between 1 and 999 may be used as an input or output curve It is not necessary to use curves sequentially gaps are permitted in curve number usage Therefore curves 1 and 10 can be used for example without having to use the intervening curves 2 to 9 Likewise deleting a curve will no longer cause those above it to be renumbered downwards to fill the gap Page 5 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 0 3 Curve Operations The functions available fall into four distinct groups 1 Separate functions involving two groups of curves where the result is of the form lt Rn gt lt G1n gt OP lt G2n gt 2 Separate function
62. 2014 T HIS 5 18 MEASURE This menu can be used to make measurements between curve points and or screen points It can also be used to annotate graphs Each graph can contain multiple measurements and annotations Annotation on screen point Measurements can be made between curve and or screen points and can be made between different curves Single points can be measured too Annotations can be made on curve or 0015 screen points 5 18 1 Measure Use this option to pick points on the graph to measure between Write Curves Automotive FAST TCF ettings Measure Groups Command Fil Units i ip Datum 1909 Large Test 9 Belted sled test Mesiurement between screen and curve point X 3185002 Y 4489e 02 Measuremem between different carves X 2 B6te 02 Y 21852902 NY oe Aanctabon on carve port Measure O Anmotate raa a E i gt gt ao C Label O Delete Delete All Page 5 105 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Point Types Pr Curve Point P2 Curve Point x f Curve Point Curve Point Use the popups to select the point type to measure to from Screen Point Screen Point Nothing Label bel O If you specify a label this will be displayed on the measurement Delete Delete This will delete the current measurement 5 18 2 Annotate Measure Menu Use this option to make annotations on the Measure Annotate graph raaj a E i gt gt
63. 2014 T HIS 5 15 5 3 BACKGROUND This option can be used to alter the default background colour of the floating legend By default the colour will be the same as the backgorund colour of the graph As well as setting a different background colour for the floating legend a Yoage transparency can also be specified if the legend obscures any curves 5 15 5 4 USER LINES This option can be used to alter the default text that appears on the bottom right hand corner of each plot Text can be typed into any of the panels or they can be left blank The Size of the text may be altered If no text is specified the area used by the curve legends will be increased The default values are read from the preferences file see Appendix H for more details Page 5 95 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 16 DISPLAY ax Options The DISPLAY menu is shown in the Legend adjoining figure This menu controls the overall appearance of plots Lines v r Default Line Width As well as controlling basic things like the Symbols ui BE Symbol Frequency background colour and whether a grid is Display Options draw this menu also controls a number of Grid 2 r Width default setting that are applied to all curves These default setting may be overwritten for xi P i P r individual curves using the CURVE ze Width Colon CONTROL menu see Section 5 Wv Draw Top Axis Changes to the Display options are only applied to active graphs
64. 2014 T HIS LineStyle class The LineStyle class contains constants relating to the curve line style More LineStyle constants Detailed Description The LineStyle class is used to define the line style used to draw curves p style LineStyle SOLID Page J 59 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 LineWidth class The LineWidth class contains constants relating to the curve line width More LineWidth constants LineWidth BOLD Bold lines 4 pixels wide Line Width FINE Fine lines 1 pixel wide LineWidth HEAVY Heavy lines 8 pixels wide LineWidth NORMAL Normal lines 2 pixels wide Detailed Description The LineWidth class is used to define the line width used to draw curves p width LineWidth NORMAL Page J 60 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Model class The Model class gives you access to models in T HIS More Class functions Exists model number integer GetFromID model number integer HighestIDOQ Total Model properties Directory containing the model file read only File selected when reading the model read only Model ID read only Model title read only Detailed Description The Model class contains information on filenames and directories belonging to a model See the documentation below for more details Details of functions Exists model numberfinteger static Description Checks if a model exists Arguments nu
65. 6 15 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 At the top of the panel you will see the following buttons Restore Defaults Restores the shortcuts to their default keys removing any shortcuts assigned by the user Saves the shortcuts to the oa_pref file in the home directory They are saved in the format this A_key AUTOSCALE where the first part defines which key the shortcut is assigned to and the second part is the shortcut being assigned Each shortcut has a specific name to use in the oa_pref file and a list is given below save to Preferences When T HIS is started this is read and the saved shortcuts are restored Reload Preferences Reloads the shortcuts from the oa_pref file in the home directory Clears all the shortcuts on the panel To assign a shortcut right click on the key you want to assign it to This will bring up a list of all available shortcuts in T HIS as well as the option to assign Macros or FAST TCF scripts F1 F Clear Preferences Menu F2 F Macros gt Groups Menu F3 F FAST TCF Serips Page Layout Menu F4 F Autoscale Command Files F5 F Autoscale Y axis Units Menu F6 F Zoom Restart Quick Pick FF F Zoom in Create Graph F8 F Zoom out Tidy Menus Fg F Plot Swap Curve Group F10 F Blank All Copy Axis Settings Eii F Unblank All Change edit to the next point F12 F Reverse All Shortcut menu A Autoscale gt Read Menu Page Layout Tile Tall B Blank All P Write Menu Page Layout Tile Wide
66. A range of graphs can be 3 A M Bl i _ Ei added removed from pages d5 by selecting the first 4 A v Ej m 3 zZ graph page combination and then holding down Br 5 A v I SHIFT while selecting the 6 A mj 7 u ja BJ second graph page Each page can have a different layout or they can all be the same Page Number All 1 2 3 4 5 Wide F Wide F Wide F Wide F Wide P Wide Page 3 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS With the Advanced option the Graph Layout options work in exactly the same way as the Automatic Page Layout options except they only position the graphs defined on each page If for example T HIS has 6 graphs defined and graphs 2 3 4 5 are defined on page 1 and graphs 1 and 6 are on page 2 then the different graph layout options would produce the following Tile Wide Tile Tall C I 8 gq o n Page 2 Page 3 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 ico PL xxv fayoutdependsonXandY Layout depends on X and Y Layout dependsonXandY depends on X and Y 3 4 Pages T HIS can have a maximum of 32 pages each page can contain multiple graphs For more information on selecting the currently displayed page see Section 4 1 The Image Output options and the FAST TCF Create option can produce output for either a single page or multiple pages if graphs are located on more than one page 3 5 Active Graphs If T HIS contains more than one graph then each graph c
67. Arguments Source filename you want to copy Destination filename you want to copy source file to Return type true if copy successful error otherwise Example To copy the file data test file key to data test file key_backup var copied File Copy data test file key data test file key backup Delete filename string static Description Deletes a file Page J 35 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Filename you want to delete Return type true if successful false if not Example To delete the file data test file key var deleted File Delete data test file key Exists filename string static Description Check if a file exists See also File IsDirectory and See also File IsFile Arguments Filename you want to check for existance Return type true false Example To see if the file data test file key exists if File Exists data test file key do something FindFiles directory string type optional constant static Description Find any files and or directories in a directory Arguments Directory to look for files directories in type Type of things to find Can be bitwise OR of File FILE and File DIRECTORY If omitted optional only files will be returned Return type Array of filenames directories Page J 36 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To return the filenames in t
68. Curve Cor 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve Correlation type string Cor3 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve X axis factor optional float Y axis factor optional float Cos Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Da Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Dif Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Div 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Dix 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Ds Input Curve Curve Broadening Factor float Redefine Frequencies string Output Curve optional Curve Dv Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Env Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve Err 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Exc Input Curve Curve Output option string Output Curve optional Curve Exp Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Fft Input Curve Curve Output option string X axis interval optional float Output option string Fir Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve Hic Input Curve Curve Window float Acceleration factor float Hicd Input Curve Curve Window float Acceleration factor float Ifft 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve Input type string Int Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Log Input Curve
69. Curve Output Curve optional Curve Lor i Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Log10x Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Logx Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Lsq Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Map Ist Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Max Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve Min Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve Mon Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Mul 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Mux 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Nep 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve Nij Shear Force Curve Axial Force Curve Moment Curve Fzc tension float Fzc compression float Myc Flexion float Myc Extension float E float Nor Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Nox Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Octave Input Curve Curve Band type to convert to String Output Type String Output Type String Output Curve optional Curve Order Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Pbut Input Curve Curve Frequency float Order integer X axis interval optional float Output Curve
70. DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card also outputs strain tensor values at each in plane integration point as well as all the through thickness layers T HIS does not currently support strain values from multiple in plane integration points Extrapolated Stress Strain Values The parameter NODOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card can be used to generate stress and strain values that have been extrapolated to the nodal positions instead of values at the elements integration points T HIS does not currently support these extrapolated values A 9 Rigid Wall Data Components For rigid walls the following data components are available Page A 17 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Component THF a3that XTF atfile LSDA binout ASCII SS ee A 10 Discrete Element Spring Damper Data Components For springs and dampers the following data components are available eomponent rs asao PRT Gat ESDA in asen Fr fee ED es er Jelongaion yes oes ee FE Jroreeserslongsion N Mi Ber en Mt Moms Rt Raion M Moment venus Rowton x o looa FY loov owe zo loaz Me Monon N l MY Momentiny Pes des mz o Momeni Js be A 11 Seat Belt Data Components For seat belts the following data components are available C omon Pro aad Pen Gatto SDA minsun Jaso a e M Te I sr sin ji TE FS Jromsvomussiin fi Me cx owein Sides fe A 12 Retractor Data Components For retractors the
71. LOG10 5 10 5 n 5 10 6 LOG x 5 10 7 LOG10 x 5 10 8 SIN 5 10 9 ASIN 5 10 10 COS 5 10 11 ACOS 5 10 12 TAN 5 10 13 ATAN Page 5 72 The square root of a curve Natural log to base e e to power of Log to base 10 Raise to power n Log to base 10 x axis values Log to base 10 x axis values Sine radians assumed Arc sine Cosine Arc cosine Tangent Arc tangent User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 11 AUTOMOTIVE lt lt Undock Automotive 2x Options ceo cieo ceoo como BuT BuT The AUTOMOTIVE menu is shown in the FR nic aba OEL Be vo figure right The automotive options are a ASI THI NIJ TTI NOR y NOR x number of operations that can be performed REG VEC VECOJ ACU COR TEOR typically finding thei in th Automotive industry They consist of filters ee EES Pee FT eee eee and injury criteria calculations along with a COR3 WIF number of other useful functions All the options in the AUTOMOTIVE menu require a single set of curves as input except the VEC and VEC 2D options which require groups of 3 or 2 curves respectively as input but only output a single curve See Section 5 0 for more information on curve groups Notes on using the various filters When filtering curves the sampling rate of the data should be considered it should be at least twenty times the filter cutoff frequency if good results are to be obtained T HIS will reject attempts
72. RUE FALSE RUE buttons can be scaled down to fi font_silent logical gt whether to write RUE FALSE FALSE explanatory text if anted fonts are not round enu font size SMALL DEFAULT LARGE DEFAULT font_type string gt Menu font typeface HELVETICA HELVETICA BOLD TIMES HELVETICA and strength IMES BOLD COURIER COURIER BOLD left_handed string gt Left handed switching NONE MOUSE KEYBOARD ALL NONE of mouse and or eyboard ZOOM _ DOWN N D gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 2 ry Ed 3 z gt gt D zoom_factor eal gt Zoom Factor for 0 01 0 2 0 05 mouse wheel 0 01 0 2 dynamic zoom 0 01 0 2 kzoom_factor real gt Factor for D 01 100 0 2 eyboard short cut eys The following options define how Javascripts are processed by THIS See section 5 23 for further details arguments Er er irectory in which T HIS looks DI OA_INSTALL this_library scripts for scripts oarDase colle on Page H 12 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Keys can have functions assigned to them arguments IF1_key Shortcut for Fl none gt string string IF3_key Shortcut for F3 none gt string string IF5_key Shortcut for F5 none gt string F6_key Shortcut for F6 none gt string string IF8_key Shortcut for F8 none gt string string IF10_key Shortcut for F10 none gt string string string Shortcut for A AUTOSCALE string string _key Shortcut for C URVE_MENU string string E_key Sho
73. Run 3 Run 4 model e test crush2 base base ptf gt v lt run_1 label Run 1 model oO test crush2 run1 runl ptfi gt lt run_2 label Run 2 model e test crush2 run2 run2 ptfi gt lt run_3 label Run 3 model oO test crush2 run3 run3 ptfi gt lt run_4 label Run 4 model e test crush2 run4 run4 ptfi gt lt iteration_2 gt lt Template_Demo gt lt model_database gt 5 1 1 2 Automatic extraction of Extract curves to match model Kr model results _ Overwrite existing curves Copy curve styles Use default styles When a second or subsequent model is opened in i PY Y Y T HIS this option can be used to automatically i generate the same curves as those already read E Set styles Colour _Width Style Symbol from another model This option can also be used if a model is re read into T HIS to extract the same curves as those that had already been read from the model By default this option will attempt to generate curves that match those already read from model 1 If results have already been read from more than one model then the model to match the curves form can be set to any of the existing models This option can be used to overwrite the existing curves from a model If a model has been read into T HIS and curves have been read from the model while the analysis was still running then this option can be used to automatically update the curves V Overwrite existin
74. Select sort by CumeID Cure ID Curve ID ID Label 2 BEms r Node 1344 BE O re Disp y Node 1343 Ce A DF EAEE 10 g 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 eo e dl 18 Page 5 33 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 3 1 Reordering Curves INSERT CURVE BEFORE INSERT CURVE AFTER Attached to each of the curve number buttons is a popup menu that can be used to reorder curves by copying and moving them This menu is accessed by clicking the COPY CURVE right mouse button over the curve number buttons INSERT CURVE BEFORE INSERT CURVE AFTER COPY CURVE COPY CURVE STYLE MOVE CURVE MOVE CURVE STYLE DELETE CURVE 5 3 2 Blank Blank All Unblank All Pick Visible Reverse All Blank by Model Unblank by Model Blank by Group Unblank bv Group Page 5 34 COPY CURVE STYLE MOVE CURVE MOVE CURVE STYLE Inserts the last curve copies to a scratch definition before the selected curve Inserts the last curve copies to a scratch definition after the selected curve Copies the curve to a scratch definition Copies the curve along with is line style settings to a scratch definition Copies the curve to a scratch definition and then deletes the original curve Copies the curve along with is line style settings to a scratch definition and then deletes the original curve Deletes the selected curve Blank All Unblank All Pick Visible Reverse All
75. Snap to curve points values for the limits individual x and y axis Select by area minimum and maximum values can be selected by picking screen points In addition to picking individual points an area can be dragged out interactively to set all 4 limits When picking screen points the default is to allow any point to be selected Snap to curve points can be used to select the point on the nearest curve instead of the screen coordinates 5 9 7 COM Two curves are combined to give a new curve For example ifa displacement time curve is a combined with a velocity time curve a velocity displacement curve will result If the 2 curves do not contain points at the same x values then the curve with the larger x axis intervals is automatically mapped on to the x axis values of the other curve If the curves do not start and finish at the same x axis values then only the points for which the two curve x axes overlap are mapped onto each other 5 9 8 DI E A curve is differentiated with respect to the x axis variable 5 9 9 DIV Divide the y axis values of the first curve by the y axis values of the second curve or a constant If az two curves are being used they must have identical x axis values 5 9 1 0 DIX Divide the x axis values of the first curve by the x axis values of the second curve or a constant If I two curves are being used they must have identical y axis values 5 9 11 Produces a single curve that bounds the maximum an
76. T HIS will stop at this line You can set this error amount internally within FAST TCF e Once T HIS has stopped the errors are summarised in the command line box and the terminal that T HIS was run from The number of warnings found is also printed e It should be obvious what is wrong FAST TCF checks numerous things including e Whether T HIS created the curve from the previous line e That the syntax is correct for all the data input lines the data extraction requests have additional checking to check the combinations of words inputted is right e If the syntax is correct whether it applies to the file being requested for output e The output file exists in the directory for the data extraction e Correct the input line error utilising the reference tables in this document if applicable Identifying what errors T HIS is giving e Identify how many curves were outputted into T HIS before things went wrong run T HIS in graphical mode e Place an exit keyword after the next input line This should stop T HIS just after the line which is causing the file to fail e Check what errors T HIS is giving out If it s not obvious what went wrong then try another procedure Identifying if there are warnings or errors from FAST TCF e The errors are summarised once T HIS has finished They are printed in the command line box and the terminal which T HIS was run from There will be a input_file rep or input_file output file in the directory which c
77. Y AX dade y2_label_font Kstring gt Font for Helvetica_Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium Default second Y ourier_Bold Times_Medium Times_bold Default QX gape s Wy2_label_colourKstring gt Colour of FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE FOREGROUND second Y YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE axis label DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_ 34 COL_35 COL_36 y2_axis_size tring gt Font size for 8 10 12 14 18 24 Default Default second Y AX n tring gt Colourof FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE FOREGROUND second Y YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE axis units DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 CO
78. all of the curves should be created and used within the curve list Alternatively if the curves are being written to a T HIS curve file then the first 100 curves can be output using the cop keyword and then additional curves can be appended to the file using the app keyword 7 14 1 Specifying curves using Curve Numbers When outputting curves to a file a range of explicit curve numbers can be specified using the syntax start end This option only applies to curve numbers because curve tag can be defined in an arbitrary order 7 14 2 CSV files If a CSV CSV2 file is written out from within a FAST TCF script then by default it will contain rows containing UNIT information for the curves if UNITS have been defined This additional information can be turned off if it isn t required see section 7 5 5 Page 7 51 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page 7 52 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDICES A LS DYNA Data Components B Format of a T HIS Curve File C Format of a T HIS Bulk Data File D Filtering E Injury Criteria F Curve Correlation G The ERROR function H The preference file I Command line options and Windows file associations J List of Typed Commands Page A 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 APPENDIX A LS DYNA Data Components A 1 Model Data Components The following global data components are available COO omom F aman RTF Gato spa Gin fasc Dr
79. all the curves that contain a displacement magnitude for Node 10000 This option can be used to quickly assign all of the curves for the same entity and component to the same graph when comparing results from multiple models Page 5 38 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Include Include Curves and Group By default the curve table contains both curves and curve groups This option can be used to display either just the curves only or just the curve groups J Curves Only J Groups Only Show Models By Model number Show Models By If the column displaying the model ID is displayed in the curve table then by default it will J3 Directory display the model number R THF File This option can be used to display either _ User Defined The model ID 1 KE Whole Model E ttestiCRUSHIBASE 1 Model KE 2 LE Whole Model E testiCRUSH IBASE 1 Model LE The model 1 KE Whole Model E ttestiCRUSH IBASE BASE Model KE directory 2 IE Wihole Model EttestCRUSHBASE BASE Model IE The name of the 1 KE hole Model E test CRUSHBASE base Model KE THE filg 2 IE Whole Model EttestCRUSHBASE base Model LE A user defined 1 K E Vhole Model E testiCRUSH BASE M1 Model KE model oo 2 IE Wihole Model Eitest CRUSHIBASE M1 Model LE 5 3 4 3 Filter Options Filter by Model x Label x Type x Component x The filter options can be used to filter the list of curves displayed in the curve table Multiple filt
80. also make a script more compact e g setup ax bold grid on line bold reverse bold axes grid on bold lines reverse foreground and background setup double on border off show 3ms size 250 double axes on no border 3ms window on size 1000 x 650 pixels setup fonts title hb 24 red title helvetica bold 24pt in red for colours see standard list below standard colour for colours see standard list below for colours see standard list below heavy on or off ee Te on or off his overwrites any style definitions xlJabel hm 8 Colourl sets up fonts for the image o 12 5 7 507 5 lp iO D o 5 3 5 D 3 Sales 3 ala s 3 lo p v D v 19 a Q Q 2 o o O e i a D 2 cm 12 fonts available ellcb 14 hm helvetica medium tm 18 cb courier bold to 24 tm times new roman medium etc Re D oO a a no font sizes in pt 8 10 12 etc for colours see standard list below lt ID n for colours see standard list below aon En bold lonoroff on Turnon plotting of curvelines fine setthe line thickness totpixel bold setthe line thickness to 4pixes O heavy auto Adds a model prefix to the entity IS le lgend standard colour ful fine 8 50585 5 35 If set to the auto only puts the model number on when there is more than 1 model in T HIS et the model prefix to the model ID et
81. be set to 2010 BS EN 1317 1 2010 or 1998 BS EN 1317 1 1998 Arguments X Acceleration Curve X Acceleration Curve Y Acceleration a Z Acceleration Acceleration Curve Z Acceleration IZ Acceleration Cure S Factor required to divide input acceleration curve by to convert to G factor X Acceleration Limit X direction acceleration limit Y Acceleration Limit Y direction acceleration limit Z Acceleration Limit Z direction acceleration limit Calculation method Either 2010 or 1998 X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 67 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example Calculate ASI using the 2010 method with input curves x y and z factors 12 9 10 and a conversioon factor of 9810 Regularise the input curves using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate Asi x y z 9810 0 12 0 9 0 10 0 2010 0 0001 Asin Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Arc Sine Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Arc Sine of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Asin m Atan Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Arc Tangent Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Arc Tangent of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Atan m Page J 68
82. be sorted by any column by clicking on the header button for the column Clicking on the same header a 2nd time reverses the sort order for the column 5 3 4 1 Adding Removing Curves from graphs To add an individual curve or curve group to a graph the tick boxes on the right hand side of the Pree WORT yc curve table can be used _ m The first column of tick boxes under the can be used to add remove a curve from all the currently A w mm defined graphs while the top row of tick boxes can be used to add remove all the currently defined curves from a graph AM dH e Ifall of the curves are unblanked in a graph then the tick box will display a black tick in a white box AW WJ e If some of the curves are unblanked in a graph then the tick box will display a dark grey tick AV d in a grey box e If none of the curves in a group are unblanked in a graph then the tick box will be empty AV dH Multiple tick boxes can be set unset by clicking on the first 1 and then using pressing shift which clicking on the last one Page 5 36 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Individual curves can also be selected by clicking on them in the main part of the curve table Multiple curves can be selected using either CTRL to select a single curve or SHIFT to select a range of curves As curves are selected they are highlighted in blue and the tick boxes for any unselected curves are greyed out When multiple curves have been selected then clicking
83. boolean If true default then a close X button will automatically be added on the top right of the window If false then no close button will be shown shown read boolean true if window is currently shown false if not only top coordinate of window in range 0 0 bottom to 1 0 top width of window Page J 130 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Detailed Description The Window class allows you to make windows that you can place Widgets in to create a graphical user interface The Widget class also gives a number of static methods for convenience e g Window GetInteger The following very simple example displays some text in a window with a button that unmaps the window when it is pressed and the user confirms that s he wants to exit Create window with title Text from 0 8 1 0 in x and 0 5 0 6 in y var w new Window Text 0 8 1 0 0 5 0 6 Create label widget var 1 new Widget w Widget LABEL 1 40 1 7 Press OK to exit Create button widget var e new Widget w Widget BUTTON 11 30 8 14 OK Assign the onClick callback method to the function confirm_exit e onClick confirm_exit sae the widget and start event loop w Show nn function confirm exit Map confirm window var ret Window Question Confirm exit Are you sure you want to quit If the user has answered Yes then exit if ret Window YES w Exit See the documentation
84. can be deselected Forces Page 5 28 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS T HIS will automatically create curve labels for each curve generated from the PCH file The entity types ID s and components will also be stored with the curves to allow the curves to be sorted using the curve table see Section 5 3 4 1 z 3 4 4 G 7 amp 9 h b b m W he O Vol x Mode 1 subtage 1 ol y Mode d gubtage 1 Wola Mode 1 subtase 1 Rival x Mode 1 eubease 1 Fely Mode 1 subcane 1 Rival z Mode 1 eubcase 1 Wola Mode 2 subtade 1 Wel y Mode 2 subtage 1 Wola Mode 2 subcage 1 Rival x Mode 2 subease 1 Rival y Mode J cubcase 1 Rivel z Mode 2 subcase 1 Wel w Node J subnade 1 Wel y Mode 3 subtase 1 Wel z Mode 3 subease 1 Rwa x Medi 3 subeace 1 Rival y Hode I subcase Rivel z Noda 3 subcode 1 Force DAMP 5 gubecase 1 Force CDAMP B gt subcase 1 Eee PCHATIME Een PCHTIME E 4estPCHITIME Eest CHIME E Mest CHATIME EuesNPCHITIME EMePCHTIME Euer PCHTIME East PCHTIME Eesti PC HATIME Euer PCHTIME Eu PCHATIME EMeNPCHTIME E MesflPCHITIME Endan PCHITIME Edesti PCHITIHE Eue ACHTIME Eest PHAITIME Edesti PCHTIHE m h a Yoke a a a a d a l a e l Ke l Md I 1 i i i i 1 i Page 5 29 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 2 WRITE Options Writes a group of curves out to a file for later use or to the screen Curves Selected 2 Select Curves
85. compatible between versions of T HIS For these reasons most users prefer the new FAST TCF format which can also be recorded and played back from within T HIS In screen menu mode a command has a meaning beyond the simple command word For example HELP appears in many different places with a distinct meaning or relevance in each place Therefore context information is stored when saving screen menu session files In practice the following information is saved e the command itself whether typed of inferred from a button the button identification if any the parent window identification the menu item if relevant the action type screen pick button press etc any x y coordinates that may be relevant A choice of either writing recording session files or executing playing back command files is given By default commands are not saved If they are to be saved the session file record switch must be turned on Page 5 58 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 7 1 Writing x en Session BEE Recorc Playback Pause Resume To write a session file the record Record Resume CONTROLS button must be pressed displaying the RECORD COMMAND FILES menu shown right File saving amp mode Pressing the RECORD gt button will start _ Review mode SAVE TO DISK the session file Thereafter all commands except those in the session playback windows are saved in an internal scratch Record mode DELETE TO EOF
86. er ese _ i DE Demi A ie m frema Ey A 17 Joint Data Components G lt OQ a lt oO n For joints the following data components are available Component THF a3that XTF atte LSDA inou ASCH Basic Joints Page A 20 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 x lt Global X force Global Y force Global Z force Force Magnitude z Moment in X T HIS o n o nn Moment in Y lt Oo n o n n N Moment in Z sa o es Bes Best Bes Moment Magnitude eneral Stiffness Joints HA Phi angle PH d Phi dt HS Phi stiffness moment J az T J J Phi damping moment T Phi total moment x gt lt S 3 1210 I 12 Theta angle d Theta dt Theta stiffness moment gt o a lt o Theta damping moment T Theta total moment lt o o n gt Psi angle d Psi dt Psi stiffness moment Blals gja lt Oo Psi damping moment I Psi total moment Total joint energy T o lt o m eo Z a 4 5 m un 2 5 2 i gt an Alpha angle d Alpha dt Alpha stiffness moment gt SEE BIZ Ie Alo Alpha damping moment Alpha total moment Beta angle d Beta dt ES Beta stiffness moment w w ED Beta damping moment ET Beta total moment gr y GA Gammaange Eyes s O DD atGammayae Si yes ies osr Gamma scale fie SSCs os EN Totajoinenersy EU bes XD Xdispl
87. errors which fail at some stage when being run A typical example of a run time error is an attempt to divide a value by zero yielding the illegal result infinity More subtle errors involve passing an invalid value to a function accessing an array subscript that is out of range and so on The T HIS Javascript API has been written in such a way that it handles harmless run time errors by issuing a warning and continuing execution but that more serious errors which could result in the wrong answers being generated issue an error message and terminate 5 23 2 3 Setting the Garbage Memory size MB man Collection Threshold Size This is an advanced topic and you don t need to understand it JavaScripts execute inside a memory arena allocated dynamically from the operating system which grows in size as storage is requested within the script This growth occurs due to requests for new variables within the script and also when API functions allocate and return values and objects and it is limited only by what the operating system can deliver The nature of JavaScript means that objects frequently become redundant and it is wasteful not to reuse the storage that they occupy therefore there is a Garbage Collection process running behind the scenes which periodically checks storage and releases that which is no longer needed This process is automatic and hidden from the user it just happens However Garbage Collection is qu
88. find out the order things are done in The function that the user is currently looking at is highlighted in blue You can move up or down the call stack by clicking on a line The main text window will jump to the correct file and line The line will be shown with a blue triangle instead of a green triangle Exceptions Sometimes when developing a script you get errors that you need to try to investigate and fix e g an object is null when it should be defined or you try to call a method that does not exist for an object In these cases an exception is thrown by JavaScript and the script would terminate is run normally JaDe will trap the exception and stop at the line where the exception occured e g If for example you has the following code var w new Window Example 0 5 1 0 0 5 1 0 w BadMethod w Show There is no method called BadMethod for a Window JaDe will stop at this point and allow you to look at the script Page M 5
89. first non zero Y maximum in a window and the table below describes them in more detail Requests which require inputs e g tl and t2 of a window take the default values in the table if the following words do not appear to be numbers or if no following words exist Property to output property value words word Minimumx min Ss i Imax a Xatminimumy am E Yatminimumx 0 oa E efault t1 1E19 and t2 1E19 efault t1 1E19 and t2 1E19 Maximumy max E Xatmaximumy ams E Yatmaximumx 0 oaa E efault t1 1E19 and t2 1E19 efault t1 1E19 and t2 1E19 default t1 1E19 and t2 1E19 be ee ti of Hic window ict Eoo Eo t2ofHicwindow ict Hicd 117 Eo Eo ti ofHicdwindow o y obi N t2 of Hicd window ict Bms ms E E ti of 3ms window mst Eoo Eo t2 of 3mswindow i ea E Eo Ek Page 7 47 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 default xvalue 1E19 peas y value amp gate default yvalue 1E19 time igate 1E19 CI nonzero 1 1000000th of curve a nonzero 1 1000000th of curve O nonzero 1 1000000th of curve EE peer t H pemaxer F o N be F pooo Jarea_ert a fF p Bears e in Returns curve correlation value 7 13 2 Writing out curve e to a text tabulation file This is achieved using the tabulation command This automatically overwrites any existing file in the output directory but only on the first occurrence in the input script If this is not desired then use the
90. foreground and background colours see Fore Back Section 5 16 10 for more details Plot Format Page 6 2 Set the current plot format see Section 5 15 5 2 for more details Plotting Plot Zoom Point Autoscale Centre Functions Automotive Operate Maths Seismic Display Title Axis Legend Display Grid Symbols A Lines yf Border Foreground PS eckground Swap Fore Back Plot Format r User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 6 1 6 Images Images BMP JPEG The Images drop down menu can be used to save the current displayed graphs as Postscript an image in a number of formats In addition to saving an image this menu can ostscrip also be used to read in an image that is used as the background for each graph Background BMP Capture the image as a bitmap or JPEG see Section 5 8 1 for JPEG more details Postscript Generate a Postscript or PDF image see Section 5 8 2 for more details Background This option can be used to set an image as the background for each graph see Section 5 8 3 for more details Page 6 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 1 7 Options The Options drop down menu can be used to access all the following functions Command File Settings FAST TCF Convert LSDA gt ASCII Edit Preferences Menu Attributes Auto Update Show Model Prefix Prefix Format Drag with curves Shortcuts Page 6 4 see Section 5 11 for m
91. from any host If T HIS still fails to work then please contact your system manager or contact Oasys Ltd for advice and help 1 2 5 Command Line Mode Command line mode is the main method of data input on non X Windows devices Command line mode is also available within the X Windows screen interface and is accessed through the dialogue window In command line mode the user will be presented with a prompt which also indicates which level of the menu structure the user is at For example Defaults gt In response to the prompt a valid option must be given These are usually a two or three letter abbreviation of a command for example PL is the command to plot a graph A list of the commands available is provided by typing M for Menu In addition to commands specific to one menu there are a number of commands which have the same effect throughout T HIS Q Quit Abort and return to current menu Go up a level in the menu structure Return to the top level menu Equivalenttoa lt carriage return gt ina string of commands M Lists menu Several commands can be strung together on one line separated by spaces for example DE GR ON Numeric data can also be included in the command line if required for example OP ADX 1 7 2 Commands can be in upper or lower case As well as menu level commands you will be asked questions such as THF file to read filename 1 The default response if one exists is given in parenth
92. in T HIS are set to look for the file naming convention set for the LS DYNA output files by the SHELL This option can be used to swap the file filters back to the default LSTC naming convention This option can be set in the Preference File name Extra Time jobname xtfktfile istor File Output The HIC 3ms Clip ASI THIV TTI Automotive injury criteria functions and ERR operator function can all send there output to a file as well as to the screen These options can be used to select which functions send out to a file and to specify a Root Filename that is used for all of the output files The Root Filename can be set in the Preference File XTF xtfile File File Output Settings x Data Files General Layout File Names V ARUP hf _ LSTC a3thdt Root Filename for Output Write HIC to file __ Write 3ms Clip to fil _ Write ASI to file __ Write THIV to file __ Write TTI to file _ Write ERR to file THF d3that File __ Swap Title E Software Development V E Software Development V E Software Development V E Software Development V E Software Development V E Software Development V File Skip number File family size MB __ Swap Title File Skip number File family size MB Page 5 101 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 17 3 General Curve Operations All of the AUTOMOTIVE filters are designed to filter curves using seconds as
93. in a window Several callback methods are used The exit button allows the user to exit the script but the button is only made active if the checkbox widget is ticked If the button widgets are pressed feedback is given to the user var count 0 Create window var w new Window Test 0 8 1 0 0 5 0 6 Create all of the widgets var 1 new Widget w Widget LABEL 1 30 1 7 Text var t new Widget w Widget TEXTBOX 31 80 1 7 Enter text var b new Widget w Widget BUTTON 1 30 8 14 Press me var b2 new Widget w Widget BUTTON 31 61 8 14 Don t press me var c new Widget w Widget CHECKBOX 62 68 8 14 var 12 new Widget w Widget LABEL 1 80 15 21 You haven t pressed the button yet var e new Widget w Widget BUTTON 1 21 22 28 Exit Allow button widget b2 to toggle b2 toggle true The exit button is initially inactive e active false Assign the callback functions b onClick clicked b2 onClick clicked c onClick clicked t onChange changed e onClick confirm exit show the window and start event loop w Show ET TLELEL TELLTALE TAT ETA AAT AT ETS HN TATA ATTA TAT AT ATT AAT AAPA TA ET ET function clicked If checkbox is clicked then set the state of the exit button if this c Message Checkbox clicked e active c pushed Tf the Don t press me button is pressed then change the colour i
94. int point 2 Layer 2 in plane int point 2 Layer n in plane int point 2 Layer 1 in plane int point 3 NOTE If non fully integrated shells are included in the list of elements written to the THF file then in some versions of LS DYNA the 2nd 3rrd and 4th in plane values will all be zero Care should therefore be taken if the 4 in plane values are averaged In some versions of LS DYNA the Ist in plane integration point is correctly written out using the global axis system while the 2nd 3rd and 4th in plane values are written using the elements local coordinate system Care should therefore be taken if the 4 in plane values are averaged A 7 2 LSDA binout File Stress By default stress tensors are in the local element coordinate system Values are written out for all the through thickness and in plane integration points Strain The Strain tensors output is optional By defaul the values are in the local element coordinate systems and only values at the top and bottom integration points are output T HIS will average these values for the mid surface These are not written to the LSDA file Moments Extra By default Extra data components are not written to the LSDA file Some recent versions of LS DYNA can now write the Extra data components to the LSDA file if the parameters OPTION OPTION2 OPTION3 and OPTION4 are set on the DATABASE_ELOUT card Global v Local coordinate system results The LSDA file can contai
95. items are displayed in the curve table J Group By Model File _ Group Common items All Items By default the curve table will contain 1 KE Whole Model E BASE 1 Model 1 K E one row for each curve and one row for each curve group 2 LE Whole Model E BASE 1 Model 1 LE 3 K E VVhole Model E RUN1 2 Model 1 K E 4 LE Whole Model E RUN1 2 Model 1 LE 11 Dispmag Node 100 E BASE 1 Node 10000 Disp ma 12 Dispmag Node 100 ERUN 2 Node 10000 Disp ma 1 Model_1 NA N A GROUP 7 Mixed 2 Model_2 NIA N A GROUP Mixed Group By Model File This option will display a single row EXBASE 1 Mixed for all the curves that were read from EARUN1 2 r Pr Mixed the same model or file Wiet E ATEA Model_1 Nia MNA GROUP 8 Mixed en this option 1s selected the i columns for curve ID Label Type Model_2 NIA N A GROUP a Mixed Entity ID and component display a as they represent multiple values This option can be used to quickly assign all of the curves from a single model or file to the same graph Group By Common Items This option will display a single row x Model 1 KE Mixed for all the curves that were created b k i Model 4 IE Mixed using the same entity type ID and me component eoa 7 Node 10000 Disp ma Mixed In the example opposite the 1st row 1 Model_1 N A N A GROUP j Mixed represents all of the curves that 2 Model_2 NIA WA GROUP Mixed contain a model Kinetic Energy while the 3rd row represents
96. last buttons selected will have their status changed to match that of the first button that was selected The line label for each curve may be changed by over typing the label currently displayed in the line label box The button located between the curve number button and the curve label shows the current colour line style and symbol that will be used to plot the curve These properties can be modified by clicking on this button to display the line style menu see Section 5 6 The CURVE CONTROL window can also be accessed via the File Curves option at the top of the graphics window or from the Curves button in the main menu Page 5 32 lt lt Undock Curve Manager Ban consense ST CTA peee Ten f EE Disp x Node 1343 Curve Range Select Sortby CumeID Cure ID Curve ID ID EE Disp x Node 1344 EE KE o O O 6 Disp y Node 1345 EA EME DE oc E Disp z Node 13 t2 100 4 12 13 4 5 Ke User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS If the curve labels are too long j to be seen in the standard Curve CURVE CONTROL Manager menu then the menu can be turned into a floating gt gt Dock Curve Manager menu by selecting the lt lt lt Undock option in the menu Blank Condense Summary header After undocking the menu it can be re docked by Delete Table Scan selecting gt gt gt Dock Labels Curve Range
97. level configuration files xx 12 for release 12 0 thus OA ADMIN 12 Admin level oa_pref file Other configuration files Timeout configuration file Page L 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 OA_ADMIN Optional Same as OA_ADMIN_ 12 provided for backwards compatibility with earlier releases It is recommended that plain OA_ADMIN without the xx version suffix is not used since otherwise there is no easy way of distinguishing between parallel installations of different releases of the Oasys Ltd software in an installation IfOA_ADMIN 12 is not defined then this non release specific version is checked OA_ INSTALL xx Optional xx 12 for release 12 0 thus OA ADMIN 12 oasys install dir lt pathname gt All executables Installation level oa_pref file OA_INSTALL Optional Same as OA_INSTALL_ 12 oasys install dir lt pathname gt Ifno OA ADMIN xx directory is used and all software is simply placed in this install directory which would be typical of a single user installation then it is recommended that the xx version suffix is used in order to keep parallel installations of different releases of the Oasts Ltd software separate on the machine IfOA_INSTALL_ 12 is not defined then this non release specific version is checked OA _ MANUALS Optional Specific directory for user manuals If not defined oasys manuals dir then will search in lt pathname gt OA ADMIN xx manuals xx major version number OA I
98. manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS fill_type integer The fill type Can be Datum FILL_ABOVE_BELOW Datum FILL_RIGHT_LEFT Note that this can only be changed if the datum is of the type Datum POINTS label_colour The colour of the datum label label_position integer The label position Can be Datum LABEL_NONE Datum LABEL_ABOVE_CENTRE Datum LABEL_ABOVE_LEFT Datum LABEL_ABOVE_RIGHT Datum LABEL_ BELOW_CENTRE Datum LABEL_BELOW_LEFT Datum LABEL_ BELOW_RIGHT Datum LABEL MIDDLE LEFT Datum LABEL_TOP_LEFT Datum LABEL_BOTTOM_LEFT Datum LABEL_ MIDDLE RIGHT Datum LABEL_TOP_RIGHT Datum LABEL_BOTTOM_RIGHT The colour of the datum line LineStyle The line style used to draw the datum line Line Width The line width used to draw the datum line Detailed Description The Datum class allows you to create and manipulate datums See the documentation below for more details Constructor new Datum acronym string type integer value real or array Description Create a new Datum object The datum will be added to all the currently active graphs Arguments type integer Specify type of datum line Can be Datum CONSTANT_X Datum CONSTANT_Y Datum POINTS value real or Value for Datum CONSTANT_X or Datum CONSTANT_Y type Datum If it is a array Datum POINTS type Datum then this should be an array of X Y pairs Return type Datum object Example To create a new datum with acronym my_datum and a constant Y value of 100 va
99. monotonically increasing X axis values Page J 85 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example To sort curve m and store as curve p p Operate Mon m Mul 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Multiply Y axis values Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Example To multiply the Y axis values for curve n from m and store as curve p p Operate Mul m n To multiply the Y axis values in curve m by 20 0 and store as curve p p Operate Mul m 20 0 Mux 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Multiply X axis values Page J 86 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Example To multiply the X axis values for curve n from m and store as curve p p Operate Mux m n To multiply the X axis values in curve m by 20 0 and store as curve p p Operate Mux m 20 0 Ncp ist Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve static Description Calculate a platic rotation curve for a beam from a moment time and rotation time Arguments Moment Time Curve Rotation Time Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate plastic rotation curve p us
100. null if variable does not exist Example To create anew FAST TCE variable called run_number with the value 10 var home SetFtcfVar run_number 10 Sleep time integer static Description Pause execution of the script for time seconds See also MilliSleepQ Arguments Number of seconds to pause for Return type No return value Page J 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To pause for 2 seconds Sleep 2 System string Any valid javascript type static Description Do a system command outside T HIS Arguments Any valid javascript type The system command that you want to do Return type integer probably zero if command successful but is implementation dependant Example To make the directory example System mkdir example Unix static Description Test whether script is running on a Unix Linux operating system See also Windows Arguments No arguments Return type true if Unix Linux false if not Example To test if the OS is Unix if Unix WarningMessage string Any valid javascript type static Description Print a warning message to the dialogue box adding a carriage return Page J 9 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to print Return type No return value Example To print the title of model object m as a warning to the dialogue box Warning
101. o i y NE fenjergy Eoo o o i y e fF rotaion ooo y mvr E E E E pO Bee el Gi m 1 m D Ol x force y force z force O ES 0 SE JES D re nergy User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Subsystem Subsystem id Thick Shell Thi Tsh Tshell id l I T HIS nternal energy nternal Energy Ratio momentum momentum momentum x x z tress in ZZ X tress in YZ AX shear stress A klinetic e ilnternal e ir TSTTT lt Xx ala IN an n zo 2S lt 3 D iD 2 ln a D 023 2 x m m m a verage stress Pressure x rain in XX z y x m m Z x n s vm V x a i v l z V vo n zo ex Strain in ZX ma _ MAX principal strain stre ss IN principal strain m stra in vm ooo av Average strain a nternal energy Ps lt gt R amp o Io oO Io Ss 2 Io v F 5 8 AIC OIS Ala m m otal initial energy age Mass increase Mass ou ea ey I x velocity x velocity au e PB Po y velocity fel o mimm gt m Page 7 23 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Tracer ID d isplacement vJelocity 7 4 5 1 Defining Surfaces Integration points for data extraction Some data componenst cna be written out out multiple locatip In recent versions of LS DYNA it is possible for each element to write out multiple valu
102. of PDF browser pO Knone gt startin __Kstring gt Directory to start Programin none The following control directories arguments Defaul eee OP co directory for user string a T string imanuals_dir ae user manuals are installed in E none gt string Be string heckpoint_dir Directory for checkpoint files or none to suppress them altogethe none gt string The following control laser options Preference Type Description Valid arguments Default Default paper size andscape laser_top margin krea gt Top margin sizeinmm ho laser_bottom margin _ kKrea gt Bottom margin sizeinmm bo laser_left margin real gt _ Leftmarginsizeinmm RO laser_right margin _ krea gt Right margin sizeinmm ho The following control menu and mouse attributes Preference Type Description Valid arguments Default size 0 5 2 0 0 0 1 0 5 saturation 0 0 1 0 gradation 0 0 1 0 dv_sync_windows tring gt Dyn view method s CON ICON CAPS ICON NUM ICON CAPS for synchronising ICON CAPS NUM indows Page H 18 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS dv_left_shift string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY IROTATION_XYZ shift Left mouse OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N dv_middle_ shift string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY RANSLATION shift Middle mouseROTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N dv_right_shift string gt Dyn view a
103. of injury criteria HIC HICd etc for curves can also be selected HIC 921 Page 5 114 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Curve Properties bas Curves Legend _ Maximum Value _ Display Maximum Value 184 Summary _ All Curves Minimum Value Display Minimum Value Format Curves Legend Hor Summary All Cures Do sn co O s a w E Sei E 55 52 0958535 IHlLHRHDB A TTT y E a al JIJIM LI Format Update Select All None Show THIV Show PHD Pick Visible Show Curves y Node 1343 Node 1344 fel Accel mag 2 Accel mag fe Accel mag Node 13 Node 1346 Node 1347 Hd Accel mag sum en in Accel mag User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 21 3 Format Curve Properties This option can be used to control the Curves legend display of the minimum maximum values on the screen Done Text Default y Automatic x The font font size and colour of the values can be selected Either a single colour can be used for all the values or Foreground the values for each curve can be coloured Background x using the same colour as the curve f Background To make it easier to read the values a background can also be specified In addition to specifying the background colour a transparency value can be used to control the visibility of curves under the text Foreground y Border and Border Colour Speci
104. one of the arrows at either end TEXT BOXES ae To enter text in a text box first make it live by clicking on it then type in text then type lt return gt to enter the string Clicking on a live box for a second time is exactly the same as typing lt return gt so clicking twice on a box effectively enters its current contents You can use the left and right arrow keys for line editing within a box text entry takes place after the current cursor position RADIO BOXES Pix is capt pie ee ohne Bia EE _ 4x4 BH MENU SELECTIONS Entities F Menus of items are used when you need to make one or more selections from a Sort By Model y potentially long list Click on the row you want to select clicking on a row that is EN already selected will have the effect of unselecting it When the list is too long to display in the window you can use the vertical scroll bars to move up and down it A range of items may be selected by either 1 Click on the first item and hold down the mouse key drag the mouse to the last item in the list All items between the first and last including the first and last are selected or 2 Click on the first item hold down the SHIFT key and click on the last item in the list All items between the first and last including the first and last are selected 1 Node 208014 Page 2 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 2 3 Dialogue input in the screen menu int
105. onwards the keys they are assigned to are customizable Convert LSDA gt ASCIl From version 9 4 onwards a number of new pre programmed shortcuts have been added including the top menu panels and window layout options In addition to Edit Preferences these pre programmed shortcuts Macros and FAST TCF scripts can also be assigned to a key Menu Attributes A listing of the available shortcuts and the keys they are assigned to can be y Auto Update brought up by pressing the key by default or accessing it through the Options p top menu A Show Model Prefix This will bring up a panel from which you may assign the shortcuts Macros and Prefix Format a FAST TCF scripts to the keys Note that upper and lower case letters can be assigned different shortcuts v Drag with curves A list of all the available pre programmed shortcuts is given at the end of this Shortcuts section with their default key s if assigned gd FAST TGF Seng eer Fage Layout Tie Tall age Largo Tie Wide age Layout Cascade yon j h j al N h Porn in i hostale oom out lank All im a Cura Wens F I Bhortowl rer Cs AST TCE Wen oni Cann auton abe tank All Lune Men AST TCP Weny nal Cnn ET in BAACH mid oo 8 Fi as Four Gul w j ity hhtnus InEl nk All Bag Cure Group rebar All rag Curea Cau Cleve Table Autos Y amis oon Hts EeccanaoweoSt er ze Tommi r ee oe ee ee en ee Page
106. open in T HIS by double clicking on them If no application is currently associated with thf files a double click won t work and some non specific usually windows icon will be displayed with the file Right click on any thf file and select properties and then press the Change tab next to Opens with from the popup menu A Choose the program you want to use to open this file File sled ptf Recommended Programs j d3plot11 64bit ZEN this11 64bit IE Ove Arup 1 7 Ove Arup Other Programs Adobe Reader Internet Explorer E Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Office 2010 amp Microsoft Visual Studio Version Selector Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Corporation W Microsoft Word Notepad Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Corporati 4 Notepad a free GNU source code editor Don HO don h free fr aay Paint 9 Microsoft Corporati Always use the selected program to open this kind of file 1 This will bring up the Open with panel 2 Ensure the Always use box is ticked 3 Use the directory browsing window to find the correct T HIS executable You are looking for file this11 exe or this11_x64 exe 4 Select the executable and click on OK to close the Open With window T HIS should now open and read in the selected file and you should now find that Page I 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 e All thf files on your system
107. operation Right click on the SHELLS s T HIS button and go to the options menu Select the FAST TCF input script and the thf input file if necessary Return to the main shell menu and press the T HIS button 7 1 2 2 Interactive running In the T HIS tools menu within T HIS select the FAST TCF option then click on the Run tab in the sub menu that appears This brings up the following menu Page 7 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 The user can select the script file then with play the whole file through or step through each command one FAST TCF Script x b ae Create Run The FAST TCF line appears in the top dialogue box 1 E 2 and the translated T HIS line appears in the bottom box ScriptName dave VASE NEW arge_cur inp CI The line about to be sent to T HIS appears in red text Reread To end the script prematurely hit the End button Play Step End FASTTCF input r THIS command line jy 7 1 3 Input Files Needed and Output and Intermediate Files Created input_script is required at the start input_script output is a file that contains the concatenated output from FAST TCF input_script tmp is a temporary file that FAST TCF creates for translation This is merged after completion into input_script output so if you see this file then FAST TCF didn t finish cleanly input_script rep is a temporary report file of the FAST TCF run This is merged after completion into in
108. optional integer Writeln string Any valid javascript type File constants File APPEND Flag to open file for appending File BINARY Flag to open file in binary mode This will have no effect on unix linux but for windows if a file is opened for writing with binary mode n will not be translated to r n CRLF it will be written as n LF File READ Flag to open file for reading File UTF8 Flag to open file for reading as UTF 8 encoding File WRITE Flag to open file for writing Constants for Seek types File CURRENT Seek relative to current file position File END Seek relative to end of the file File START Seek relative to start of the file Page J 33 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Constants for Find types File DIRECTORY File FILE Find files File properties filename read only Name of the file mode read only Mode the file was opened with File READ File WRITE etc Detailed Description The File class gives you simple functions to read and write text files The following simple example shows how to read from the file data test file txt and print each line read to the dialogue box var f line f new File data test file txt File READ while line f ReadLine undefined Message line Close The following simple example shows how to write the numbers to 10 to the file data test file txt var n line new File data test f
109. p Operate Nor m Nox Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Normalise X axis values Page J 88 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Normalise X axis values of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Nox m Octave Input Curve Curve Band type to convert to String Output Type String Output Type String Output Curve optional Curve static Description Coverts a narrow band curve to either Octace or 1 3rd Octave bands Arguments Band type to convert to Band type to convert to Either Octave or Third Octave Output Type Generate curve containing either RMS or mean values Output Type Input curve contains either Linear or dB values Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m that contains Linear values to 1 3 Octave bands and output RMS in curve p p Operate Ocatve m third rms linear Order Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Reverse the order of points in a curve Page J 89 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Reverse the order of points in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Order m Pbut Input Curve Curve Frequency float Order integer X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Descripti
110. right mouse button while in the graphics window will display a popup menu File THF listing the ID label and the data source of the nearest curve A Disp x Node 1343 Pelvis When data is read from either one of the LS DYNA output files T HIS will store the ID Functions p and type of the entity that the data applies to If the curve label is modified this data will A remain unchanged so that the curve source can still be identified Blank r If a curve has been read in from another source then T HIS will report the data source as Unblank gt being UNKNOWN Only If a curve is created from another curve using one of the T HIS curve operations then the Saye 35 r data source for the new curve will be copied from the original curve If the operation uses more than one curve as input then the data source information will only be copied to the Delete new curve if all of the input curves had the same data source Properties gt Edit will open the curve editor for the selected curve whilst the colour Line Width Line Histo style and Symbol pop up menus allow the user to change these options for the curve as y can be done from the STYLE menu Units r Edit Edit Labels gt Colour gt Line Width Line Style gt Page 6 10 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 6 3 1 Properties Xmin 0 0000000 xmax 0 0998993 This option displays a number of properties for a curve P including minimu
111. saving the new values The labels here are scratch values current only in this editor the permanent curve labels are only overwritten with them if you SAVE this edited curve RESET will restore the scratch labels to the original values of the permanent curve being edited The title axis and line labels can also be modified using the dialogue box Page 5 49 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 6 LINE STYLES The LINE STYLE menu is shown in the figure right This menu can be used to change the colour width style and symbol for any of the curves that are currently being used When a curve file is written T HIS will save the line style for each curve in the file The lower half of this panel contains a list of all the curves that are currently being used By default the curve that was clicked on in the CURVE CONTROL menu will be highlighted and the colour and symbol buttons in the top section of the menu will show the setting for that curve The SAVE button can be used to save the current set of line styles to a file while the RELOAD button can be used to reload a set from a previously saved file The DEFAULT button will reset all the curve styles to the original T HIS settings If you wish to modify the colour style of more than one curve at a time additional curves may be selected by pressing the button next to each curve as that depicts the current line styl SELECT_ALL and DESELECT ALL may be u
112. script will terminate with an error If your script has to retain a large number of objects arrays strings etc in memory then you may have to increase the value for Memory size This can also be done using the this javascript memory size preference or adding a special memory comment at the top of the script To recap e This threshold does not limit the memory the script can use that is limited only by the operating system e It sets the memory for Garbage Collection objects e Scripts which allocate a lot of memory and which exhibit frequent pauses may run faster with a larger value e and finally If you don t understand this topic don t worry Most scripts will run quite happily with the default value and you can ignore this setting unless they appear to be struggling in which case try raising it As good an approach as any is to keep on doubling this value until the script works but don t use very large sizes unnecessarily Page 5 125 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 23 2 4 Assigning Javascripts to Shortcut Keys Assign script to function key F1 y Assign Javascript to Function Key If a script is to be run repeatedly it can be convenient E javaloperate js to set up a short cut to it From within the JavaScript menu ths script can be assigned to one fo the 12 function keys alternativly the JavaScript can be assigned to any key using the Shortcut menu 3 lt unused gt lt unused gt
113. sequentially separated by the word CONTINUE The title and three label lines must be present for each curve A comment line may be included anywhere in the file by starting the line with a Comment lines above the curve s title can contain styles and curve tags associated with the corresponding curve B 1 Curve STYLE Information From version 9 1 onwards T HIS will recognise a line starting STYLE as a style request for the following curve and the curve will be displayed with the corresponding style A STYLE line will take the format STYLE LINE STYLE LINE COLOUR LINE WIDTH LINE SYMBOLS SYMBOL FREQUENCY The following STYLE options are available solid LINE COLOUR i dependent on curve LINE WIDTH Page B 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 ILINE SYMBOLS i dependent on curve nu SYMBOL FREQUENCY frequency number integer B 2 Curve TAGs T HIS will recognise a line starting with TAG as a tag for the following curve and the tag can be used in T HIS to reference the corresponding curve a TAG line will take the format TAG tag name B 3 Curve UNITs From version 9 4 onwards a T HIS curve file can also contain information on the Unit system and the X and Y axis units A unit system is defined by a line starting with UNIT SYSTEM and will take the format UNIT SYSTEM system name The following unit systems names can be specified by using either the full nam
114. show the T HIS icon e Double clicking on any such file starts T HIS and opens that file It is not possible to set up the filename d3thdt for double clicking in this way since Windows requires filename extensions when assigning applications to files 1 1 2 To make xtf cur and bdf files open in T HIS by double clicking on them The procedure is exactly the same as for th files and must be carried out for each of the file types that you wish to process by double clicking xtf LS DYNA Extra Time History file cur T HIS Curve file bdf T HIS Bulk Data file Note that File types thf and xtf are opened in this way but no contents are read in File types cur and bdf are opened and their complete contents read in Page I 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX J T HIS JavaScript API global class Description of T HIS API functions and methods The following pages describe the functions methods available in the T HIS Javascript interface For information about how to run Javascript files see Section 5 23 global class The global class is the main JavaScript class More Class functions AllocateFlag ClearFlag flag Flag Dialoguelnput string_1 string_2 string_n One or more Javascript strings DialogueInputNoEcho string_1 string _2 string_n One or more Javascript strings DisableUpdate EnableUpdate ErrorMessage string Any valid javascript type Exit
115. special words namely all first and last see example e g whole model te whole model total energy node 42 node extraction i d 42 node end of roof node extraction i d end of roof node 100 last node extraction all nodes from 100 node all node extraction all nodes 7 4 1 Selecting Models lsda force Isda file force y_dir force in y direction accel zZ z acceleration force y_dir force in y direction force y_dir force in y direction If T HIS contains more than one model the data extraction commands will attempt to read data from all the model that are currently selected To specify which model to read data from the following commands can be used Keyword _ second word second wre h Select model n for reading data from al jS Select all models for reading data from l none Unselect all models 7 4 2 Data Extraction options 7 4 2 1 Specifying Files for data extraction For some LS DYNA data types results can be extracted from multiple files By default FAST TCF scripts will extract data from the default T HIS file type for each entity type see Section 5 17 1 These defaults can be changed via the preference file Instead of using the default file any of the valid files types can be specified by using either the define file keyword e g define file LSDA or by adding an extra line option When this occurs FAST TCF will take the extraction request from the specified t
116. string warning string buttons optional constant Member functions Delete Hide Recompute Redraw Show modal optional boolean Window constants Window CANCEL Show CANCEL button Window NO Show NO button Window NONMODAL Allow Window Error Window Question Window Warning etc windows to be non modal Window OK Show OK button Window YES Show YES button Constants for Resizing positioning Window MIDDLE Middle vertical positioning of window Window RIGHT Right resizing positioning of window Window TOP Top resizing positioning of window Window properties Page J 129 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 active boolean If true default then the window then the window is active and widgets in the window can be used If false then the window is inactive and the widgets cannot be used Widget GREEN Widget BLUE Widget CYAN Widget MAGENTA Widget YELLOW Widget DARKRED Widget DARKGREEN Widget DARKBLUE Widget GREY Widget DARKGREY Widget LIGHTGREY or Widget DEFAULT bottom bottom coordinate of window in range 0 0 bottom to 1 0 top height height of window keepOnTop boolean If true then the window will be kept on top of other windows If false default then the window stacking order can be changed left float left coordinate of window in range 0 0 left to 1 0 right onAfterShow function Function to call after a Window is shown The Window object is accessib
117. taba command which will append an existing file on the first tab call A 9 2 onwards option is the tabc command which appends the data into csv format on the last line in the file The first call to this command writes a new line to the file and the subsequent calls append the end of this line This enables the user to compare runs on a line by line basis in software such as Excel Some examples of writing out curve properties to a text file are below e g tab output txt 1 max max y of curve 1 file output txt curve number maximum Y description tab output txt node head accn maxw 1 00E 03 30 00E 3 file output txt curve tag max Y in window window t1 window t2 taba output txt node head _accn min append output txt curve tag minimum Y Properties for multiple curves can be output by specifying either multiple tab commands or by using a curve tag containing wildcards or a curve group e g tab output txt node max maximum y value file output txt all curves with a tag starting with node_ maximum Y description tab output txt amp group 1 max maximum y value file output txt all curves in group group_1 maximum Y description 7 13 3 Writing out REPORTER variables REPORTER can write curve properties to its reports so FAST TCF needs to output a text file that REPORTER can interrogate to find out the curve properties it needs To tell FAST TCF to output a REPORTER variable the keyword varr is us
118. the THF file is controlled by the actual number of integration points of integration points in a shell s formulation The following table illustrates output for the case of MAXINT not equal to 3 fe viae Bottom fe Emm id p NOTE The THF file does NOT contain any information on the number of integration points each shell was defined a with No explicit neutral axis value is calculated or output The outcome of writing more integration points than have been used in a shell formulation is undefined There is no guarantee that the centre surface in this context is the neutral axis value this will depend upon the element integration scheme In addition where the centre value has been averaged from a pair of points when the number of layers is an even number it will definitely not be the neutral axis value consider plastic strain in a section in pure bending The ZTF file generated by PRIMER can help to resolve some of these problems Page A 15 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 THF File ZTF File If a ZTF file had been generated using PRIMER then T HIS can use additional information from the ZTF to correctly work out the number of integration points each shell element was defined with If an attempt is made to output data for a surface that does not exist in the THF file then T HIS will generate a warning message and aNULL curve will be generated In addition to working out the correct number of through thic
119. the curve with a tag tag var curve Curve GetFromTag tag GetPoint row integer Description Returns x and y data for a point in a curve The input for the point number should start at 1 for the 1st point not zero In the array returned array 0 contains the x axis value and array 1 contains the y axis value Arguments The point you want the data for Return type An array containing the x value and the y value Page J 20 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To get the curve data for the 3rd point for curve 1 if l npoints gt 3 var point data 1 GetPoint 3 HighestID static Description Returns the ID of the highest curve currently being used Arguments No arguments Return type ID of highest curve currently being used Example To get the highest curve ID var id Curve HighestID InsertPoint ipt integer xvalue real yvalue real position integer Description Inserts a new point before or after the specified point Arguments The point you want to insert the data before or after The x value of the point The y value of the point position integer Specify either before or after the selected pioint Use Curve BEFORE for before and Curve AFTER for after Return type No return value Example To insert the values after the 3rd row to x 3 y 5 for curve 1 l1 InsertPoint 3 3 5 Curve AFTER Page J 21 T HIS User manual
120. the function using the this keyword onMouseOver function Function to call when the mouse moves over a widget item in a COMBOBOX or LISTBOX widget The Widgetitem object is accessible in the function using the this keyword If the widget item can be selected true or not false selected read If the widget item is selected true or not false only widget read The widget that this item is defined for only Page J 126 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Detailed Description The Widgetltem class allows you to create items for combobox Widgets in a Window for a graphical user interface The following example shows how Widgetltems are used to create a Combobox Widget and how to assign callbacks to determine when the selection has been changed var items D3PLOT PRIMER SHELL REPORTER T HIS Create window var w new Window Combobox example 0 8 1 0 0 5 0 6 A simple combobox with a few items var cl new Widget w Widget LABEL 1 30 1 7 Programs var cb new Widget w Widget COMBOBOX 31 61 1 7 Add WidgetItems to Combobox for i 0 i lt items length i var wi new WidgetItem cb items i A combobox with many items showing a slider var li new Widget w Widget LABEL 1 30 8 14 Long list var ci new Widget w Widget COMBOBOX 31 61 8 14 Add WidgetItems to Combobox As an example we also make some of the WidgetItems unselectabl
121. the main menu where the selected models will be displayed along with the model numbers they will be read in as Page 5 10 odel_database Template Demo Eliteration 1 Base Run 1 Run 2 Run 3 Run 4 Alteration_2 Base gt Run1 gt Run 2 XRun 3 Run 4 Jiteration_3 Base ModetDatanase E User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Selecting Models Ejmodel_database Template Demo Models can be selected and deselected by Eltteration 1 clicking on each row Multiple model can be selected by clicking on the 1st model and holding down SHIFT while selecting the last model in the range As each model is selected the model number than it will be read in as is automatically displayed alongside the M3 Run 4 model description Eliteration_2 A complete branch can be Elmodel_database selected deselected by selecting the branch label Iteration 1 Template Demo M1 Base L M4 Run 1 Jiteration_2 Modifying the Database Database entries can be added removed and modified by right clicking on a branch label or a model description Right clicking on a branch label will FE model_database display 4 options E Tempiste Demo Modify Modify the branch label Eltteration 1 V Bas Modify Add Model P Add Add a new model into the Run Model selected branch Run Insert n i A Delete A menu will be displayed to Run select anew model and to R
122. the time unit This option can be used to automatically convert the x axis values of any curves from milliseconds to seconds before applying one of the filters If a curve is automatically converted then the output curve is also automatically converted back into milliseconds This option can be set in the Preference File All of the AUTOMOTIVE filters require curves with constant time intervals This option can be used to specify a default time interval that will be used to automatically regularise a curve before it is filtered By default the HIC and 3ms Clip functions calculate and report a value to the screen These options can be used to make T HIS display the peak values and the time widows they occur over These options can be set in the Preference File At present 2 different methods are used to calculate the VC injury criteria for the ECER95 and HHS regulations see Appendix E for more details This option can be used to set the default value This option can be set in the _ Preference File Settings Pad Data Files General Layout Curve Operations _ Convert from ms gt s when filtering ms gt s time convertion Prompt r 0 100E 05 x axis interval for auto reqularise V Always regularise curves before filtering _ Show HIC value _ Show THIV value _ Show 3ms Clip value __ Show PHD value __ Insert 0 0 point when rea 0 100E 19 Value to truncate curves at when reading data MV ECER95 _ IHS
123. to filter curves for which the sampling rate is too low if this happens the REG option can be used to increase the number of points This will allow the filter to function although it is not a good substitute for obtaining data at a higher sampling rate For more information on the filters and injury criteria calculations see Appendices D amp G All of the filters expect the input curve to have a consistent time interval When using one of the filter options the user can specify a time interval for the curve to be automatically regularised to REG before filtering if the time interval is not consistent The user can set a default time interval for regularising the input curves in the PREFERENCE menu The PREFERENCE menu can also be used to automatically convert the x axis values from milliseconds to seconds before filtering and to convert the curve back to milliseconds afterwards 5 11 1 C60 Filter a curve using a standard SAE Class 60 filter 5 11 2 C1 80 Filter a curve using a standard SAE Class 180 filter 5 11 3 C600 Filter a curve using a standard SAE Class 600 filter 5 1 1 4 C1 000 Filter a curve using a standard SAE Class 1000 filter 5 11 5 BUT oe Cut off frequency Hz I through a N k Butterworth Filter order integer filter The user is prompted for the cutoff frequency and the order of the filter 5 1 1 6 B UT This passes a curve through a Pure Butterworth filter This is the same as the BUT p function abov
124. type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Cosine of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Cos m Da Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert displacment spectrum to an acceleration spectrum Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m and store as curve p p Operate Da m Dif Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Differentiate a curve Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 75 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To differentiate curve m and store as curve p p Operate Dif m Div 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Divide Y axis values Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Example To divide the Y axis values for curve n by curve m and store as curve p p Operate Div m n To devide the Y axis values in curve m by 20 0 and store as curve p p Operate Div m 20 0 Dix 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Divide X axis values Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 76 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To divide the X axi
125. up plot defaults grid colours offsets fonts and so on Ti Tabc command for writing out tabulation data to a csv file T plot and auto commands added for use in interactive playback mode macro support for running FAST TCF files on specific curves FAST TCF INTRODUCTION N ant 1 General Rules Each line in the input file defines one data extraction or plot request Long lines can be split into shorter ones using a continuation character at the end of each line Space characters are used to divide the line into words The input script is NOT case sensitive Unless detailed elsewhere in this manual the first few usually three characters of the first word on the line discriminate the request of a particular entity and the syntax which applies to reading in the remaining words on the line If the first word on the line is not recognised the program ignores it it is treated as a comment The last words on the data extraction request lines allow options for filtering Y axis scaling HIC average and a short reference tag The tags may be used for operation and plotting requests The last words on the plotting request line allow options for title line style and axis changes A successful data extraction always has a curve outputted if there is no output e g HIC ERR then a duplicate curve is outputted This helps with tagging output curves 7 1 2 Running FAST TCF Sie oe an gt 7 1 2 1 Automat
126. w new Window Popup example 0 8 1 0 0 5 0 6 Create label widget var 1 new Widget w Widget LABEL 1 50 1 7 Right click for popup link popup window to widget l popupWindow pw Assign the onPopup callback method to the function do_popup This is only required if you want to make any changes before the popup appears l onPopup do popup neue the widget and start event loop w Show nUT function do_ popup Message Showing popup See the documentation below and the Widget class for more details Constructor new PopupWindow Description Create a new PopupWindow object Arguments No arguments Return type PopupWindow object Example To create a PopupWindow containing the buttons Create and Edit and link it to button b var pw new PopupWindow var c new Widget pw Widget BUTTON 1 30 1 7 Create var e new Widget pw Widget BUTTON 1 30 7 13 Edit b popupWindow pw Page J 105 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Symbol class The Symbol class contains constants relating to curve symbols More Symbol constants Symbol HOURGLASS Hourglass symbol Symbol NONE No symbol Symbol SQUARE Square symbol Symbol STAR Star symbol Symbol TRIANGLE _ Triangle symbol Detailed Description The Symbol class is used to define the symbol style used by curves p symbol Symbol TRIANGLE Page J 106 User manua
127. will be different For the FFT the number of points used to scale the curves is the original number of points before padding For the IFFT the number of points used is the original number of points plus the points needed to make it a power of 2 If the number of points in the original curve is a power of 2 and no padding is required the IFFT of the resulting curves will get back to the original curve By default beam element plastic rotations are always written out by LS DYNA as being increasing ve i e cumulative This option allows a non cumulative plastic rotation to be calculated by taking two input curves the moment time and the cumulative rotation time histories for the beam in question Baseline correction Page 5 81 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 13 MACRO Options The MACRO menu can be used to play FAST TCF based macro files on existing T HIS curves T HIS macro files can be stored in any directory Each user can define up to three macro areas using the oa_pref option this macro directory C blah macros T HIS will read any thm files within the macro directories and generate the macro menu shown right using keywords within the macro scripts T HIS will search the macro directories in the following order this macro_directory from SYSTEM oa_pref file this macro_directory from users oa_pref file this macro_directory from local oa_pref file The scripting for a macro in T HIS is based upon
128. write the additional curves out to a T HIS cur curve file FAST TCF Script Curve Group Output This option can be used to select additional curves for output to the FAST TCF script by curve group If a curve is selected that is also unblanked in one of the graphs the command to regenerate it are only added to the FAST TCF script once This option will also add the commands to regenerate the selected curve groups to the FAST TCE script Page 5 85 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 14 2 Run This menu allows the user to run a FAST TCF file from within T HIS After the user has selected the FAST TCF file T HIS scans the file for data requests and model requests to see what input the FAST TCF file requires Note that there must be a model read into T HIS before a FAST TCF file that contains data extraction can be run The next FAST TCF command line is displayed in red in the upper text area at this point the user can select to Play the FAST TCF file or Step through it line by line After every line of FAST TCF the resulting command in T HIS is shown in the lower text area Select End during stepping through the lines to go to the end of the file Reread will re read the file and start back at the beginning The Model Mapping option allows the user to define which model in T HIS should be used for the equivalent model number in the FAST TCE script The model number Zero is equivalent to the default model in FAST
129. 0 A wv second line graph 1 Points E E Ej datum_8 Constant Y 8 00 EEE TS datum_9 Constant Y 900 i Page 5 129 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Clicking on any of the DATUM line definitions will highlight it in Acronym Type blue and display a popup menu containing the following options f p 8 a Edit hic ns Add To All Graphs Upp Remove From All Graphs low ns Move Datum 1 Po Copy Datum dat ns Insert Before dat ns Insert After dati ns Delete datum o Suns Edit the selected DATUM line definition This option will display the CREATE EDIT menu Add to All Graphs Add the selected DATUM line definition to all the currently defined graphs Remove From Al raphs Move Datum Make a copy of the selected DATUM line the original definition will be deleted when the Remove the selected DATUM line definition from all the currently defined graphs Copy Datum ake a copy of the selected DATUM line Insert Before Insert the previously copied moved DATUM line definition before the selected DATUM line Insert After Insert the previously copied moved DATUM line definition after selected DATUM line Delete This will delete the selecte M line d DA 5 24 2 Create Edit H Dawmmlnes B7 X List Create Read Save Each DATUM line must be defined with a unique acronym that is used to identify it in FAST TCF scripts The oes Se acronym shouldn t contain any spaces Acronym Hic the
130. 0 0001 C1000 Input Curve Curvej X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description SAE Class 1000 Filter Arguments X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate C1000 m 0 0001 C180 Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description SAE Class 180 Filter Page J 70 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Input Curve Input Curve X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Output Curve optional Curve to overwrite Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate C180 m 0 0001 C60 Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description SAE Class 60 Filter Arguments X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate
131. 1 1 File Format 8 bit file formats BMP Uncompressed BMP Compressed PNG GIF 24 bit file formats BMP PNG JPG PPM 8 bit BMP Uncompressed y 8 bit file formats Uncompressed 8 bit Microsoft windows BMP Uncompressed bitmap The approximate size of the file in er BMP Compressed file size image width image height PNG 8 bit RLE Microsoft windows bitmap GIF 8 bit Portable Network Graphics 24 bit file formats Graphics Interchange Format BMP PNG JPG Uncompressed 24 bit Microsoft windows PPM bitmap The approximate size of the file in bytes is file size 3 image width image height 24 bit Portable Network Graphics JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group file Uncompressed Portable PixMap The approximate size of the file in bytes is file size 3 image width image height 5 8 1 2 Resolution Screen All images can be output at either the screen resolution or at a resolution of either 2 or 4 DER times the screen resolution _ 4x Screen Page 5 63 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 8 2 Postscript BMP JPEG Postscript PDF Background This menu can be used to save an image containing one or more graphs to either a PDF All Pages or Postscript file Current Page All PDF and Postscript files are generated using Only Page 1 raster images so that the contents of the screen is exactly reproduced All Paaes Current Page Only Page n All Graphs Page
132. 12 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS In plane Integration Points By default the LSDA file will contain data for all 4 in plane integration points for any fully integrated shells As with the THF file by default there is no information in the LSDA file to tell the difference between a shell with 32 through thickness integration points and a shell with 8 through thickness layers and 4 in plane points per layer If a ZTF file written by PRIMER is present then T HIS can use the extra information on the ZTF to work out which elements have multiple in plane points If the parameter INTOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card is set then the format of the LSDA file is changed and the LSDA file then contains enough information for T HIS to identify the shells with multiple in plane integration points without the ZTF file In addition to changing the format of the LSDA file setting INTOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card also outputs strain tensor values at each in plane integration point as well as all the through thickness layers T HIS does not currently support strain values from multiple in plane integration points Extrapolated Stress Strain Values The parameter NODOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card gaa can be used to generate stress and strain values that have been extrapolated to the nodal positions instead of values at the elements integration points T HIS does not currently support these extrapolated values A 8 Thi
133. 2nd Display the values Line using a second line for each curve in the legend The format of the numbers added to the curve labels is the same as that used to display values on the curves Page 5 116 Off Add Maximum Add Minimum Add Average Add 3ms Clip Add THIV Add PHD X Add HIC L E Ei JIM I PTT May Sigal S Curve Properties Curves Legend Append _ 2nd line Update Select All None Pick Visible Show Curves y Hl Accel mag Node 1343 cel mag Node 1344 fe Accel mag Node 1545 4 Accel mag Node 1346 Ho Accel mag Node 1347 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 21 4 Positioning Values By default T HIS will automatically position minimum and maximum values to the right of the point they apply to If the default location of the text obscures other curves then the position can be changed by clicking on the value with the left mouse button and then dragging the value to a new position If dynamic viewing is used to either zoom in or translate the curves after a value has been moved to a new position then it will maintain it s new position relative to the minimum maximum value location As well as moving the minimum maximum values the values used to display injury criteria like HIC and HIC d can also be moved Page 5 117 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 22 UNITS From version 9 4 onw
134. 3 1 Introduction Javascript is a freely available scripting language that is normally found performing the work behind interactive web pages however its syntax and structure also make it an excellent tool for providing an externally programmable interface to programmes in general Within T HIS it is implemented as an Application Programming Interface API which provides a range of functions that allow you to edit and carte curevs open windows generate plots and so on This is written in a very simple and non intimidating way with relatively few functions that should be easy for non programmers to use Anyone familiar with C or shell script programming will find existing Javascripts are instantly readable and can be given minor edits without further ado For those who are more ambitious a good guide to the language is Javascript A definitive Guide by David Flanagan published by O Reilly ISBN 0596101996 The sections below describe how to run Javascripts in T HIS and summarise its Javascript API For details of the API and its functions and also some examples see the Appendix J 5 23 2 Using Javascript in T HIS Human readable Javscripts need to be compiled meaning turned from something human readable into a set of instructions that a computer can understand and then run in their compiled form They can be changed and rerun in their modified form at any time without having to exit and re enter T HIS making the write test modif
135. 4 T HIS 5 19 Curve Groups This panel can be used to create and modify curve groups T HIS can contain an unlimited number of curve groups each of which can contain any curve Curve groups can be used as input to most T HIS functions that require one or more input curves see Section 5 0 for more details Each curve group should be given a unique name 5 19 1 Create This option can be used to create a new curve group By default the group will be called Curve_group_ where is the curve group number if an alternate name is not specified Curve Groups Automatic Modify Number of curve groups 4 hon Model_1 Displacements Velocities Accelerations Create Curve Group Curve Group 6 Name Curve_group 6 Select Curve s All Listed Show Groups Node Node 13 Page 5 109 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 19 2 Modify Modify Curve Group Curve Group 2 This option can be used to modify the contents of an existing curve group or it s name Name When a curve group is selected any curves that are already defined in the group are highlighted E in the curve list All Listed Wisible Page r Show Groups i Filter Key in M1 Disp x Node 1343 Pelvis M1 Disp x Node 1344 The contents of Automatic curves groups can not MAAR Tine ro be modified as T HIS automatically adds and Modify Curve Group removes curves from aut
136. 5 1 2 2 D A Displacement spectrum is converted to an acceleration spectrum 5 1 2 l 3 VD Velocity spectrum is converted to a displacement spectrum 5 l 1 2 l 4 V A Velocity spectrum is converted to an acceleration spectrum 5 12 5 AD Acceleration spectrum is converted to a displacement spectrum 5 1 2 l 6 AV Acceleration spectrum is converted to a velocity spectrum 5 l 1 2 7 D S ner a design spectrum from a response spectrum through the specification of a broadening actor 5 1 2 8 R S Produce a response spectrum from input accelerations This gives the response of a damped single degree of freedom system given its damping factor and period to the input acceleration time history 5 12 9 FFT Perform a fast Fourier transform Convert an input signal from the time to the frequency i domain There are three options for output e magnitude only e magnitude and phase e real and imaginary components of the time signal The frequency is calculated in Hz NOT radians s if the time axis is in seconds T HIS automatically adds points with zero y value to the end of the curve to pad the curve out so that the number of points is increased to the next power of 2 There are two options for scaling the curves output e Scaling Option Consistent with other signal processing software giving a magnitude independent of any padding This is the default and recommended for most purposes Performing an inverse FFT on the resulting curves will NO
137. 5 10 5 11 and 5 12 that have a single curve as input In addition to selecting a curve operation this menu can also be used to set the output curve for the curve operation to either the 1st free curve or to overwrite the input curve This option can be applied to multiple curves but it can not be undone 6 1 8 2 Blank Blank This Graph All Active Graphs All Graphs This option can be used to blank curves The selected curves can be blanked in just the graph they were selected in all the currently active graphs or all graphs This option can be applied to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button 6 1 8 3 Unblank Unblank r All Active Graphs All Graphs Only Graph ee J Page 6 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 This option can be used to unblank curves The selected curves can be unblanked in all the currently active graphs all graphs or a individual graph can be specified This option can be applied to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button 6 1 8 4 Only Only This Graph All Active Graphs All Graphs This option can be used to blank all curves except for the selected ones The selection can be applied to just the graph they were selected in all the currently active graphs or all graphs This option can be applied to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button
138. 5 64 All Graphs _ All Active Graphs _ Only Graph _ White Background File Format Postscript BERDE Filename models 1_sled this001 ps Tite a Fig No Resolution Orientation Aspect Ratio _ Screen Landscape Fixed 2xScreen Portrait _ Fit Area 4x Screen Paper Size Layout A4 RB N J A3 31x H US alice E 2x4 B Margins All T HIS pages containing or more graphs will be saved to a single file This option will only be available if T HIS contains multiple graphs on more than one page see Section 3 2 The current T HIS page will be saved This option will only be available if T HIS contains multiple graphs on more than one page see Section 3 2 A single image containing the selected page will be generated This option will only be available if T HIS contains multiple graphs on more than one page see Section 3 2 A single image will be generated containing all of the graphs This option will only be available if T HIS only contains a single page see Section 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS All Active Graphs A single image will be generated containing all of the currently active graphs This option will only be available if T HIS only contains a single page see Section 3 2 Only Graph n A single image containing the selected graph will be generated White Background Captures the image with a white background and black foreground Once t
139. 6 1 8 5 Delete This option can be used to delete curves It can be applied to multiple curves but it can not be undone 6 1 8 6 Properties This option will display the current properties for a curve see Section 6 3 1 for more details If multiple curves are selected this option is only applied to the one with the lowest curve ID 6 1 8 7 History This option can be used to view and edit the history of operations used to create a curve see Section 6 4 for more details 6 1 8 8 Edit This option can be used to select a curve for editing see Section 5 5 for more details If multiple curves are selected this option is only applied to the one with the lowest curve ID 6 1 8 9 Edit Labels This option can be used to edit the label title and axis labels for a curve see Section 6 3 2 for more details If multiple curves are selected this option is only applied to the one with the lowest curve ID 6 1 8 10 Colours This option can be used to change the colour of curves This option can be applied to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button Page 6 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 6 1 8 11 Line Width This option can be used to change the line width of curves This option can be applied to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button 6 1 8 12 Line Style This option can be used to change the line style of curves This option can be appli
140. BOBOX and LISTBOX string Description Create a new Widget object Arguments Widget type Can be Widget LABEL Widget BUTTON Widget CHECKBOX Widget COMBOBOX Widget LISTBOX or Widget TEXTBOX left coordinate of widget right coordinate of widget top coordinate of widget bottom coordinate of widget text optional for LABEL BUTTON and string Text to show on widget TEXTBOX not required for CHECKBOX COMBOBOX and LISTBOX Return type Widget object Details of functions AddWidgetltem item Widgetltem position optional integer Description Adds a Widgetltem to the Widget Also see Widget RemoveAllWidgetltems and Widget RemoveWidgetltem Arguments WidgetItem Widgetltem to add position integer Position on Widget to add the Widgetltem Any existing Widgetltems will be shifted optional down as required If omitted the Widgetltem will be added to the end of the existing ones Note that positions start at 0 Return type No return value Page J 115 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To add Widgetltem wi to widget w w AddWidgetItem wi Circle colour constantl fillfboolean xc integer yc integer radius integer Description Draws a circle on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets The coordinates are local to the Widget not the Window See properties xResolution and yResolution for more details Note that the widget graphics w
141. Blank by Model Unblank by Model Blank by Group Unblank by Group Blank all curves Unblank all curves Pick curves from the screen to be blanked Reverse the blanking status of all curves Blank curves belonging to a Model Unblank curves belonging to a Model Blank curves by Curve Group Unblank curves by Curve Group User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 3 3 Delete Delete All Select a groups of curves for deletion Curves Deletes all current curves You are prompted for confirmation first Delete by Model Delete curves belonging to a Model Delete by Group Delete curves by Curve Group All Blanked Delete all the curves that are currently blanked All Visible Delete all the curves that are currently unblanked 5 3 4 Table The Table option can be used to give more control over which curves are blanked and unblanked in all of the currently defined graphs By default the Curve Table displays a scrolling list of all of the currently defined curves and curve groups along with a set of tick boxes that display the status of the curve in the current graphs Curves are displayed in BLUE text while curve groups are displayed in GREEN Eea RUSHAASE Eitean AGEA E tee ALEH RUN Eiend RUSH AA Eile nCRLSHRUNG a Enim an i at ri E teeCALEH ALA ECR EH ALS Eiane SHAN Pace TE Eee j Mode ca ie Mode Tiii Eten RAUND MA REA 22GEE0E EE FER EEEEE EgEmrzmun un au uyu nn Page 5 35 T HIS User m
142. C60 m 0 0001 C600 Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description SAE Class 600 Filter Page J 71 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Input Curve Input Curve X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Output Curve optional Curve to overwrite Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate C600 m 0 0001 Cat 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Concatenate 2 curves together Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example To concatenate the values for curve n to those in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Cat m n Clip Input Curve Curve X minffloat X max float Y min float Y max float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Clip a curve Page J 72 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments X max float X maximum value float Y minimum value Y max float Y maximum value Return type Curve object or NULL Example Clip a curve m to within 0 1 lt x lt 0 3 0 0 lt y lt 100 0 and store as curve p p Operate Clip m 0 1 0 3 0 0 100 0 Com 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve
143. Create using current settings __ Copy settings from graph Page Size Width pixles Height pixles Automatic Page Layout MV Tile Wide _ Tile Tall _ Cascade i ie D22 E33 _ XxY x Ei Manual Page Layout Advanced E User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 21 PROPERTIES This menu can be used to display addition curves properties Minimum and maximum curve values can be highlighted for each curve and the value can also be displayed 1 200 1 000 0 800 In addition to displaying the value on the curve the values can also be added automatically to the curve label in the graph legend Node 1343 max 1 1 48E6 5 21 1 Curves Curve Properties Curves Legend Curves Off an Off Maximum Value This option will turn off the display of all minimam and maximum value Display Maximum Value _ All Curves Minimum Value Display Minimum Value Format Page 5 113 T HIS Curves Summary This option will display a single minimum maximum value from all curves currently displayed The following properties can be displayed Maximum Mark the maximum value value with a cross Display Display the maximum Maximum value Minimum Mark the minimum value value with a cross Display Display the minimum Minimum value Curves All curves This option can be used to select the properties that are displayed for each individual curve When this option is selected the display
144. D 0 0000 crash barriers Output Curve Write To Screen Write To File File default thiv This option requires 3 input curves a longitudinal and lateral acceleration and a rotation rate The user is prompted for the constants Dx Dy and Xo See Appendix E for more details on these calculations Page 5 76 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 11 15 NIJ Biomechanical neck injury predictor Used i as a measure of Shear Curve BS injury due to the load transferred Axial Curve me through the cana Moment Curve condyles Fzc Tension Baal 388E 0 Myc Flexion Ha Myc Extension iSi e distance 0 00 Output Curve Ballet This option requires 3 input curves 1 to represent Shear force 1 to represent Axial force and a third to represent bending moment in the dummy s upper neck loadcell Enter these curves in the corresponding input boxes The 4 critical constants used to calculate NIJ Fzc tension Fzc comp Myc flexion and Myc extension default to the values specified by the test creators These can be changed by entering different values into the respective boxes Enter the e distance into the e distance box Select which curves you wish to output to in the Output box For more information on the calculation of NIJ refer to Appendix E NIJ will output the 4 possible a conditions for Ni Lit E g es Nte is the tension extension condition
145. DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN EDIUM_ BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER _ 2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL 1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL 5 COL_6 COL_7 COL 8 COL 9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COLI14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_ 17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_ 27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 COL 34 COL_35 COL_36 Page H 9 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 pais font ste oat for Y amp elvetica_Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium axis units ier_Bold Times Medium Times_bold Defaul y_axis_colour Kstring gt lColour of Y FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE FOREGROUND axis units YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_ 34 COL_35 COL_36 y2_label_size string gt Font size for 8 10 12 14 18 24 Default Default second
146. E Ba OL 84S ER E BS 675 8S SFR SO B6 CO GH SER i E 7 7 As well as the 36 colour options Foreground and Background can be selected to change the colour to the Foreground and Background colours defined in the Display menu If N C is selected then the Apply button will have no effect on the colour of the currently selected curves Page 5 51 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 HIN 5 6 3 SYMBOL as Pressing the right mouse button while over the Symbol button will invoke a symbol popup menu that allow any of the 9 T HIS symbols to be selected the 9 is a blank symbol that can be selected so that a curve can be plotted without a symbol As well as the 9 symbols the menu also contains a No Change option The Symbols Frequency controls how often a symbol is drawn on a curve By default symbols are not drawn they can be switched on using the Display menu No Change k 5 6 4 WIDTH Pressing the right mouse button while over the width button will invoke a popup menu that allows 4 different line widths to be selected or No Change No Change Page 5 52 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 6 5 STYLE ressing the right mouse button while over the style button will invoke a popup menu that allows 8 different line styles to be selected the 3 is actually a blank line that can be selected so that a curve can be plotted without a line As well as the 8 line styles the menu also c
147. EN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_ 34 COL_35 COL_36 X axis uni Helvetica_Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium D paa axis units x axis colour ourier_Bold Times Medium Times_bold Default string gt Colour of X FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE aaa D axis units YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE _YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 COL 34 COL_35 COL_ 36 Ya abe y_label_font y_label_colour ee ont for Y axis cea elvetica_ Medium Helvetica_ Bold Courier_Medium string gt Colour of Y FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE FOREGROUND axis label YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE
148. FAST TCE using variables within the script see FAST TCE section for more details There are some extra command options to make T HIS aware of input curves and constants within the macro These macro keywords are as follows MacroFundions ad macro2 macro3 macro4 macro5 Macro Curve Inputs Curve input 1 Em Cune input 2 Cure input 3 a Curve input 4 Curve inputs al Macro Constants Constant input Constant Input 2 Constant input 3 macro acr lt name gt acronym for the macro button in T HIS macro title lt description gt a more descriptive title for the macro macro curve lt curve variable gt lt curve FAST TCF variable name for input curve followed by curve description gt description macro const lt const variable gt lt curve FAST TCF variable name for input constant followed by constant description gt description If one or more macro files are found with duplicate acronyms then only the last file read will be displayed so users can override SYSTEM macros with there own definitions if they want to When the user selects one of the Macro functions the macro file associated with the function is read and T HIS creates a selection menu for the user to define the relevant curve numbers and constant values to input into the macro script These inputs will replace the variables used within the macro For example If the user selects 1 for the macro curve variablemacro_ input then any occurrence of macro_ inp
149. FT RIGHT BOTTOM TOP none gt indow on multi screen LEFT_BOTTOM LEFT_TOP displa RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT _TOP Bee el para image format MP_8_C BMP_8_UN PNG_8 GIF_8 PG_24 en rite images with white TRUE FALSE ALSE background rhs_number_columns Rinteger gt umber of columns of H 50 eel Fools button The following strings and values control laser plotting setup Preference fype Description laser_paper_size _Kstrins gt Default paper size A4 A3 US O A laser_orientation _ string gt Default page orientation laser_top margin Kreal gt Top marginsizeinmm Ct laser_bottom_marginkreal gt Bottom margin sizeinmm_ Ci laser_left margin kreal gt Left margin sizeinmm CR laser_right margin Kreal gt Right margin sizeinmm ho The following options affect the appearance and behaviour of the graphical user interface left handed support and the mouse Preference Type Description alid arguments Default 0 5 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 graphics_type lt string gt Graphics format to start fOPENGL TTY DEFAULT OPENG T HIS w dv_sync_windowskstring gt Dyn view method s ICON ICON CAPS ICON NUM for synchronising ICON CAPS NUM indows dv_left_shift string gt Dyn view action for shift Left mouse dv_middle_shift Kstring gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY RANSLATION shift Middle mouse IROTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N Page H 11 T HIS User manual Ver
150. HD is calculated as the peak value using a 10ms moving average of the resultant vehicle acceleration after the THIV impact The THIV calculation requires the following inputs Horizontal Vehicle Acceleration Time History Ax Lateral Vehicle Acceleration Time History Ay Yaw Rate Time History Horizontal Distance from the occupants head to vehicle Dx Lateral Distance from the occupants head to vehicle Dx Ax N gt ML N N N N Gb x 4 IL Ay lol For more information on THIV and PHD see BS EN 1317 1 72 LF N E 6 Biomechanical neck injury predictor NIJ The biomechanical neck injury predictor is a measure of the injury due to the load transferred through the occipital Page E 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 condyles Its calculation combines the neck axial force and the flexion extension moment about the occipital condoyles It is used in association with the USSID dummy for standard American frontal impact tests The shear force Fx axial force Fz and bending moment My are measured by the dummy upper neck load cell for the duration of the crash using force and moment definitions consistent with SAE J221 1 T HIS will caculate the bending moment using the equation My My e Fx Where e is the e distance specified in the input window Fx is the shear force Shear force axial force and bending moment must be filtered using an SAE Channel Frequency Class 600 filter C600 f
151. HIS that makes the job much easier It is started by Options Edit Preferences or through the Preferences Button in the Tool menu The preferences editor reads an XML file that contains all possible preferences and their valid options and allows you to change them at will In this example the user is changing the background colour in D3PLOT Note that changes made in the Preferences editor will not affect the current session of D3PLOT they will only take effect the next time it is run Page H 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 If you have write permission on the oa_pref file in the OASYS directory you will be asked if you want to update that file otherwise you will only be given the option of updating your own file in your HOME USERPROFILE directory In this example the user is changing Preferences for THIS X the background colour The option is active ie present in __ File eat _Dismiss Help the oa_pref file and currently is set er to WHITE ji EY THIS Name this background_c add_ascii_zero Type lt string gt Usage is A j e Select an option in the Tree on auto_regularise Default BLACK the left hand side auto_update e Make it active inactive e If active select a value from the popup or type in a value if necessary Description Background colour Active v al legend_columns Value WHITE y line_width convert_time The colour of the highlighting in the left hand
152. However lines to be read must start at column 1 and there must not be any gaps in the keyword this laser paper size A4 this laser orientation Landscape this laser mode Greyscale this user text line 2 Design Project this user text line 4 Phase II Results The user preferences option is not available in command line mode however the oa_pref file is read and applied Setting paper size and margins can therefore only be done through this method Page H 17 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Global preferences From version 9 3 onwards global preferences that apply to all programs can be specified using oasys as the program name oasys lt keyword gt lt argument At present the following global preferences can be defined If a preference is defined twice using both oasys and this then the this setting will override the global setting Preference Type WD escription alid arguments Defaul file_names string gt Controls input filename syntax OASYS LSTC OASY LSTC d3 OASYS job ptf html_applicationkstring gt Location of HTML browser _ none Be re Petali image format MP_8_C BMP_8_UN PNG_8 GIF_8 PG_24 JPG_24 PPM_24 maximise Klogical gt aximise window when RUE FALSE FALSE Pros i am arlec placement string gt Location for initial window on LEFT RIGHT BOTTOM TOP none gt multi screen display LEFT_BOTTOM LEFT_TOP RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT TOP pdf_application Kstring gt Location
153. Hz filter It can be seen that higher orders attenuate the results more quickly they have a higher roll off rate Gain dB jan Bez Lea ts I DL 4 Frequency Hz Bulterworth n 1 Butterworth ne 2 Butterworth n 3 Sutterworth n 4 Version 6 1 The cut off frequency is the frequency at which the gain of the filter is 3dB i e the magnitude of signals at this frequency is halved by the filter The lower the frequency the less noise passes through but any peaks in the signal tend to get reduced in magnitude and delayed in time Page D 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Basic untfitered signal Amglilude Time s worsion 51 Time s Fihercd al GOHz T H is Version 6 1 Filtered at 60Hz Page D 2 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 x o Li 2 m 135 Fitordat 180rz b e a a u gt N as oO ym an O _ 2 LL 5 E apaug um Fileres 21 S00Hz Filtered at 600Hz Page D 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Filtered at 1000H2 Time s Hllerod at 1099Hz Versen 6 1 Filtered at 1000Hz The above figures show examples of filtering frequency using the four standard SAE filters 60 180 600 and 1000 Hz cut off frequencies see below These show clearly how the original signal is smoothed D 3 Butterworth Filter Implementation Two re
154. I XML file format All items with the database are either branches or models Each database entry has an XML name and a LABEL element Models also contain a model element that contains the full pathname of one of the files belonging to the model The XML name should be unique and should obey the following rules e Names can contain letters numbers and other characters e Names must not start with a number or punctuation character e Names must not start with the letters xml or XML or Xml etc e Names cannot contain space The LABEL is the string used to display an item within the tree view Unlike the XML name the LABEL can contain any ASCII character Page 5 12 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS lt model database version 10 000000 gt model_database lt Template Demo label Template Demo gt lt iteration_1 label Iteration 1 gt E Template Demo lt base label Base Eliteration 1 model e release meeting crush base base pt f gt v Base lt run_1 label Run 1 Run 1 model e release _ meeting crush runl runl pt gt WRun 2 lt run_2 label Run 2 model e release v Run 3 meeting crush run2 run2 pt f gt lt run_3 label Run 3 v Run 4 model e release Fliterstion 2 meeting crush run3 run3 pt f gt lt run_4 label Run 4 W Base model e release Run 4 meeting crush run4 run4 ptfi gt v Run lt iteration 1 gt Run 2 lt iteration_2 label Iteration 2 gt lt base label Base Ww
155. IJ refer to the FMVSS 208 document E 7 The Thoracic Trauma Index TTI The Thoracic Trauma Index is used as a predictor of thoracic injury severity in the USSID dummy in standard American Side Impact tests The Index considers both rib and Thorax acceleration in an impast The expression for calculating TTI is given by TTI G R G LS 2 Where G R is the greater of the peak accelerations of either the upper or lower rib expressed in g and G LS is the peak acceleration in the lower spine T12 expressed in g For the dummy to pass the test the following conditions must be met i The TTI value must not exceed a 85g for a passenger car with 4 side doors and for any multipurpose vehicle truck or bus b 90g for a passenger car with 2 side doors ii The peak lateral acceleration of the pelvis shall not exceed 130g iii Any side door struck by the moving deformable barrier shall not seperate totally from the car iv Any door not struck by the moving deformable barrier must meet the following requirements a The door chall not disengage from the latched position b The latch shall not seperate from the striker Page E 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS c The hinge components shall not seperate from each other or from their attachment to the vehicle d Neither the latch nor the hinge systems of the door shall pull out of their anchorage For more information on the use and calculation of TTI r
156. L_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_ 34 COL_35 COL_36 legend_size tring gt Font size for 8 10 12 14 18 24 Default Default urve legends legend_font string gt Font for Helvetica_Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium Default second curve Courier_Bold Times_Medium Times_bold Default legends y2_axis_colour sia y2_axis_font string gt Font for Helvetica_Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium Default second Y ourier_Bold Times_Medium Times_bold Default AX In S S Page H 10 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS legend_colour Kstring gt Colour of FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE IFOREGROUND YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_ MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_ GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY IMEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_34 COL_35 COL_36 The following strings and values control how T HIS starts reference Type Description alid arguments Default ith en En 1 H arieq placement string gt Location for initial LE
157. ME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW OLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA IMEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE IHOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY SER_1 USER_2 USER_3 USER_4 USER_5 SER_6 COL_1 COL_2 COL_3 COL_4 OL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 OL_15 COL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 OL_20 COL_21 COL_22 COL_23 COL_24 OL_25 COL_26 COL_27 COL_28 COL_29 OL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 COL_34 OL_35 COL_36 foreground_colour string gt Foreground HITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE CYAN AGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE INDIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW OLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA IMEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE IHOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY IDARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY SER_1 USER_2 USER_3 USER_4 USER_5 SER_6 COL_1 COL_2 COL_3 COL_4 OL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 OL_15 COL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 OL_20 COL_21 COL_22 COL_23 COL_24 OL_25 COL_26 COL_27 COL_28 COL_29 OL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 COL_34 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 The following options control the preferred order of data sources for various entities Preference Type _ Description Default se_elout logical gt Use ELOUT in preference to ELOUTDET for Shell and ThickShell TRUE FALSE FALS data components from LSDA file global Kordere
158. Message The title is m title Windows static Description Test whether script is running on a Windows operating system See also UnixQ Arguments No arguments Return type true if Windows false if not Example To test if the OS is Windows if Windows Page J 10 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Colour class The Colour class contains constants relating to colours More Colour constants Colour BACKGROUND Background colour Colour BLACK Colour black Colour BLUE Colour blue Colour LIGHT_PINK Colour light pink Colour LIME Colour MAGENTA Colour magenta Colour OLIVE Page J 11 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Colour USER_5 Colour user defined 5 Colour USER_6 Colour user defined 6 Colour WHITE Colour YELLOW Colour yellow Detailed Description The Colour class is used to define colours p colour Colour RED Page J 12 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Curve class The Curve class gives you access to curves in T HIS More Class functions Copy source integer target integer Delete curve integer Exists curve integer First FirstFreeIDQ FirstIDQ FlagAll flag integer GetFromID ID integer GetFromTag TAG string HighestID Pick prompt string modal optional boolean Select flag integer prompt string modal optional boolean UnflagAll flag integer Member functions Curve
159. More information on each part of the curve history can be obtained by moving the mouse across each operation If a curve operation has one or more inputs that are not curves then the hover text will display all of the inputs along with their values Clip limit X and Y X Minimum 1e 020 X Maximum 1e 020 YY Minimum 0 Y Maximum 1e 006 6 4 2 Modifying As well as viewing the operations used to create a curve the operations can also be modified by right clicking on them Disp x Disp y Disp z Rel mag Disp mag RACC x Vel x RACC y Vel y RACC Z ul l M we cmas For a READ operation the entity ID can be changed to any other ID of the same entity type T HIS will automatically check if results are available for the new ID and display a warning if they are not As well as changing the entity ID the data component can also be modified by selecting a different component in the popup menu Page 6 12 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS If a curve operation has one or more inputs that are not curves then right clicking on the operation will display a popup menu that will allow all of the values to be CLIP modified y Function CLIP x Minimum x Maximum Eye Y Minimum oF Y Maximum As well as changing the inputs to existing curve operations it is also possible to change a curve operation to any other curve operation that has the same number of input curves
160. NARY These are output for the same surfaces integration points as the stress tensor values Through Thickness Integration Points surfaces layers NOTE The top and bottom surfaces are not the outer fibres if the default Gaussian integration rules are used but rather the outer and inner integration points The relationship between integration point location and shell thickness depends on the number of integration points used The following diagram shows locations of integration points with respect to shell half thickness t 2 assuming the default Gaussian integration rules have been used No of PointsDistance of outer fibres from neutral axis as a proportion of t 2 1 0 0 membrane 2 0 577 t 2 3 0 775 4 0 861 t 2 5 0 906 The top or outer point is on the positive local Z side of the element neutral axis The output of shell data from LS DYNA will fall into one of two categories and the surface options available in T HIS depend on this NOTE It is possible to use non default integration schemes in LS DYNA which may locate the integration points at different places This is an advanced topic contact Oasys Ltd for advice Default output case 3 surfaces In this case regardless of how many integration points the shell elements may actually have through their thickness LS DYNA writes out Top surface Top integration point Centre surface Computed neutral axis value Bottom surface Bottom integration point
161. NSTALL manuals Optional Specific home directory for user when using Oasys oasys home dir Ltd software If not defined will use lt pathname gt SHOME Linux USERPROFILE Windows OA_TEMP Optional Specific temporary directory for user when using oasys temp dir Oasys Ltd software If not defined will use lt pathname gt P_tmpdir Linux typically tmp TEMP Windows typically C temp It will be clear from the table above that no Environment variables have to be set and that all defaults will revert to pre 9 4 behaviour In other words users wishing to keep the status quo will find behaviour and layout unchanged if they do nothing OA INSTALL XX Previously the software used the OA_ INSTALL renamed from OASYS environment variable to locate the directory the software was installed in e On Windows this is no longer required as the software can work out its own installation directory As this environment variable is no longer required it is recommended that it is removed from machines it is currently set on as in some cases where more than one version has been installed in different directories it can cause problems e On LINUX systems the oasys_12 script that starts the SHELL automatically sets this Environment Variable and passes it to any application started from the SHELL If you run applications directly from the command line and bypass the SHELL then you should set OA INSTALL XX so that the software can locate manuals a
162. Note that the centre surface here is the neutral axis value For membrane elements all three sets of values will be the same Optional output case user defined number of integration points maxint other than 0 or 3 The number of through thickness integration points written to the THF file can be modified using the value of MAXINT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card If this parameter is changed then all thin and thick shell output written to the THF file will have MAXINT data slots for integration points in the file regardless of how many integration points a given element may have through its thickness If MAXINT is not 3 then the order in which data is written to the THF file is controlled by the actual number of integration points of integration points in a shell s formulation The following table illustrates output for the case of MAXINT not equal to 3 Page A 10 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Data slotin Shell with 3 Integration Shell with 5 Integration Shell with any other nunber of integration file points mo points poio ooo Middle Mae ooo Bottom NOTE The THF file does NOT contain any information on the number of integration points each shell was defined with No explicit neutral axis value is calculated or output The outcome of writing more integration points than have been used in a shell formulation is undefined There is no guarantee that the centre surface in this context is the neutral axi
163. OL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 OL_27 COL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 AutoBlank auto_blank_mode kstring gt Set the default MODEL COMPONENT_ID ENTITY_TYPE MODEL AutoBlank mode ENTITY_ID COMPONENT_TYPE SURFACE BE 2 DB Zu L H i n ECER95 IIHS ECER95 l o User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS urve_palette string gt many colours are o_grey 27 full 30 any user ftcf_error_count Kinteger gt Maximum number of errors before a FAST TCE script null_value real gt alue to assign to 1 0E 18 urves when data doesn t exi SV file field OMMA TAB SPACE OMMA Beparator The following options control the automatic creation of curve groups Preference Type Description alid arguments Default k gt group_by_model Automatically create a curve group TRUE FALSE RUE LOL each mode g _by_ logical gt Automatically create a curve group TRUE FALSE FALSE for each entity type data is read for group_by_component Klogical gt Automatically create a curve group TRUE FALSE FALSE for each component type data is ead omponent_group_namexstring gt Controls how curve groups created COMPONENT OMPONEN for components are named OMPONENT_AND_TYPE group_by_file_index logical gt Automatically create a curve group TRUE FALSE FALSE based on the index of a curve read TOM a J C C The following options control the columns that are dsiplayed by default in the curve table Prferene Eype Description Val
164. PALE_YELLOW OLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN EDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN AROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY EDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_34 COL_35 COL_36 erid on __ klogical gt Display grid TRUE FALSE FALSE grid_width real gt Default line 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 idth for grid pixels The following strings and values control formatting of values for graphs Preference Type Description Valid arguments Default add_exponent_to_label Klogical gt Add axis RUE FALSE RUE multiplier to labe x_axis_decimal_places kstring gt Number of D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Default 3 d Sn for Page H 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Automatic General Scientific Default Automatic Default Automatic o display Y y2_axis_decimal_placeskstring gt Number of D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Default 3 displayed for second Y axis Valle y2_axis_format string gt Format used Automatic General Scientific Default Automatic Default Automatic o display second Y axis Value background_colour string gt B HITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE INDIGO LI
165. PREPOST DlAdem NASTRAN re bd read all curves from Bulk filename Data file filename Data File Curve highest 1 Read 5 1 6 KEYBOARD Key in curve information directly A dialogue window is displayed upon requesting this option where the user will be prompted for title x and y axis labels a curve identifier and then a series of points Once all the points required have been entered carriage return should be pressed The user will then be prompted for the curve or file in which to store this data means use the next free curve Page 5 21 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 7 CSV The CSV menu see right can be used to specify the name of a comma separated variable file to read into T HIS The file may contain up to 1000 columns of data separated by commas The maximum line length supported by this option is 10240 characters Read Data 2x LS DYNA Groups T HIS Bulk Data Keyboard Screen ee LS PREPOST DIAdem NASTRAN File contains File Format Field Separator Read X Values Generate X Values Read Labels Page 5 22 CSV File E Curve highest 1 Be File Format KRYK Y Field Separator Comma yp KAXIS Ww Read X Values Column 1 Generate X Yalues Start 0 0000E 00 Interval 1 0000E 00 CURVE LABELS IV Read Curve Labels Row _ Generate Labels Column AXIS LABELS MV ReadAxisLabels Row EJ Read This opt
166. SSD the following nodal data components are available For each data component both amplitude and phase angle data components are available Component THF XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCH d3thdt Stress components sxx Stessinxx yes o Page A 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 a syz sesinya Sd sax snz Dj For a random vibration analysis PSD the following nodal data components are available Component THF XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCH d3thdt Stress components sx Sew VE yy sesinyy SS es sz snz Sd es eo Coordinate systems of results The stress and strain tensors are reported in the global cartesian system unless the option to output results in the part coordinate system has been used Writing the directional strain tensor is optional in LS DYNA it will only appear in the menu if it is present Extra data components The extra data components SOEn are also optional and only appear if present in the database They are material dependent results and are treated as scalar data of unknown type by T HIS A 6 Beam Data Components For beams the following data components are available Component PHF a3thatt XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASC Basic data components nxs Axialfoce e ps WI ny Shearforeiny ies es NZ shearforceinz be yes Bee Moment in Y yes i gt TEE Torsional moment Plastic data components es gt iS Axial strain
167. T HIS Version 12 0 The Software house of Arup For help and support from OASYS Ltd please contact UK Arup Group Ltd The Arup Campus Blythe Gate Blythe Valley Park Solihull West Midlands B90 8AE United Kingdom Tel 44 0 121 213 3399 Fax 44 0 121 213 3302 Email dyna support arup com Web www oasys software com dyna China Arup 39 F 41 F Huai Hai Plaza Huai Hai Road M Shanghai China 200031 Tel 86 21 3118 8875 Fax 8621 3118 8882 Email china support arup com Web www oasys software com dyna cn India Arup Plot 39 Ananth Info Park Opp Oracle Campus HiTec City Madhapur Phase II Hyderabad 500081 India Tel 91 40 4436 9797 98 Email india support arup com Web www oasys software com dyna or contact your local Oasys Ltd distributor LS DYNA LS OPT and LS PrePost are registered trademarks of Livermore Software Technology Corporation User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Development History New Features for version 12 0 New Features for version 11 0 New Features for version 10 2 New Features for version 10 0 New Features for version 9 4 1 New Features for version 9 4 New Features for version 9 3 New Features for version 9 2 New Features for version 9 0 New Features for version 8 2 New Features for version 8 1 New Features for version 8 0 Text conventions used in this manual 1 Introduction 1 1 Program Limits 1 2 Running T HIS 1 3 Command Line Options 2 U
168. T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Correlation examples Acceleration This measure picks up matching of primary and secondary peaks in the curves which may correspond to physical events Measure 3 Area matching The integral of each curve is calculated by summing the area of the curve above y 0 and the absolute area of the curve below y 0 Points are lost according to the difference compared to a tolerance limit Measure 4 Curve shape low frequency excursion The curves are filtered A band is drawn around filtered curve A using positive and negative offsets in x and y The area of excursions of filtered Curve B outside the band is calculated Points are lost according to the excursion area compared to a tolerance limit The process is repeated for filtered Curve A excursions from a band drawn around filtered curve B Page F 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Correlation examples Acceleration 0 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 Time Measure 5 Curve shape full curve The same as Measure 4 except that the curves are not filtered and different tolerance limits and band sizes may be used Output T HIS prints the overall correlation percentage and the marks from each measure to the screen or to a text file A new curve is created from each input curve showing the identified peaks used in measures and 2 As the same curve could be used as input to multiple correlations the c
169. T get back exactly to the original curve if it did not have a number of points equal to a power of 2 e Scaling Option 2 With this option applying an inverse FFT to the resulting curves will generate a curve the same as the original even if the original curve did not have a number of points equal to a power of 2 This is useful if users wish to create their own filters where the filter characteristic is defined in the frequency domain An option to regularise the curve before performing the function is on by default The spacing between points on the frequency axis of the resulting curve is determined by the time duration of the padded input curve dx 1 0 time The highest frequency in the output curve is determined by the time interval of the input curve F max points dt Page 5 80 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 12 10 IFFT 5 12 11 NCP 5 12 12 BLC Performs an inverse fast Fourier transform Converts two input signals from the frequency to the time domain The two input signals can be the magnitude and phase or real and imaginary components of the time signal NOTE If an FFT using scaling option is performed on a curve that does not have a number of points equal to a power of 2 and then an IFFT is performed on the resulting curves you will NOT get back exactly to the original curve This is because the FFT and IFFT both scale their output curves by the number of points in the curve which in this case
170. TCF if no models are defined The default model mapping will use the same model numbers as in the FAST TCE script Auto confirm text boxes will force T HIS to confirm any text boxes that should appear in the interactive playback of a FAST TCE script such as HIC results and so on The FAST TCE script will ignore any existing T HIS curves and their tags This guarantees that the user can run a single FAST TCF file many times and it will only use the new curves created by FAST TCF Page 5 86 Create Run Script Name a Reread Model Mapping _ Auto confirm text boxes _ Pay FASTTCF input r Step F T HIS command line End User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 15 Tees PR TITLE AXES LEGEND Tite xaxis Yaxis Y2Axs Legend Options The TITLE AXES menu is shown in the figure right This menu controls the contents of the title and axes labels and the axis scaling The individual axis title and legend menus can also be accessed by clicking over the appropriately highlighted area on the graph Changes to the TITLE AXES LEGEND options are only applied to active graphs see_ Section 3 5 5 15 1 TITLE Label The plot title may be set AUTOmatically or manually When the AUTO option is selected the text box will display lt automatic gt and the plot title will be set to the title of the first curve that is currently being plotted The plot title m
171. Title prompt The current title will be displayed in brackets Page 5 56 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS XL DIALOGUE This option allows the user to edit the l x axis label for individual curves x Enter the curve number at the Select 5 curve prompt Enter the desired new title at the X Time s Axis prompt The current x axis label will be displayed in brackets YL Sj DIALOGUE This option allows the user to edit the y axis label for individual curves Enter the curve number at the Select curve prompt Enter the desired new title at the Y Acceleration 9 Axis prompt The current y axis label will be displayed in brackets TA DIALOGUE This option allows the user to edit the tag for individual curves Enter the curve number at the Select curve prompt Enter the desired new Tag at the Tag prompt The current tag will be displayed in brackets Page 5 57 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 7 Command eX Session Files Playback Record Playback Pause Resume Command and session files are used to drive or record a T HIS session Both Record Pause Resume session save and command playback files have been set up to act like tape recorders and the concept of recording and playing back files will be used below These files button click command files are not easy to edit by hand and they are not always backwards
172. VE INFORMATION 6 4 Curve Histories 6 5 Keyboard Shortcuts 6 6 Preferences 7 FAST TCF 7 0 FAST TCF OVERVIEW 7 1 FAST TCF INTRODUCTION 7 2 PAGE GRAPH LAYOUT AND SELECTION 7 3 INPUT SYNTAX TO LOAD OTHER FILES 7 4 INPUT FOR DATA EXTRACTION REQUESTS 7 5 UNITS 7 6 CURVE TAGS 7 6 4 Using Curve Numbers 7 7 CURVE GROUPS 7 8 PERFORMING FAST TCF CURVE OPERATIONS 7 9 APPLYING EXTRA OPTIONS TO DATA REQUESTS 7 10 Setting properties for curves 7 11 Defining Datums 7 12 FAST TCF IMAGE OUTPUT OPTIONS 7 13 Outputting curve properties to text files variables and REPORTER 7 14 FAST TCF CURVE OUTPUT APPENDICES APPENDIX A LS DYNA Data Components APPENDIX B T HIS CURVE FILE FORMAT APPENDIX C T HIS BULK DATA FILE FORMAT APPENDIX D FILTERING APPENDIX E INJURY CRITERIA APPENDIX F Curve Correlation APPENDIX G The ERROR Calculation APPENDIX H The oa_pref preference file APPENDIX I Windows File Associations APPENDIX J T HIS JavaScript API global class APPENDIX K Typed Commands Installation organisation Version 12 0 Installation structure JaDe The JavaScript debugger Page ii Viewing the script files and functions Adding removing breakpoints Running the script Printing the value of a variable The call stack Exceptions NDNNDD MN NNR BRED CNR me VDU 7 9 A 1 UW N e e j p opd pei pi LP SSSSS5E585CR KAR HOmmonwp U P User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Develo
173. Version 12 0 October 2014 Next Description Returns the next curve in the model Arguments No arguments Return type Curve object or null if there are no more curves in the model Example To get the curve in model m after curve 1 var curve 1 Next Pick prompt string modal optional boolean static Description Picks a single curve Arguments Text to display as a prompt to the user modal oolean If selection is modal blocks the user from doing anything else in T HIS until this window is optional dismissed If omitted the selection will be modal Return type Curve object or null if the user cancles the pick operation Example To pick a curve giving the prompt Pick curve Curve Pick Pick curves Previous Description Returns the previous curve in the model Arguments No arguments Return type Curve object or null if there are no more curves in the model Page J 22 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To get the curve in model m before this one var curve curve Previous RemoveFromGraph graph graph int Description Removes a curve from a graph Arguments graph int Optional list of graphs to remove the curve from If undefined then the curve is removed from graph all graphs Return type No return value Example To remove a curve c from graphs 1 and 3 c RemoveFromGraph 1 3 To remove a
174. _kgmm ims immm ms ftslugs Tms Density i kg m 3_ T mm 3 kgmm 3 Wmmm 3 lug cuft _ T m3 Stress m Nimm kumm Nimm beat ft a Moment ___Nm_ _Nmm___kNmmm___Nmm___ftbt___iNm_ _ Nm Pressure __N m 2 __N imm 2 kNimm 2 Nmm 2 Ibfisgft kN m Energy Density __LJ m 3 mJ mm 3 p mm 3 ___mJ mm3 ftlbf cuft kJ mm 3 T TE E E E E E EE Power WU _ W W Wto kW Force per uni width fit idth If a curve has a user defined unit or if after a curve operation one of the curve axis unit is not one of the basic units that T HIS knows about then T HIS will build a label from the currently defined length mass time temperature and angle labels If for example a velocity time curve is multiplied by another velocity time curve then the Y axis will have units of Velocity 2 If the current display unit system is U1 m kg seconds then the unit label for the curves y axis will be m 2 s 2 Page 5 120 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 22 3 Curves x This option can be used to display the unit Models Labels Curves inf tion fi h 3 f nee Display Curve Model Units x 1 Disp x Node 1343 2 Disp x Node 1344 3 Disp x Node 1345 4 Disp x Node 1346 5 Disp x Node 1347 6 Disp y Node 1343 7 Disp y Node 1344 8 Disp y Node 1345 9 Disp y Node 1346 10 Disp z Node 1343 11 Disp z Node 1344 12 Disp z Node 1345 engel show ciferihe Kor asa wee E Model Units X Axis U
175. a directory OA_INSTALL for T HIS to look his_library macros in for MACRO den on master_group_fileKstring gt Filename for none gt default group information Page H 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 read_group_files Kstring gt Default action IGNORE DELETE OVERWRITE INCREMENT IGNORE hen a group file is found in a model directory and T HIS has already read a OTOUD C plot_format string Default format of OLUMN DEFAULT AUTO OFF FULL OLUMN plot FLOATING ing gt prefix format kstring gt Prefix for MODEL DIRECTORY ROOTNAME USER MODEL hi x ing gt regularise_dt real gt ime interval for automatic curve gularisation S 0 0001 e RUE FALSE FALSE show_hic_value_kstring gt Display HIC value ON OFF See 3ms Clip JON OFF alue urn THIV ON OFF OFF alue show_phd_value Br PHD ON OFF alue injury_text__ string gt display injury riteria values SER_2 USER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 OL_1 COL_2 COL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 OL_7 COL_8 COL_9 COL_10 COL_11 OL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 COL_16 OL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 OL_27 COL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 njury_line_colou display injury riteria lines MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 SER_2 USER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 OL_1 COL_2 COL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 OL_7 COL_8 COL_9 COL_10 COL_11 OL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 COL_16 OL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 C
176. acement Eyes yes Dx few HE esd yo Pr displacement SO ves esd yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes ive Page A 21 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page A 22 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS A 18 Cross Section Data Components For cross sections the following data components are available C componen Fran asao PRT Gatto ESDA inoun asen FR o oroe A es Fr fr rom ses rere Ses RM ron mamma Si es des wx Momentinx es ides MY Momentiny es des Mz Momentinz Js es IMM Moment Magnitude yes yes ex Keentoid coring es ides er reentoidcooninate JM cz oono corone TE AR Arent Cross Section MMs ie A 19 Subsystem Data Components For subsystems the following data components are available C omon RF aad FRAP Gato SDA ins fasc iM Fir monensun O m zmomecum A 20 Geometric Contact Data Components For geometric contact entities the following data components are available OT Jeomponent Fra aan PT cai ESDA Coin ASC Fr poe A Fr Jerome A RM Force Magnitude SP es ies vx omeni es ies my Monentiny es ies wzo momens Jy bes IMM Moment Magniude es ies Page A 23 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 A 21 Nodal Rigid Body Data Components For nodal rigid bodies the following data components are available OOO omon FR rasnan Ber Gato spa mono Jasc DX ie Disptaemem je f
177. ackground number of different formats Filename models 1_sled this001 jpg C File Format JPG r Resolution Screen _ 2x Screen _ 4x Screen All Paaes Each page will be saved as a single image to multiple files The filenames used will be based on the filename selected by the user This option will only be available if T HIS contains multiple graphs on more than one page see section 3 2 Current Page A single image containing currently displayed page will be generated This option will only be available if T HIS contains multiple graphs on more than one page see section 3 2 Only Page n A single image containing the selected page will be generated This option will only be available if T HIS contains multiple graphs on more than one page see section 3 2 All Graphs A single image will be generated containing all of the graphs This option will only be available if T HIS only contains a single page see Section 32 m All Active Graphs A single image will be generated containing all of the currently active graphs This option will only be available if T HIS only contains a single page see Section 3 2 Only Graph n A single image containing the selected graph will be generated White Background Captures the image with a white background and black foreground Once the image is captured the colours are reset to their original values Page 5 62 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 8
178. acters containn string alternative string which matching lines must contain maximum length of 256 optional characters Return type string read from file or undefined ifend of file Example Loop reading lines from File object f which contain example var line while line file FindLineContaining example undefined Page J 37 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 FindLineStarting start1 string start2 optional string start3 optional string startn optional string Description Reads a line from a file which starts with start opened for reading by a File object Although this is possible using core JavaScript functions this function should be significantly faster as most of the processing is done by T HIS in C rather than in the JavaScript interpreter To enable this function to be as fast as possible a maximum line length of 256 characters is used If you expect a file to have lines longer than 256 characters then use ReadLongLine which allows lines of any length If one argument is used then the line must start with that string If more than one argument is used then lines which start with start OR start2 OR start3 etc will be returned Arguments String which matching lines must start with maximum length of 256 characters start2 optional alternative string which matching lines must start with maximum length of 256 characters start3 optional string al
179. age lead in optional cosine only float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Apply a smoothing window to a curve Arguments Window Type Window type to apply Hanning cosine or exponetial age lead in optional cosine only age lead in for cosine window Return type Curve object or NULL Example Apply a hanning window to curve m and store as curve p p Operate Window m Hanning Zero Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Translate curve to 0 0 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 102 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example Translate curve m to 0 0 and store as curve p p Operate Zero m ZeroX Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Translate curve to X 0 0 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Translate curve m to X 0 and store as curve p p Operate ZeroX m ZeroY Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Translate curve to Y 0 0 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Translate curve m to Y 0 and store as curve p p Operate ZeroyY m dB Input Curve Curve Reference Value float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Converts a curve to dB y 20 0 log y yref Page J 103 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Reference Value Re
180. aking it possible to operate on multiple WINDOW ZERO M B 4d A Octave curves for example add 20 curves to 20 curves eee The options with the OPERATE menu are split into 3 groups The first group require 2 sets of curves as input The second group require a single set of curves as input The third group also require a single set of curves as input but the output from these functions is a single curve See Section 5 0 for more information on curve groups 5 9 1 ABS Produces the absolute y values of a curve 5 9 2 ADD Add the y axis values together for two curves or add a constant value to all the y values If two ia curves are being added together they must have identical x axis values 5 9 3 ADX Add the x axis values together for two curves or add a constant value to all the x values If two ie curves are being added together they must have identical y axis values 5 9 4 AVE Produces a single curve that is the average of the input curves 5 9 5 C AT Concatenate the second curve to the end of the first Page 5 67 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 9 9 6 CLIP N toimne RE X minimum value Pick Xmin any points that exceed a set of specified en minimum and maximum lass X maximum value Pick Xmax x amp y axis value The user is prompted for Sie Y minimum value Pick Ymin minimum and maximum values after the curves Zr Y maximum value Pick Ymax have been selected Instead of typing in 2
181. al optional float Output option string static Description Fast Fourier Transform Page J 79 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Output option string Generate magnitude magnitude phase or real imaginary one of magnitude phase real X axis interval float If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first optional Output option Scaling option either one or two Return type Curve object array or NULL Example Generate magnitude and phase curves and return a curve array Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first and scale using option two c_array Operate Fft m phase 0 0001 one mag_curve c_array 0 phase_curve c_array 1 Fir Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description FIR Filter Arguments X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate Fir m 0 0001 Hic Input Curve Curve Window float Acceleration factor float static Description HIC Calculation After calculating the HIC value for a curve the value can also be obtained from the curve using the Curve hic property In addition to th
182. alue of acceleration that is exceeded for a period of not less than 3 ms This is not an easily comprehended definition the following may be of more use At each time point T take the interval T to T 3ms 1 2 In this interval find the lowest acceleration value 3 The 3ms Clip value is the interval T to T 3ms which has the largest lowest value as calculated in 2 above So perhaps a better definition might be the 3ms interval with the highest lowest acceleration value E 3 Viscous Criteria The VC value is calculated from a compression time history using the following formula Page E 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 ve AlVeCol D where Cy B SID D ID D Y Dan Pent De Deal ECER9S regulations 7 12dt dD Va OHS regulations dt D Rib Compression A Constant 1 3 frontal 1 0 side B Constant 0 229 frontal 0 140 side E 4 Acceleration Severity Index The ASI value is calculated from 3 acceleration time histories using the following fomula 2 05 2 2 ASI Z xl yl zl Where ax ay az are the X Y Z accelerations of the vehicle for the 1998 calculation BS EN 1317 1 1998 they are averaged over a 50ms moving interval for the 2010 calculation BS EN 1317 1 2010 they are passed through a four pole phaseless Butterworth filter with a 13Hz cut off frequency xlyl zl are acceleration limits xl 12g yl 9g zl 10g The accelera
183. an be toggled between being active or inactive All the graphs can be activated using the All button or deactivated using the None button There is a popup menu attached to each button that can be used to select G1 G2 gt that graph Only Raise the graph so that it is in front of any others or to G1 G2 Only Delete the graph Raise When a graph is deleted any graphs with higher numbers are renumbered downwards to remove any gaps in the graph numbering Delete Graphs can also be activated deactivated using the button located af a F in the top left hand corner or each graph Plotting Display Page 3 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS The options in the Display and Title Axes menus that control the appearance of graphs are only applied to active graphs When new curves are created by reading in data from files the new curves are automatically unblanked in all of the currently active graphs and blanked in any inactive graphs Page 3 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page 3 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 4 Global Global Commands Commands and Pages MANUAL Toy 4 1 Page Number 4 2 PLOT 4 3 POINT 4 4 CLEAR EE Ho Page Number ad Il i gt i i 4 6 AUTOSCALE 4 7 CENTRE 4 8 MANUAL 4 9 STOP 4 10 TIDY 4 11 Additional Commands The following commands are to be found as buttons on the GLOBAL MENU panel The command line codes are given i
184. ant to continue if answer Window NO Message You pressed No Recompute Description Recomputes the positions of widgets in the window If you have static widgets and normal widgets in a window and you show and or hide widgets the window needs to be recomputed to refresh the graphics scroll bars etc Calling this method will recompute and redraw the window Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To recompute window w w Recompute Page J 138 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Redraw Description Redraws the window Sometimes if you show hide or draw graphics on widgets the window needs to be redrawn to refresh the graphics Calling this method will redraw the window refreshing the graphics Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To redraw window w w Redraw RightBorder static Description Returns the position of the right border in range 0 1 This can be used to help position windows on the screen Arguments No arguments Return type float in range 0 1 Example To obtain the position of the right border var b Window RightBorder Show modal optional boolean Description Shows maps the window and waits for user input Arguments modal boolean If this window is modal true then the user is blocked from doing anything else in T HIS optional until this window is dismissed If non m
185. anual Version 12 0 October 2014 1 Q oO pe oO fe et is oO ot gt oO S O Z gt da a S a 5 fes B n Qa Dn SF fes lt io a 5 lt a 2 te oo ID Curve ID or Group ID for curve groups Curve Label or Group Name Directory If the curve has been read in from a model then this will be the directory that all all the model files are in if the curve had been read in from a file cur csv then this will be the file location No information is displayed for curve groups Model File If the curve has been read in from a model then by default this will be the ID of the model If the curve had been read in from a file then this will be the filename No information is displayed for curve groups The entity type that the curve was generated from If the curve was read in from a file then this will display FILE ID of the item that the data was read from If the curve was read from a file then this will be the index within the file for each curve If the row represents more than one curve e g curve groups and the curves have different components then it will display Component Data component name If the row represents more than one curve e g curve groups and the curves have different components then it will display This will show the line colour style and width used to display the curve The table contents can also
186. ards T HIS tries to keep track of the units for each curves X and Y axis For every data component that T HIS can read from an LS DYNA results file one of the following basic units is stored for the curves X and Y axis Time Rotation Momentum Energy Density _ __ Energy Rotational Velocity ___ Density Mass Flow __ _ Work Rotational Acceleration Stress Frequency Temperature Length Dispacement 1 Strain Power D Area Velocity Volume Moment 2 Force per unit width Acceleration Mass Pressure 2 2_______Moment per unit width When a curve operation is carried out on curve which has either the X or Y axis unit defined the units for the output curve s are also calculated If acurve operation is carried out using 2 or more input curves with different units and the result is a curve with inconsistent units then the units are set to zero If one of the inputs is a constant then it assumed to be unitless Velocity m s Velocity m s Add Velocity m s Displacement m Add_ Unknown elocity m s Velocity m s elocity m s Displacement m Divide Frequency 1 s elocity m s PY ifferentiate Acceleration m s 2 D D A D D 5 22 1 Models By keeping track of the X and Y axis units for each curve T HIS can now convert results from one unit system to another For each model one of the following 6 unit systems can be defined Name Units u4 gm milli seconds us t slug seconds U6 m Tonnes sec
187. arguments Return type integer Example To return the total number of WidgetItems used for Widget w var total w Totalltens Widgetltems Description Returns an array of the Widgetltem objects used in this Widget or null if none used See also Widget ItemAt and Widget Totalltems Arguments No arguments Return type array Example To return Widgetltems used for Widget w var wi w WidgetItens Page J 125 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Widgetltem class The Widgetltem class allows you to create items for combobox Widgets More Widgetltem properties background constant Widget background colour Can be Widget BLACK Widget WHITE Widget RED Widget GREEN Widget BLUE Widget CYAN Widget MAGENTA Widget YELLOW Widget DARKRED Widget DARKGREEN Widget DARKBLUE Widget GREY Widget DARKGREY Widget LIGHTGREY or Widget DEFAULT foreground constant Widget foreground colour Can be Widget BLACK Widget WHITE Widget RED Widget GREEN Widget BLUE Widget CYAN Widget MAGENTA Widget YELLOW Widget DARKRED Widget DARKGREEN Widget DARKBLUE Widget GREY Widget DARKGREY Widget LIGHTGREY or Widget DEFAULT index read index The index of this widgetitem in the parent widget undefined if widgetitem is not assigned only to a widget onClick function Function to call when a widget item in a COMBOBOX or LISTBOX widget is clicked The Widgetitem object is accessible in
188. at Output Curve optional Curve static Description Translate a curve Arguments X translation value Y translation value Return type Curve object or NULL Example Translate curve m by x 0 2 y 0 3 and store as curve p p Operate Translate m 0 2 0 3 Tti Upper Rib Acceleration Curve Lower Rib Acceleration Curve T12 Acceleration Curve static Description Thorax Trauma Index Page J 98 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Upper Rib Acceleration Upper Rib Acceleration Curve Lower Rib Acceleration Lower Rib Acceleration Curve T12 Acceleration T12 Acceleration Curve Return type TTI value Example Calculate TTI using curves x y and z as inputs val Operate TTi x y 2Z Va Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert acceleration spectrum to a velocity spectrum Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m and store as curve p p Operate Av m Ve Input Curve Curve A float B float Calculation method string Output Curve optional Curve static Description Viscous Criteria calculate The VC calculation can be done using 2 different calculation methods ECER95 and IIHS Page J 99 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments B ftoat ConstamB Calculation method Either ECER95 o
189. at Y axis factor optional float static Description Curve Correlation function This function first normalises the curves using two factors either specified by the user or defaults calculated by the program the maximum absolute X and Y values of both graphs For each point on the first normalised curve the shortest distance to the second normalised curve is calculated The root mean square value of all these distances is subtracted from and then multiplied by 100 to get an index between 0 and 100 The process is repeated along the second curve and the two indices are averaged to get a final index The higher the index the closer the correlation between the two curves Note that the choice of normalising factors is important Incorrect factors may lead to a correlation index outside the range of 0 to 100 Arguments X axis factor optional Normalising factor used for X axis values Y axis factor optional Normalising factor used for Y axis values Return type Correlation value Example Calculate the correlation between curves m and n using the default normalising factors val Operate Cor3 m n Calculate the correlation between curves m and n using 0 1 and 1000 0 as the X and Y normalising factors val Operate Cor3 m n 0 1 1000 Cos Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Cosine Page J 74 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Return
190. at often occur in large organisations with many users e Large organisations generally imply large networks and it is often the case that the performance of these networks can be intermittent or poor therefore it is common practice to perform an installation of the software on the local disk of each machine rather then having a single installation on a remote disk This avoids the pauses and glitches that can occur when running executable files over a network but it also means that all the configuration files in or depending upon the top level Admin directory have to be copied to all machines and more to the point any changes or additions to such files also have to be copied to all machines e In larger organisations the one person per computer philosophy may not apply with the consequence that users will tend to have a floating home area on a network drive and may not use the same machine every day This is not usually a problem on Linux where the home directory is tied to the login name not the machine However on Windows platforms it means that 7 USERPROFILE which is typically on the local C drive of a machine is not a good place to consider as home since it will be tied to a given computer therefore a user who saves a file in his home directory on machine A may not be able to access it from machine B e Ina similar vein placing large temporary files on the tmp partition Linux or the C drive Windows may result in local disk
191. ation in this file to match up the ID s and work out the type of each item in the DCFAIL file If the SWFORC file isn t present then it attempts to use the data in the ZTF file to work out the types Page A 25 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 A 23 SPC Data Components For SPC s the following data components are available I Jeomponen SIF aD Ber Gao SDA now Jascn Fr ferne u em rose Magnide S je my Momentiny yes yes bez Momsntinz Jes IMM Moment Mtagmde of yes ies A 24 Boundary Condition Data Components For SPC s the following data components are available OT Comon Foo gas nan RTF san USDA Gino fasen For Pressure and Force Boundary conditions the following components are available FX AppliedX Force yes he 1 FY Applied Fore he esd Applied zZrowe sCi es es R Applied Resultant force i es es N Energy from applied force yes yes For Nodal Velocity Boundary conditions the following components are available x Boundary condition motion X Force as yes yes Y Boundary condition motion Y Force a yes yes FZ Boundary condition motion Z Force yes yes For Rigid Body Velocity Boundary conditions the following components are available Ex Boundary condition motion X Foree fen es FY Boundary condition motion Y Foree es lyc Fz Boundary condition moton Z Foree cs bes PR Resultant Boundary condition morion moror es ies EN nergy from Boundary con
192. ation of the menu interface Again it will not affect displayed graphics Left Handed The software uses mouse buttons and keyboard meta settings keys lt shift gt amp lt control gt in a handed way that is set up by default for right handed use It is possible to configure either or both for left handed use Save Settings Once you have adjusted the above to your taste you can save these settings in your oa_pref file for future use with the Save_Settings button If you do not save settings they will be lost when this session exits Page 6 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 6 1 8 Quick Pick Blank Functions gt Blank gt The Quick Pick menu can be used to perform many common curve operations using just the mouse The Unblank current Quick Pick mode is displayed on the tool bar and can be changed using the popup menu Only The current Quick Pick option can be applied to a Delete single curve by selecting the curve using the left mouse Properties button Multiple curves can be selected by holding down P the left mouse button and dragging out an area History Some functions can be undone using the middle mouse Edit button i Edit Labels Colour Line Width gt Line Style m Symbol r 6 1 8 1 Functions Functions Automotive Output 1st Free 7 FF FF F F This option can be used to select any of the curve operations see Sections 5 9
193. ation score is given as a percentage two identical curves would score 100 The first two measures require identification of peaks in the curves An unlimited number of peaks in each curve will be considered A peak is defined as a local maximum or in the case of negative y values a minimum satisfying the following criteria e Absolute y value at least 0 5 e Separated from any larger peak by a trough local minimum at least 0 2 deep Peaks of positive or negative signs are considered Peaks are matched only against peaks of the same sign in the other curve Measure 1 Peak values For each identified peak in Curve A find the maximum value in Curve B within the same time range for which the value in Curve A is within a tolerance of the peak value Points are lost according to the error in y values compared to a tolerance limit Repeat for peaks in curve B against values in Curve A This measure allows for the situation where curves are similar but the peaks are more strongly delineated in one of the curves such that the program does not recognise the other curve as having a peak in that location Measure 2 Peak matching For each identified peak in Curve A find the closest identified peak in Curve B Points are lost according to the largest error timing or y value compared to tolerance limits points are also lost if there is no corresponding peak in Curve B Repeat for Curve A peaks matched against those of Curve B Page F 1
194. ations are driven with the left mouse button with the following exceptions a Text in the dialogue area and text boxes requires keyboard entry b Text strings saved in the cursor cut buffer may be pasted into dialogue areas and text boxes using the middle mouse button The primitive widgets in the menu interface are used as follows BUTTONS Screen buttons are depressed by clicking on them but DISMISS APPLY HELP action only takes place when the mouse button is released so it is safe to drag the depressed mouse around tie sereen The following checkpoint file s have been found Page 2 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Buttons may also be greyed out to indicate that the option is not currently available Buttons with after them will usually invoke sub menus Popup window invocation Buttons with an gt symbol may be A selected normally with the left mouse button but if the right mouse Cine Label T Line Label button is depressed over them it will invoke a popup window Holding the right mouse button down move the cursor into this Axis Label window to make a selection or move elsewhere and release the button to deactivate the popup Y Axis Label Title SLIDERS 1 Point Number 1000 ee Sliders are moved by clicking on the slider button r itself and then dragging it to a new position They 783 may also be moved automatically by clicking on and holding down
195. axis values Page J 83 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Natural Log of X axis values for curve m and store as curve p p Operate Logx m Lsq Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Least Squares Fit for a curve Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Example To calculate Least Squares Fit for curve m and store as curve p p Operate Lsq m Map 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Map Y axis values from one curve onto another curve Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 84 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To map curve n onto curve m and store as curve p p Operate Map m n Max Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve static Description Maximum of a group of curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Maximum of curves stored in curve array x p Operate Max x Min Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve static Description Minimum of a group of curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Minimum of curves stored in curve array x p Operate Min x Mon Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Sort a curve into
196. ay be turned on and off by toggling the ON OFF button lt automatic gt IV Automatic W Display Title Font Helvetica Bold r _ User Defined Size 8 point x Colour Foreground Page 5 87 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 15 2 X AXIS C Title X Axis Y Axis Y2 Axis Legend AXIS LABELS Label lt automatic gt The x axis label may be set automatically v Automatic H User Defined or a user defined label can be specified When the AUTOMATIC option is selected v Display Label the text box will display lt X Ba Sarre automatic gt and the axis label will be v Add Units lt automatic gt set to the x axis label of the first curve that is currently being plotted The axis label v Automatic z User Defined may be turned on and off by toggling the Display Label button Font Default Y In addition to displaying the axis labels an size Automatic T optional unit label can also be appended to the axis label If the option to add a unit Colour Foreground y label is set to Automatic then the unit label displayed will depend on the current curves Minimum lt auto gt v Autoscale that are visible and the current unit system being used to display results see Section Hj Locked 5 22 for more information on Unit Systems If the curves being displayed do not have Maximum lt auto gt v Autoscale the same axis unit then no unit label will be displayed The unit label may be turned on E Locked and
197. ayed on the screen Batch mode is available on all platforms To start T HIS in batch mode use the command line option batch e g thisl0 exe tcf script inp batch When running in batch mode T HIS will automatically exit at the end of the script regardless of whether or not exit is specified NOTE All image postscript and PDF outputs require a DISPLAY on UNIX LINUX systems If you are running T HIS in batch mode as part of a automatic post processing script then T HIS must have a X Windows DISPLAY even though the main window is not displayed If the machine you are using is a server or part of a cluster without an X Server then T HIS can be used with the Xvfb software 1 2 3 Selecting a device when a window manager is not running If you are running on a non window device for example a Tektronix display or emulator you may not be able to use screen menus Instead you will have to run in command line mode It is very unlikely that a user on a modern workstation will see these options since the machine will have a window manager and will be running in screen menu mode If they do appear it suggests that the machine and or software are wrongly set up see 1 2 4 below for suggested remedies 1 2 4 If T HIS will not start in screen menu mode You may be running on a device with a window manager but still only get the command line prompt and probably no menu driven _93 shell either This is almost certainly because o
198. below and the Widget class for more details Constructor new Window title string left float right float bottom float top float Description Create a new Window object Arguments Window title to show in title bar left coordinate of window in range 0 0 left to 1 0 right right coordinate of window in range 0 0 left to 1 0 right bottom coordinate of window in range 0 0 bottom to 1 0 top top coordinate of window in range 0 0 bottom to 1 0 top Return type Window object Example To create a Window Example in the top right half of the screen var w new Window Example 0 5 1 0 0 5 1 0 Page J 131 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Details of functions BottomBorder static Description Returns the position of the bottom border in range 0 1 This can be used to help position windows on the screen Arguments No arguments Return type float in range 0 1 Example To obtain the position of the bottom border var b Window BottomBorder Delete Description Deletes the window from T HIS and returns any memory resources used for the window This function should not normally need to be called However in exceptional circumstances if a script recreates windows many times T HIS may run out of USER objects on Microsoft Windows because of the way T HIS creates and shows windows To avoid this problem this method can be used to force T HIS to return the resourc
199. ber of colours are available for Widget images Black and white images will display without any issues but colour images will be displayed with a reduced set of colours Page J 120 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Image file BMP GIF JPEG or PNG to read To remove an image use null optional Widget CENTRE and Widget TOP Widget MIDDLE or Widget BOTTOM If omitted the default is Widget CENTREI Widget MIDDLE justify Widget justification Can be a bitwise or of Widget LEFT Widget RIGHT or Return type no return value Example To read image example png for widget w and place it at the top left w ReadImageFile example png Widget TOP Widget LEFT To remove an image from widget w w ReadImageFile null ReadImageString string string justify optional constant Description Reads an image from a JavaScript string previously created by Widget DumpImageString to show on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets The image will be shown on the widget underneath any text Note that due to the way that colours are used for menus in T HIS only a small number of colours are available for Widget images Black and white images will display without any issues but colour images will be displayed with a reduced set of colours Arguments String containing the image data previously created by Widget DumpImageString To remove an image use null justify con
200. bottom surface values are extrapolated to nodes 1 4 and the top surface values are extrapolated to nodes 5 8 e g shell 99 stress xx node 3 read x stress for shell 99 middle surface extrapolated to node 3 shell 99 stress xx surface 5 node 1 tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 layer 5 extrapolated to node 1 tshell 99 stress xx node 7 tag curve 1 read x stress for thick shell 99 top surface extrapolated to node 7 solid 99 stress xx node 4 tag curve 1 read x stress for solid 99 extrapolated to node4 Page 7 13 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 4 5 Data extraction reference table Data type Keyword Second word Air Airbag id ab_part Airbag id Part id prjessure ressure af av un blocked elmperature Airbag Sensors ab_sensor Sensor id CPM_SENSOR prjessure te mp I ourth word DOJL oO CE e y l ZZ PF y yY E u 22 en 3 lt lt C H lt IXx coord coord Velocity Velocity Velocity elocity Magnitute ressure N olo I O Page 7 14 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Beam id Boundary id T HIS xial force oment in Y orsional moment ending energy end 1 ending energy end 2 orsional rotation Bending moment end 1 Bending moment end 2 Bending moment end 1 Bending moment end 2 ial collapse energy nternal energy ial stress Y Shear stress X Shear stress ffective plastic strain xia
201. ck Shell Data Components For thick shells the following data components are available I Jeomponent IF asman AT Gato ESDA ino ASCH Stress components xx enna p Sides id syy Swesinyy ves O E sz sesnz yes lives ug sxy sesno be E syz sresnyz he id Tg sx esn be ves smx Maximam Principal Sues ys e MS Maximum Shear Stress tyes yes VM Von Mises Stress V es A Strain components eyy Swanminyy yes W EEE ezz svinn he E exv stnininxy he E Tu eyz sinn Sys eze saiminz fo i Tg EMX Maximum Principal Strain Is yes EmN Minimum Principal Stain yes EEE Page A 13 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 EVM VonMises Suain ies De AV Average Sain yes yes No Extra components Frequency Domain Analysis For a steady state dynamic analysis SSD the following nodal data components are available For each data component both amplitude and phase angle data components are available Le ee ee d3thdt x sn EE vy __ swessiny es jB szz____ swessinzz E rl so fes S e e sz snz e C S bes For a random vibration analysis PSD the following nodal data components are available Component THF XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCH d3thdt Stress components xx sewn cs a He sz fnr 52 suesinzx o A 8 1 THF d3thdt File Stress Stress tensors are in the global cartesian system unless the option to use material axes has been invoked fo
202. constant If two curves are being multiplied together they must have identical x axis values Multiply the x axis values together for two curves or multiply all the x values by a constant If two curves are being multiplied together they must have identical y axis values Normalize a curve so that the y axis values lie in the range 1 1 Normalize a curve so that the x axis values lie in the range 1 1 Reverse the order of all the points in the curve Produces the reciprocal of the y values of a curve Calculate the vector magnitude from a group of input curves Page 5 69 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 9 26 REV 5 9 27 R AVE 5 9 29 SQR 5 9 30 STRESS 5 9 31 SUB 5 9 32 SUX 5 9 33 SUM 5 9 34 TRA 5 9 35 VEC 5 9 36 VEC 2 D Page 5 70 Reverses the x and y axes of a curve For example if you start with a curve with displacement y axis against time x axis you end up with a curve of time y axis against displacement x axis Produces a single curve of N the running average on the ooo Averaging Window input curve If the time window is set to 0 then the y values for the output curve are the average value of all the point up to that point If the time window is non zero T then the y values at each point are calculated by averaging the values between T 2 and T 2 A moving average technique is used to smooth A filter a curve The user wil
203. constants Curve AFTER Insertion of curve data option AddPoint xvalue real yvalue real AddToGraph graph graph int ClearFlag flag integer DeletePoint ipt integer Flagged flag integer GetPoint row integer InsertPoint ipt integer xvalue real yvalue real position integer Next Previous RemoveFromGraph graph graph int SetFlag flag integer SetPoint ipt integer xvalue real yvalue real Update Curve BEFORE Insertion of curve data option Curve properties The The colour of the curve 00 OE of the curve Page J 13 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 fix eS ey _ funn me mbar O UUO End of 3ms clip time windows returns 0 0 if the 3ms Clip hasn t been calculated read only Start of 3ms clip time windows returns 0 0 if the 3ms Clip hasn t been calculated read only sen Cum nen LineWidth The line width used to draw the curve je e i Detailed Description mm A jet 5 a In lt a oO B n Dn et oO mm A The Curve class allows you to create modify edit and manipulate curves See the documentation below for more details Constructor new Curve Icid integer tag optional string Line label optional string X axis label optional string Y axis label optional string Description Create a new Curve object The curve will be added to all the currently active graphs Page J 14 U
204. create textboxes to type passwords in TextBox Widgets only timerDelay integer Delay in ms before the function set for onTimer will be called The initial value is 1000 ms Also see timerRepeat timerRepeat logical If the function set for onTimer will be called once false or repeatedly true The initial value is false Also see timerDelay If widget can be toggled true or not false This only affects Widget BUTTON widgets window read Window object The Window that this widget is defined in only xResolution integer X resolution of button when drawing lines circles polygons and rectangles initially 100 X coordinates on the Widget can be from 0 on the left Tel of th the widget to xResolution on the right of the widget Available for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON Widgets yResolution integer Y resolution of button when drawing lines circles polygons and rectangles initially 100 Y coordinates on the Widget can be from 0 on the top of the widget to yResolution on the bottom of the widget Available for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON Widgets Page J 113 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Detailed Description The Widget class allows you to create Widgets buttons textboxes etc in a Window for a graphical user interface Callback functions can be declared for widgets to give actions when a button is pressed or the text in a textbox is selected etc The following example displays various widgets
205. cript will start If you have not defined any breakpoints then the script will run until it finishes unless there are some script errors or exceptions If there is a breakpoint then the debugger will stop execution of the script when it reaches it If the script is running and you want to pause execution of the script at any time you can press Interrupt Page M 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS dale Harinen Debugger all allocale_mines cal clicked changed check_cel panim CH LO Pf Check dor ane f ar draw frien i7 cal IE markets eared mare Are Fami i EE oc Lid ioc al nas jmina a 11 131 blat gare fiintei je 1a 118 function allecate mines mans minaweweper ja Be 113 4 E n war n mises 115 Er DT Li6 while in _ 117 i mingswonper jel 14 113 VAr pos Harh roundjHach floor rors rols Hath random i 119 is pa sa 0 gg pom rama hsd le 120 i 121 if eelle po mine false i rn igs Mine evasenplanclide taetiminareaaper ja The line that the debugger has paused the script on is shown by a green triangle In the above example it is paused at line 114 The middle panel on the left shows the call stack See the call stack section below for more details Stepping and continuing Once the script is paused in the debugger you can step through the source code by using the Continue Next Step and Finish buttons Continue will resume exec
206. cted entities M2 Part 3 BOLSTER SOLIDS 3 Clicking on the first item to be selected and then dragging M1 Part 54 UPPER TUBE down the list of items without letting go of the mouse button M2 Part 54 UPPER TUBE Entities can be sorted in four ways 11 Part 69 RIDEDOWN SPRING M2 Part 69 Sort by model will list all entities in the lowest M1 Part 70 number model in order of ascending ID number then all entities in the next lowest model and then move through the rest of the models in ascending order M2 Part 1000 WIN Sort by ID will list all entities in ascending order showing the model ID for each entity Common IDs will list only the entities with IDs that are common to all models without showing the model ID s Sort by Name arranges the entities in alphabetical order based on their names Page 5 16 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 1 7 Surfaces Integration Select Models New Model ad Model Points Output curve Age Some BEAM SHELL and THICKSHELL data Key in Apply components can be read from multiple integration points lt Go Back Entities KK If a data component is available for multiple Select Surfaces Sort By Model y integration points then an additional Select Select S Surface options is displayed SMN SMS Select Surface Reread Model This option will display a separate menu listing all of the integration points that are available
207. ction for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY ZOOM_UP_ VE shift Right mouse IROTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N D trl Left mouse OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE dv_left_ctrl string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY IROTATION_XYZ D dv_middle_ctrl string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY RANSLATION i OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N dv_right_ctrl string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY ZZOOM_UP_ VE trl Right mouse OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE N RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE IN dv_middle_both string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY RANSLATION shift ctrl Middle OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE dv_left_both string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY IROTATION_XYZ shift ctrl Left OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP VE N D dv_right_both string gt Dyn view action for ROTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY ZOOM_UP_ VE shift ctrl Right OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE ZOOM string gt Dynamic viewing URRENT WIREFRAME URRENT mode for shift FREE_EDGE UNUSED mouse puton dv_ctrl_action string gt Dynamic viewing URRENT WIREFRAME IREFRAME mode for ctrl FREE_EDGE UNUSED mouse DUTTON dv_both_action string gt Dynamic viewing URRENT WIREFRAME IFREE_EDGE mode for shift ctrl FREE_EDGE UNUSED mouse DULON font_scaling lo
208. ctober 2014 white dependent on curve blue ellow orange turquoise indigo ink 7 12 1 3 Line Width s word options default fine normal normal bold 7 12 1 4 Line Symbols triange dependent on curve word options default ourglass ircle equencylfrequency number 7 12 2 Setting Curve Styles by Model From version 11 onwards a new option can be used to colour all of the curves belonging to a model in a single operation ptior keyword second word following words style_m___ model number _ style options The available style options are exactly the same as for the stylec command see section 7 12 1 e g style m 2 solid green norm model number 2 style to apply would set all the curves belonging to model 2 to solid green lines using the default line thickness 7 12 3 Plot setup n keyword following words setup plot setup words These options set the appearance of any plots that are created afterwards They are to do with the general appearance of Page 7 40 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS the plot rather than the curve itself The curve appearances can be set up with the style definition line and on the image plotting line All following words must be on the same line If the on or off is missed out from the following word where applicable then FAST TCF will take the opposite to the default this helps with backwards compatibility issues but can
209. ctrl gt lt right mouse gt 3D Mouse Tuning Rotn factor 1 00 Pan factor 1 00 Zoom factor 1 00 __ MENU_AUTO_CONFIRM affects this session only setting is not saved Page 6 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Display Factor Lies in the range 0 5 to 2 0 default 1 0 Values lt 1 0 reduce the apparent size of the screen so that menus and text become larger Values gt 1 0 act in the opposite sense This is the simplest way of taking into account the display size Font Size Font typeface Sets the font size independently of the display scale face which can be useful on Helvetica Normal wide screen displays The font typeface can also be changed Helvetica Bold Times Normal Times Bold Courier Normal Courier Bold Font scaling By default text in menu interface buttons can be scaled downwards to a smaller font size if one exists if it is too long for the button This shows more characters but it can look messy when the user interface has a mixture of font sizes Turning font scaling off prevents this happening giving a more consistent appearance However it is generally better to adjust the Display Factor in order to find a menu scale that gives consistent font sizes Brightness Lies in the range 0 0 to 1 0 default 1 0 Controls the brightness of the menu interface only it will not affect displayed graphics Saturation Lies in the range 0 0 to 1 0 default 1 0 Controls the colour satur
210. curve c from all graphs c RemoveFromGraph Select flag integer prompt string modal optional boolean static Description Allows the user to select curves Arguments Flag to use when selecting curves Text to display as a prompt to the user modal boolean If selection is modal blocks the user from doing anything else in T HIS until this window is optional dismissed If omitted the selection will be modal Return type Number of items selected or null if menu cancelled Example To select curves flagging those selected which flag f giving the prompt Select curves Curve Select f Select curves Page J 23 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 SetFlag flag integer Description Sets a flag on the curve Arguments Flag to set on the curve Return type No return value Example To set flag f for curve 1 1 SetFlag f SetPoint ipt integer xvalue real yvalue real Description Sets the x and y values for a specified point in a curve Arguments The point to set the data for The x value of the point The y value of the point Return type No return value Example To set the values for the 3rd point to x 3 y 5 for curve 1 1 SetPoint 3 3 5 UnflagAll flag integer static Description Unsets a defined flag on all of the curves Arguments Flag to unset on the curves Page J 24 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS
211. d gt D ata source for global data LSDA ASCII TH none a A none A none A none The following strings and values control axes title and legend formatting for graphs Preference Type Description Valid arguments Default file_size fstring gt font size for B 10 12 14 18 24 Default Default itle_font Pe elvetica_Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium ourier_Bold Times _ Medium Times_bold Default Page H 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS itle_colour string gt Colour of itle FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE FOREGROUND YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_ 2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL 1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL 8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 X axis labe axis label x_label_colour Helvetica_ Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium string gt Colour of X FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE axis label YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE DIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GRE
212. d minimum values of the group of input E N y curves Page 5 68 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 9 12 ERR This option reports the degree of correlation between 2 input curves The first curve selected is used as a reference curve and the following parameters are then reported Maximum difference Value amp Time Value as a age of reference curve Value as a age of reference curve peak value Average difference Value age of reference curve peak value Area Weighted Difference Correlation Parameter 0 to 1 For more details on this function please see Appendix G 5 9 1 3 INT A curve is numerically integrated with respect to the x axis variable using Simpson s rule 5 9 14 LSQ 5 9 15 MAP 5 9 16 MAX Fits a straight line through the points using the least squares method The second curve is mapped onto the first curve the resulting curve has identical x axis values to the reference first curve with y axis values obtained from the mapped second curve Produces a single curve that bounds the maximum values of the group of input curves 5 9 1 7 Mi N Produces a single curve that bounds the minimum values of the group of input curves 5 9 18 MON 5 9 19 MUL 5 9 20 MUX 9 9 21 NOR 9 9 22 NOX 9 9 23 ORDER 5 9 24 REC 9 9 25 RES Sorts a curve into monotonically increasing x axis values Multiply the y axis values together for two curves or multiply all the y values by a
213. d outline shows you the new shape or Use the MAXIMISE button Zi in the top right hand corner of the window to increase the size of the window to the largest possible size Page 2 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS If a window has got too small for its contents then horizontal and or vertical scrollbars will appear To scroll a Click on a scrollbar slider and move it to the desired position the window contents will scroll as you window do so Alternatively click on the arrows at either end of the scrollbar for timed motion in that direction To minimise Click on the button Jin the top right hand corner of the window When a window has been iconised a window it will appear in the ICON area at the bottom of the screen Torestorea Iconised windows may be restored by clicking on the icon in the ICON area window 2 5 Dynamic Viewing Using the mouse to change views Dynamic viewing is the name given to the process in which you perform viewing transformations by moving the mouse around the screen Shit Control Dynamic viewing 2 5 1 Dynamic Translation Dynamic translation uses lt mid mouse gt lt left shift gt The cursor symbol is yellow and looks like The relationship between mouse and image motion is intuitive the object tracks the mouse motion in the screen XY plane The initial position of the mouse is irrelevant Page 2 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014
214. dd Exponent to Label Format Automatic y Axis values can be displayed using 3 different Decimal Places 3 fe formats Y Font Default y Automatic Size Automatic x Values are displayed using exponential Colour Foreground format all values are T displayed as values of EO E3 E6 etc e g 11 234E 03 Scientific Values are displayed using exponential format e g 1 123E 04 1 000e 04 General 9 000e 03 Values are displayed as real numbers 10000 000 8 000e 03 e g 11234 000 9000 000 7 000e 03 In addition to specifying the format the number of decimal places can also be set between 0 and 9 and the colour and font used to display the values can be set 8000 000 6 000e 03 7000 000 5 000e 03 6000 000 4 000e 03 5000 000 3 000e 03 4000 000 2 000e 03 3000 000 1 000e 03 2000 000 0 000e 00 Automatic 0 000 1000 000 0 000 0 000 0 1 Scientific General Page 5 89 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 15 3 Y AXIS The same options for LABELS LIMITS SCALE GRID LINES and UNITS apply to the Y AXIS as those available for the X_AXIS 5 15 4 Second Y AXIS Curves can be plotted in T HIS using 2 different y axis scales When DOUBLE Y AXIS is selected using the check box in the Y2 Axis menu the curve management window changes from to wi
215. dition motion M cs bes mx Boundary condition motion X Moment yes ies MY Boundary condition motion Y Moment yes ies MZ Boundary condition motion Moment f es yes Mm Boundary condition moment Magninds bes esd A 25 FSI Data Components For Fluid structural interactions the following data components are available Page A 26 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Component mar d3thdt XT xtfile LSDA binout ASC Bm im msn ec jap er Se rn DO a a a rn ron Magniade ME pr Porousteakage S a Tr Lex Leakage x Force Vi LFY Leakage X Fore J a FZ Leakage X Force a LEM Leakage Force Magnitude a fk K Coordinate of Sensor N v vco orin of Sensor es z co oninat of senor A lt SS lll so cpiasona sides e Fremperurest enser ie A 26 SPH Data Components X Y Z M L MF LFX LFY LFZ LFM TE X Y O TE yes yes yes yes yes yes For SPH s the following data components are available Component mar casthat XT xtfile LDA binout JASCH Di O Eyy _ staininyy es ds ez _ stainin2z SS bes ides EXY _ Staininxy VG yes Erz Sim inyz D yes ezx_ staininzx je des rs ___ efecve sues Ge sxx stesinxx Ses ies sy stesinyy Si es des szz stesinzz El sr stesinxy je des syz stessin v2 es des szx__ stessinzx S es ies sm __ smootingiong MMMM bes A 27 TRACER Data Components E XX YY ZZ XY YZ ZX FS X
216. ds are APPLY DISMISS unlikely to be of use to most users you can list all valid events using button to provide a menu to pick from The ANY button may be used for any field to restore it to its default wildcard status Search Specification Box name Ki BHH 5 7 6 Command Line Mode Session Command File Control The available features in command line mode for command and session file control are very basic A session file can recorded at any point by typing SF in the GLOBAL MENU followed by the desired filename This is equivalent to the RECORD button in screen menu mode The session file can be closed by typing CS and is automatically written to disk This is equivalent to pressing the STOP and SAVE TO DISK buttons in screen menu mode To execute an existing command file in T HIS simply type CF followed by the filename No previewing reviewing or editing of command session files is possible in command line mode 5 7 7 Command Files From Earlier Versions Of T HIS Command files recorded in Version 9 0 or earlier will not work in T HIS 9 4 Page 5 61 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 8 IMAGE Options Images ax BMP JPEG Postscript PDF Background 5 8 1 BMP JPEG BMP JPEG Postscript PDF Background This menu can be used to save an image containing one or more graphs in a Capture All Pages Current Page Only Page 1 WV All Graphs _ All Active Graphs _ Only Graph _ White B
217. ds to the keyword deck e The main Primer checks are if the line syntax is valid whether the correct file is being outputted whether the relevant DATABASE_HISTORY is present and whether the id actually exists e Any errors will have to be corrected manually in Primer NOTE If FAST TCF has completed then it may be necessary to open the input_file output file which has the all the output files concatenated together in different sections Page 7 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 1 5 Creating FAST TCF files The most obvious option is to generate a FAST TCE script using a text editor such as vim or wordpad However an easier option is to use T HIS as normal then generate a FAST TCE script to recreate the curves currently displayed on the screen from within T HIS It involves a single button click to produce a FAST TCE script that can recreate the plot on the screen T HIS internally stores the history behind each curve noting which curves operations and data requests were used to create each curve This means that the user does not have to start recording a command file and carefully record a script Instead the user can work for as long as they like as normal then choose to generate a FAST TCE script to recreate the plot on the screen by using the FAST TCF gt Create menu By default the FAST TCF script that is generated will contain commands to reproduce all of the graphs that are currently defin
218. e pr ir Dispiacomen Jes yes DZ 2 Displacement A on Displacement Magnitude yes ies Wx vo Ses ies vo o fva O ies vz ___ zVelosty A es van Velo manna Si pes ies AX a AY Acceleration Sd pes es AZ Acceleraion EV bes am acoseraionMagniude yes hes ex XCoardiate Sd pes ies ley rcon Ses ifs ez ori SS es ies RX feromon je ifs Br Ronny RZ feromon es ies pm Romson Magniude es ies RVX Rotational veen pes ies IRVY Rotational veiociy De ies RVZ 2 Rotational Velocity pes ies kym Rotational Velocity Magnas _ pes ies Rax eroitionstAczelersion ge hy kay Y Rotational Acceleration _ pes ies RAZ 2 Rotational Acceleration _ pes ies RAM Rotational Acceleration Mammas pes ies Du Pieco Cosine pes 12 Direction Cosine 2d bes jr 1s Direction Cosine 1a es jr pba JDinstioncosines eves p22 Dintioncosine22 es Das Diesioncosiness ME 031 Diecion Cosmesi es 22 Diesion Cosine 22 S Dss Dinstioncosness je DE DX fiocax Displacement De yes DY fiocaY Displacement S ies koz JbocaiZ Displacement bes ies Page A 24 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS LRX Local X Rottion EEG yes RY Local YRotaion lt A es bes RZ local ZRoation i pes ies Eev oval X Rotational Veooiy es es ievr oval Y Rotational Velocity yes ies LRVZ lovalZRoational Vetoty _ pes ies LRAX Local Rotational Acceleration pes yes
219. e but the two refinements described in Appendix D to minimise end effects and phase change errors are not included 5 11 7 FIR Special filter for US SID dummy Page 5 73 T HIS 5 11 8 HIC Page 5 74 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Calculates the s k Head Impact Time Window s Criteria from m an Accel convertion factor Anni acceleration time history Show HIC value v The user is rompted for epee 5 z the time Write To Screen Write To File window and the File default hic acceleration conversion factor Normally this option writes the HIC value to the screen If required the values may also be written out to a file using the WRITE TO FILE option The time unit for the input curve should be seconds T HIS look at the range of the x axis values and if the range is gt 1 then T HIS will assume the x axis values are in ms and it will automatically divide the x axis values by 1000 If the y axis values are not in G then an optional factor can be specified that T HIS will DIVIDE the y axis values by to convert them to G Example factors for different units are Unit Factor m s2 9 81 mm s 9810 mm ms 0 00981 In addition to calculating and reporting the HIC value the time window and value can be displayed on the graph using the Show HIC Value option See Appendix E for more details on the Head Impact Criteria calculation Acceleration Time Acc mag node 1345
220. e HIC value the start and end time for the time window can also be obtained using the Curve hic_tmin and Curve hic_tmax properties Page J 80 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Window Maximum time window Acceleration factor Factor required to divide input acceleration curve by to convert to G Return type HIC value Example Calculate HIC for curve m using a window of 0 036s and a factor of 9810 val Operate Hic m 0 036 9810 0 Hicd Input Curve Curve Window float Acceleration factor float static Description Modified HIC d Calculation for free motion headform After calculating the HIC value for a curve the value can also be obtained from the curve using the Curve hicd property In addition to the HIC d value the start and end time for the time window can also be obtained using the Curve hicd_tmin and Curve hicd_tmax properties Arguments Acceleration factor Factor required to divide input acceleration curve by to convert to G Return type HIC d value Example Calculate HIC d for curve m using a window of 0 036s and a factor of 9810 val Operate Hicd m 0 036 9810 0 Ifft 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve Input type string static Description Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Page J 81 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Ist Curve Input type Specifies if inputs are magnitude phase or real imaginary
221. e Widgetltems in a ListBox Widget can be selected When the user selects a Widgetltem the selection is cleared and the new Widgetltem selected However if the user presses the Ctrl key when clicking on a Widgetltem the clicked WidgetItem gets toggled and all other Widgetltems are left untouched If the user presses the Shift key while clicking on a Widgetltem all WidgetItems between the last selected WidgetItem and the clicked Widgetltem are selected or unselected depending on the state of the clicked Widgetltem Widget SELECT_MULTIPLE Multiple Widgetltems in a ListBox Widget can be selected When the user selects a Widgetltem the selection status of that Widgetltem is toggled and the other Widgetltems are left alone Widget SELECT_NONE No Widgetltem in a ListBox Widget can be selected Widget SELECT_SINGLE A single Widgetltem in a ListBox Widget can be selected When the user selects a Widgetltem any already selected Widgetltem becomes unselected and the user cannot unselect the selected Widgetltem by clicking on it Constants for Colour Widget DEFAULT Widget GREEN Widget GREY Widget LIGHTGREY Colour light grey Widget MAGENTA Colour magenta Wigs RED Widget WHITE Colour white Widget YELLOW Colour yellow Widget properties If widget is active true or disabled false Widget DARKGREY Widget LIGHTGREY Widget ORANGE Widget DEFAULT background constant Widget background colour Can be Widget BLACK Wid
222. e and change the background colour for i 1 i lt 100 i var wi new WidgetItem ci Item 1 if i 10 5 wi selectable wi background false Widget WHITE var e new Widget w Widget BUTTON 1 21 15 21 Exit Assign callbacks b onClick clicked cb onChange changed ci onClick clicked ci onChange changed e onClick confirm_exit Show the window and start event loop w Show LITE IT LAAT EHESTEN TEL TAAAT TAT AEA CET IATA TAAL function clicked I combobox is clicked then print the current selection if this selectedItem Message selection is currently this selectedItem text i CCCI MEE FATE GAME MGI MCI gh Aina EAD function changed Tf combobox selection is changed then print the new selection if this selectedItem Message selection is now this selectedItem text III IIIIIEIIIIIIIIIITI TATA TTT TT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT ATT TTT TTT TTT TTT function confirm exit Map confirm box var ret Window Question Confirm exit Are you sure you want to quit Tf the user has answered yes then exit from the script if ret Window YES Exit See the documentation below and the Window and Widget classes for more details Page J 127 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Constructor new Widgetltem widget Widget text string selectable optional boolean Description Create a new Widgetltem objec
223. e being played back in effect it is possible to edit and combine files Page 5 59 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 7 2 Executing Playing Back Command Files As above the PLAYBACK COMMAND FILES menu shown right must be invoked from the COMMAND SESSION FILES window This is done by pressing the playback CONTROLS button An existing file must then be read This is analogous to loading a tape into the tape recorder it is then converted into an internal scratch format random access as above and can be played back of previewed at will Once a file is read in either PLAYBACK or PREVIEW mode may be selected PLAYBACK actually executes the commands PREVIEW simply lists them without executing them The file may be stepped through backwards or forwards at will and searches made for commands Playback commences at the current line when PLAY is pressed so it is possible to skip unwanted commands or repeat a sequence As with RECORD above index marks can be inserted which may be used as targets of a search and also to stop playback Page 5 60 Command Session Files ax Playback Record Playback Pause Resume Record Resume Filename and mode File era C REREAD FILE _ Preview mode DELETE FILE Playback mode File position and control lt lt SEARCH PLAY gt SEARCH gt gt lt STEP STOP STEP gt SPEED Current command status i TOP
224. e code name and the preference string For example primer maximise true Normal case using means an unlocked preference Page L 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS primer maximise true Locked case using These changes may be made either by editing the file manually or by using the preferences editor Page L 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page L 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS JaDe The JavaScript debugger JaDe is included in D3PLOT PRIMER and T HIS to help debug and develop JavaScripts It is started by selecting a script and pressing the Debug button in the JavaScript menu in any of the programs The initial screen is shown below m JaDe larwSenga Debugger j all aloe ale_ mind Run orias Msat Shen Source y golo lina Ln Ex strict madea cal clicked Finish changed Prril check_oel r 1 Hinesweeper example j conim eri draw from T Ailes TRarntan r a EPET EE oon ee 5 a b VAF Maree 10 yar r wa fi 5 v r Sala i il var Toe col Time Cla saral marked ep loaded gt Zunerion ehangerl 14 i Bessege Text bas changed ta this text r Fr Mitenimssznpl nelude laslweingewanpar ja It is fairly basic but hopefully has enough functionality for people to be able to find and fix problems in scripts Viewing the script files and functions The main part of the window
225. e defined in the preference file Return type Graph object Example To create a new graph and copy all of the setting from graph 2 var 1 new Graph 2 Details of functions Total static Description Returns the total number of graphs Arguments No arguments Return type integer Page J 49 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To find how many graphs there are in T HIS var num Graph Total Page J 50 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Group class The Group class gives you access to groups in T HIS More Class functions Get Name string e GetFromID ID integer e Total Member functions Add Curve Curve AddAlI AddID ID integer Contains Curve Curve ContainsID ID integer GetCurvelDs GetCurves Remove Curve Curve RemoveAll RemovelD ID integer Spool SpoollD StartSpool Group properties Number of curves in the group read only Group name read only Detailed Description The Group class allows you to create and modify groups See the documentation below for more details Constructor new Group name string Description Create a new Group object Arguments Group name used to reference the group Return type Group object Example To create a new group with the name X Velocity var 1 new Group X velocity Page J 51 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Details o
226. e g operate multiple x disp 10 tag x mul Multiple all curves with a tag starting with x_disp_ by 10 and tag the outputs as x_mul_1 x_mul_2 see Section 7 8 for more details display x disp Display all curves with a tag starting with x_disp_ see Section 7 12 4 for more details copy curve file cur x disp Write all curves with a tag starting with x_disp_ to a file called curve_file cur see Section 7 14 for more details csv curve file csv curve 1 curve 3 0 3 Write curves with tags curve_10 curve_11 curve_12 and curves with tags curve_30 curve_31 curve_32 curve_33 to a CSV file called curve_file csv see Section 7 14 for more details 7 6 4 Using Curve Numbers Although it is not recommended curves can be referenced using the internal curve number instead of the curve tag If for example the Ist curve generated by a script has the tag curve_1 then the following 2 commands are identical e g operate multiple curve 1 10 tag x mul operate multiple 1 10 tag x mul If curve numbers are used within a script then T HIS will automatically offset the curve numbers in the script by the number of curves T HIS already has defined before the script is executed e g operate multiple 1 10 tag x mul would multiply internal curve number 1 by 10 if T HIS didn t contain any curve definitions when the script was run If T HIS already contained 100 curves then the same command would multiple internal c
227. e or just Un U1 m kg s SI U2 mm T s U3 mm kg ms U4 mm gm ms U5 ft slug s U6 m T s The X and Y axis units are defined by a line starting with either X AXIS UNIT or Y AXIS UNIT and take one of the 2 following formats X AXIS UNIT unit name X AXIS UNIT mass length time angle temperature For the Ist format the following predefined unit names are available emperature Length Brain Power Displacement Area Force ThermaiFlux If the axis units are NOT one of these predefined units then the second input format can be used to define the unit in terms of it s basic properties The values for mass length time angle and temperature should be the powers that are used to describe the unit in terms of it s fundamental dimensions Some examples of common units defined using this method are shown below Unit Mass Length Time Ange Temperature me ae po o Displacement elocit User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS B 4 Example The following example shows a curve file containing 2 curves The first curve will be plotted with a bold solid green line with triangular symbols every other data point The curve contains 5 data points and is given a reference tag CURVE_1 The second curve will be plotted with a dashed white normal line No symbols will be displayed The curve contains 2 data points and has no reference tag Comment line STYLE solid green bold triangle 2 Style l
228. each model 3 aas see below for more details on the file format Open Select models from database Me Database EEE Extract curves to match model 1 Overwrite existing curves Ww Copy curve styles Use default styles Set styles Colour Width Style Symbol Model Unit System Undefined u MV THF d3that File V XTFixtfile File V LSDAbinout Database Wf ASCII Files To select a model database either enter it s name in the text box or use the file selector The default model database can be specified as a command line argument see section 1 3 for more details The default database filename and location can also be specified in the preference file see Appendix H for more details this database dir this database file Page 5 9 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 After a database file has been selected it s contents will be read and T HIS will display a Tree Like menu showing the contents of the database As each item is displayed T HIS will check to see if the files that it refers to exist If a file does exist then a green y tick will be displayed If a file does not exist then a red X cross will be displayed The number of levels in the database that are automatically expanded when it is first displayed can be specified in the preference file see Appendix H for more details this database_ expand After selecting the required models use Apply to close the database window and return to
229. ed for backwards compatibility var is sufficient Use vara to append to an existing file e g varr head hic 1 hic hic result for head node REPORTER variable head_hic curve number 1 output request description e g vara max y 1 max maximum y value REPORTER variable max_y curve number 1 output request description Page 7 48 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 13 4 Setting up new FAST TCF variables to contain curve properties If you wish to use a curve property as a new variable within FAST TCF there are two ways you can achieve this 1 Use the keyword varf This should be used when the user doesn t also require the value to be outputted into a text file or aREPORTER file 2 Within a tab taba tabc or varr line use the word varf just before the description words The variable name is defined as the word after varf The variable value is equal to the return value of the request The variable can then be used in any subsequent lines of FAST TCF For instance the simplest way to set the variable MAX_ACCN to the max of curve 1 is varf MAX ACCN 1 max However if the user wishes to combine writing a property to a text file and defining a variable in FAST TCF this syntax could be used tab output txt 1 max varf MAX ACCN 7 13 5 Format From Version 9 3 onwards the format used to display the value can be controlled by adding an optional format keyword after the property
230. ed in GREEN and the area above is filled in RED START_DATUM ACRONYM datum_1 LABEL Hic Limit TYPE constant_y VALUE 1000 000000 LINE_COLOUR green LINE_STYLE solid LINE_WIDTH normal FILL_COLOUR_1 red FILL_COLOUR_2 green LABEL_FONT default LABEL_SIZE automatic LABEL_COLOUR foreground LABEL_POSITION default END_DATUM Page 7 37 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 11 2 Adding Datum Lines to Graphs Multiple DATUM definitions can be added to each graph using the datum acronym acronym datum maximum Add datum with the acronym maximum to all selected graphs layout graph select none Deselect all graphs see section 7 2 layout graph select 1 Select graph see section 7 2 datum maximum Add datum with the acronym maximum to graph 1 currently selected datum minimum Add datum with the acronym minimum to graph 1 currently selected Page 7 38 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 12 FAST TCF IMAGE OUTPUT OPTIONS The options to generate images can be split into 5 sections Setting Curve Style Setting Curve Styles by Model Plot setup Curve Display Image Generation 7 12 1 Setting Curve Styles Description __ keywordisecond word _ following words Plot style setup style style name _ style options Individual curve style style options This section explains how to set up the styles for the curves in a plot The two types of syntax available in the table above effect when and ho
231. ed in T HIS Instead of reproducing all of the graphs the FAST TCE script can also contain the commands to generate a subset or pages or graphs 7 1 5 1 FAST TCF Script FAST TCF Script aX Create Script Name Generate for Run ion93 thisO3 Debug default inp A M All Pages _ Current Page _ Only Page __ All Graphs _ All Active Graphs _ Only Graph FASTTCF Script Image Output M Format 8 bit BMP Compressed y Filename script_output bmp FASTTCF Script Curve Output Filename script_output cur __ Unblanked Curves _ Select Curves FASTTCF Script Curve Group Output W W All Curve Groups __ Select Curve Groups ee Image Output This option can be used to add the commands to the FAST TCF script to generate an image of each graph page that is selected for output In addition to selecting the image format a filename can also be specified that is used in the FAST TCE script as the output filename for images 7 1 5 2 FAST TCF Script Curve Output This option can be used to add commands to the FAST TCF script to write curves out to a T HIS curve file By default this option will add commands to the FAST TCF script write any curves that are unblanked in a graph to a curve file Instead of writing all of the unblanked curves out to a file the Select Curves option can be used to select a subset of curves Page 7 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 1 5 3 FAST TCF Scr
232. ed into the FAST TCF file allowing for simple curves to be created in T HIS The keyword for this is keyboard The order of the following words is important and must be adhered to see below The continuation line character is useful here Keyword ifollowing word following word Keyboard fxaxis x axis name y axis name label fourve label ec data xval yval xval2 yval2 xval3 yval3 etc for example to create an acceleration curve with a straight line at value 1 0 keyboard title straight line xaxis time yaxis accn label straight line at 1 0 data 0 000000 1 000000 1 000000 1 000000 Page 7 9 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 4 INPUT FOR DATA EXTRACTION REQUESTS Each data extraction request occupies one line with the words on the line separated by space characters The line starts with a keyword and the required arguments follow then any optional requests can occur after the arguments see later on in the manual ID can be a number or a name enclosed in quotes relevant output file Multiple data requests mm depending on whether the LS DYNA version supports it in the T HIS 9 2 onwards supports multiple data output syntax T HIS will read the data in one file pass making it much quicker for larger runs To use this in FAST TCF you need to specify the range using a colon and it must be in a single word As well as the standard numbers you can use there are some
233. ed to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button 6 1 8 13 Symbols This option can be used to change the symbol style of curves This option can be applied to multiple curves and it can be undone using the middle mouse button 6 2 Graph Tool Bar Cia Plotting Display Auto_Blank AB 6 2 1 Graph Selection This option can be used to make a graph active or inactive see section 3 5 for more details 6 2 2 Plotting Plotting This option provided the same functions as the Plotting menu in the main toolbar with the exception that the settings only apply to the graph in the window instead of all of the currently active graphs 6 2 3 Display Display This option provided the same functions as the Display menu in the main toolbar with the exception that the settings only apply to the graph in the window instead of all of the currently active graphs 6 2 4 Auto_Blank Auto_Blank Tab key cyles through The Auto_Blank function can be used to blank and unblank curves in a V4 Model graph using either the TAB key or SHIFT TAB zn By default if you now press the TAB key in a graph T HIS will automatically Components blank all the curves except for those belonging to model 1 If you press TAB Entity Types a 2nd time you will just see the curve belonging to model 2 a third time ye model 3 When you reach the end of the models you have curves for pressing Entity ID the TAB key loops back to model 1 If you press SHIFT TAB then
234. efer to the FMVSS 214 document Page E 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page E 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX F Curve Correlation COR1 and COR2 The Correlation functions COR1 and COR2 provide a measure of the degree to which two curves match When comparing curves by eye the quality of correlation may be judged on the basis of how well matched are the patterns of peaks the overall shapes of the curves etc and can allow for differences of timing as well as magnitude Thus a simple function based on the difference of Y values such as T HIS ERR function does not measure correlation in the same way as the human eye The T HIS correlation function attempts to include and quantify the more subtle ways in which the correlation of two curves may be judged The correlation function may be applied to any two curves whose x values increase monotonically e g responses versus time The results are independent of the units used e g milliseconds or seconds are both acceptable The sign of the y values is not important Only the overlap time period is considered i e the range of x values for which both curves have a y value The time period range of X values and maximum absolute Y value are used to non dimensionalise the curves such that x values run from 0 to 1 and the maximum absolute y value is 1 Five measures of correlation are calculated Each is given equal weighting The final correl
235. elocity Magnitude Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration rotation rotation rotation otation Magnitude rotational velocity rotational velocity rotational velocity otation Vel Magnitude rotational acceleration rotational acceleration rotational acceleration otation Axle Magnitude X Y Z D X Y Z v X Y DIN c ford NI lt rotation DIN lt lt lt x lt m x K viz IN lt lt DYN D Page 7 19 T HIS Rigid part NRB Seat belt Page 7 20 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 irection Cosine 11 irection Cosine 12 irection Cosine 13 irection Cosine 21 irection Cosine 22 irection Cosine 23 irection Cosine 31 irection Cosine 32 irection Cosine 33 ocal X Displacement ocal Z Displacement ocal X Velocity ocal Y Velocity ocal Z Velocity ocal X Acceleration ocal Z Acceleration ocal X rotation ocal Y rotation ocal Z rotation ocal X rotational vel ocal Y rotational vel ocal Z rotational vel ocal X rotational axle ocal Y rotational axle ocal Z rotational axle rce train orce v Strain urrent Length tress in XX tress in YY tress in ZZ tress in YZ verage stress Pressure train in XX train in YY train in ZZ train in XY train in YZ train in ZX rpa nrb Part id 9 9 O OS O 5 Oo 9 pal w lad isplacement local al IvJelocity local laJcceleration local SS Sele lr IT orJotatio
236. er given e The optional administration directory defined by the environmental variable OA_ ADMIN or OA_ ADMIN xx where xx is the release number e The site wide installation directory defined by the environment variable OA_INSTALL e The user s home directory HOME Unix Linux or SUSERPROFILE Windows e The current working directory See Installation organisation for an explanation of the directory structure All four files are read if they exist and the last preference read will be the one used so the file can be customised for a particular job or user at will Files do not have to exist in any of these locations and if none exists the programme defaults will be used On Unix and Linux HOME on Unix and Linux is usually the home directory specified for each user in the system password file The shell command printenv or on some systems setenv will show the value of this variable if set If not set then it is defined as the directory for the user The command cd pwd will show this On Windows SUSERPROFILE on Windows is usually C Documents and Settings lt user id gt Issuing the set command from an MS DOS prompt will show the value of this and other variables Generally speaking you should put e Organisation wide options in the version in 0A_ADMIN_xx and or OA_INSTALL e User specific options in HOME USERPROFILE e Project specific options in the current working directory The file contains preference
237. er manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Return type pixels unit float Example To return how many pixels there are per unit coordinate var ppu Widget PixelsPerUnit Polygon colour constanti fillfboolean x1 integer y1 integer x2 integer y2 integer xn integer yn integer Description Draws a polygon on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets The coordinates are local to the Widget not the Window See properties xResolution and yResolution for more details Note that the widget graphics will only be updated when the widget is redrawn This is to allow the user to do multiple drawing commands on a widget To force the widget to be redrawn call ShowQ Arguments Alternatively instead of x1 yl etc you can specify a single argument which is an array of coordinates to use In either case the number of points x y pairs is limited to 30 Any extra points will be ignored Return type no return value Example To draw a red filled triangle with corners 20 20 and 50 80 and 80 20 on widget w w Polygon Widget RED true 20 20 50 80 80 20 ReadImageFile filename string justify optional constant Description Reads an image from a file to show on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets The image will be shown on the widget underneath any text Note that due to the way that colours are used for menus in T HIS only a small num
238. eration These values are used to assess the performance of road side crash barriers This function returns an array containing 2 curve objects The 1st curve is the THIV curve and the 2nd is the PHD curve The peak values of these curves are the corresponding THIV and PHD values and can be obtained using the Curve ymax property Arguments float Horzont lidister distance between occupants head and vehicle ae Lateral distance between occupants head and vehicle xo float Horizontal distance between occupants head and vehicle CofG Return type Array of Curve objects 1st curve THIV curve 2nd curve PHD curve Example Calculate THIV and PHD curves x y z and distances Dx 0 6 Dy 0 3 X0 0 0 c_array Operate Thiv x y z 0 6 0 3 0 0 thiv c_array 0 ymax phd c_array 1 ymax Page J 97 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Tms Input Curve Curve Period float static Description 3ms Clip Calculation After calculating the 3ms clip value for a curve the value can also be obtained from the curve using the Curve tms property In addition to the 3ms clip value the start and end time for the time window can also be obtained using the Curve tms_tmin and Curve tms_tmax properties Arguments Period Clip period Return type 3ms Clip value Example Calculate 3ms clip for curve m using a clip period of 0 003s val Operate Tms m 0 003 Translate Input Curve Curve X value float Y value flo
239. eration following following additional command word 1 word 2 words Acen to disp oper spectra Accn to vel oper spectra Disp to vel oper spectra Disp to accn oper spectra Vel to disp oper spectra Page 7 32 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Vel to accn oper va curve 1 spectra a TT correction esign spectrum Ic R oper rs curve 1 damping factor sampling factor Sampling must be spectrum either 30 or 70 7 8 5 Range of curve operation commands Description keywordjoperation following word following word additional command 1 2 words ist list Page 7 33 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 9 APPLYING EXTRA OPTIONS TO DATA REQUESTS Extra options can be used after a data component extraction or a curve operation After the basic request for a particuar component and particular entity have been made the following extra data on the line is recognised to manipulate the curve further This includes options to label a curve scale it write it out and so on Each request is executed in the order on the line if the curve label is used it must be the last input on the line e g no 54 accel mag xsc 1000 ysc 0 0001 hic lab Head Accn node i d 54 accel mag scale x and y obtain hic value curve label no 1 accel mag filter c60 append output cur node i d 1 accel mag filter with C60 append the curve to a file no 1 accel mag tag node 1 acc node i d
240. erface The full command line capability is preserved when T HIS is running in screen menu mode and you are free to mix command line and mouse driven input at will There are some situations in which command line input is more efficient for example when entering lists of explicit entities Commands are entered in the dialogue box DIALOGUE a AT ES As this example shows the dialogue box is also used for listing messages warnings and errors to the screen It can be scrolled back and forth its buffer is 200 lines long to review earlier messages The following colours are used Normal messages and prompts Yellow Text typed in by you White Warning messages Magenta Error messages Red There is a minor limitation when mixing command line and screen menu mode you cannot perform the same function simultaneously in both modes If you attempt to do so you will get the message WARNING recursive access attempted And you will not be permitted to continue 2 4 Window management in the screen interface Moving resizing and scrolling of windows is based on the conventions used in the Motif Window Manager To move a Click down on its title bar then drag the window to where you want it to be A rubber band window outline moves to show the window s current position To resize a Either window Click on a border bar to move just that side or on a corner bar to move both sides attached to that corner Again a rubber ban
241. ers can be active at the same time Filter By Model Model y Filter by Model This option can be used to filter the list of curves by model number If curves have been read in from a file then an Dismiss Other option will be shown V Model 2 _ Model 3 _ Model 5 y Model 1 In the example opposite only curves that are either from _ Model 4 model 1 or model 2 will be displayed Page 5 39 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Filter By Label Label u curves by label Upto 5 different strings can Dismiss Select M V onore Case will be filtered using those stings If AM L And e T vo A separate option can be used to ignore the EEE case so that model will match both Model and model l E In the example opposite only curves that contain either the word Model OR the word Node in their labels will be displayed Filter By Type Type z Fitter by Type This option can be used to filter the list of r curves by entity type The list of entity types Dismiss Select an None displayed will automatically update to show the entity types for all the curves that are V Model Node currently stored in T HIS In the example opposite only curves that contain Model data are displayed Filter By Component Component y Fitter by Component This option can be used to filter the list of ren ag curves by component type The list of Dismiss Select al None comp
242. erval Return type Curve object or NULL Example Regularise curve m using a new X axis intreval of 0 0001 p Operate Reg m 0 0001 Res Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve static Description Resultant of a group of curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Resultant of curves stored in curve array x p Operate Res x Page J 92 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Rev Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Reverse X and Y axis values Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Example Reverse X and Y axis values of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Rev m Rs Input Curve Curve Damping Factor float Sampling Points int X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Generate a reponse spectrum from input accelerations Arguments Damping Factor Dammping factor Sampling Points Number of points to sample over 30 or 70 X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Return type Curve object or NULL Example Generate a response spectrum using a factor of 0 05 and 70 sampling points Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate Rs m 0 05 70 0 0001 Sin Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description
243. es for a window Do not use the Window object after calling this method Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To delete window w w Delete Error title string error string buttons optional constant static Description Show an error message in a window Page J 132 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Error message to show in window optional Window NO If this is omitted an OK button will be used By default the window will be modal If Window NONMODAL is also given the window will be non modal instead buttons The buttons to use Can be bitwise OR of Window OK Window CANCEL Window YES or Return type Button pressed Example To show error Critical error nAbort in window with title Error with Yes and No buttons var answer Window Error Error Critical error nAbort Window YES Window NO if answer Window YES Exit GetDirectory initial optional string static Description Map the directory selector box native to your machine allowing you to choose a directory On Unix this will be a Motif selector Windows will use the standard windows directory selector Arguments initial optional Initial directory to start from Return type directory string or null if cancel pressed Example To select a directory var dir Window GetDirectory GetFile extension optional string allow new optional boo
244. es for some data components For fully integrated Shells and Thick Shells values can be written out for all 4 in plane integration points in each through thickness location In addition to the integration point values it is also possible to write out data that has been extrapolated from the integration points out to the shells nodes For fully integrated solid elements data can also be written out for all 8 integration points and values can also be extrapolated to the elements nodes To select these additional values the entity ID s specified in a FAST TCF scripts can be modified as follows e g solid 10 solid 10 average value solid 20 5 solid 20 data from 5th integration point shell 20 3 shell 20 data extrapolated to shells 3rd node Page 7 24 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 5 UNITS From version 9 4 onwards T HIS can automatically add unit information to graph labels and it can convert results from one unit system to another Each model in T HIS can have a Unit System defined for it and a separate Unit System can be defined for displaying results T HIS will automatically convert results from the model Unit System to the display Unit System T HIS has 6 built in unit systems nit System name Units kg D Tonnes s kg m em ms It ie o ee s 7 5 1 Setting the unit system for a model To set the unit system for a model ger word Keyw 7 5 2 Setting the DISPLAY unit system
245. es to curve file New Features for FAST TCF version 9 4 ver 9 4 of T HIS contains the following new FAST TCF commands Support for DBFSI data components e Support for TPRINT data components e New plot setup commands e New curve style options New Features for FAST TCF version 9 3 Because of the multiple graphs and pages available in T HIS 9 3 additional commands have been added to FAST TCF 93 to define and position graphs and to generate multiple images containing one or more graphs Because of these new commands version 9 3 FAST TCF scripts generated by T HIS can not be used in previous releases New commands have been added for generating and positioning multiple graphs and pages New commands for generating images containing multiple graphs and pages New variables have been added for accessing the output values of the ERR command New built in variables run_nameN run_titleN and run_dirN for multiple models Page 7 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 e New built in variable FTCF_ PATH New Features for FAST TCF version 9 2 FAST TCF has been extensively revised to include almost all of the T HIS commands The improved functionality does mean that old scripts may have to be changed to meet the new standards NOTE FAST TCE is not 100 compatible with pre version 9 1 input scripts e Variables have changed to allow more flexibility but the old rule for filenames word1 word2 has now been discontinued
246. escription The Entity class is used to define entity type codes that can then be compared with the enitity Curve property Node Entity NODE Page J 32 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS File class The File class allows you to read and write text files More Class functions Copy source string dest string Delete filename string Exists filename string FindFiles directory string type optional constant Get url string filename string options optional object IsAbsolute filename string IsDirectory filename string IsFile filename string IsReadable filename string IsWritable filename string Mkdir directory string Mktemp Proxy name string ProxyPassword name string ProxyUsername username string Rename oldname string newname string Size filename string Upload filename string url string options optional object Member functions e Close e FindLineContaining containl string contain2 optional string contain3 optional string containn optional string FindLineStarting startl string start2 optional string start3 optional string startn optional string Flush ReadArrayBuffer length optional integer ReadChar ReadLine ReadLongLine Seek offset integer origin optional constant Tell Write string Any valid javascript type WriteArrayBuffer buffer ArrayBuffer length
247. eses 1 3 Command Line Options Instead of starting T HIS using the Command shell it is also possible to start T HIS from the command line with a number of optional input parameters Starting T HIS from the command line offers a number of advantages e Faster start up is possible by pre selecting the device type e The input filename can be specified and opened automatically e Faster start up is possible by pre selecting the device type Argument format lt application name gt lt arg 1 gt lt arg n gt lt input filename gt T HIS 12 0 can be started with a number of optional command line options raphics device type d lt device type gt pg d default Page 1 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Bere eg cf run 1 tcf FAST TCE input file tcf lt filename gt Any valid T HIS FAST TCF command file filename eg tcf run 1 inp set lt filename gt Any valid T HIS settings file eg set this001 set avascript js lt filename gt Any valid T HIS JavaScript file eg js sort curve j ILS DYNA Model lt filename gt Any filename from the analysis All the files associated with the model kg run_1 thf his should be the last argument on the ommand line model list lt filename gt he model list file should contain the full pathname of one file from each model that eg model List job_list I HIS should open Each file should be on a Seperate line and it should be the first item on each line other items
248. ested the order in which they are performed can be defined 7 1s GAR IT u Test output 1 Screen 2x Screen 4x Screen Landscape Portrait Fixed Fit Area 1x1 1x2 5 A A CO 2x4 Page 5 65 T HIS 5 8 2 8 Margins The Margins can be used to change the top bottom left and right margins for each page 5 8 3 Background This option can be used to add a background image to each graph see section 5 16 8 for more details Page 5 66 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Top margin Image Area l Right 180 x 256 mm Margin 10 0 Paper Size A4 itie line 800 Bottom margin 30 0 Reset To Default Images Background x BMP JPEG Postscript PDF Background Fiename TS Scaling Positioning M No scaling Single _ Scale to Width Tiled _ Scale to Height _ Stretch Width amp Height Image Justification NW North NE West Centre East ig sw South User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 9 OPERATE aps ADD Gy anoo ave car cup Options ee BEE Div y DIV ENV ERR _tsa_ map max mn MON The OPERATE menu shown in the MUL y MUL 69 NOR y NOR 9 ORDER fi right If th is left hovering over an option a short i es descripti f the functi ill R Por thet functions the er range of curves to be operated on A SUB y SUB x mM T A v eal VEC 2D range may be one or more curves m
249. ete breakpoint The breakpoint will be deleted Conditional breakpoints Sometimes it is useful to only stop at a breakpoint if a certain condition is met For example in the above example we may only want to stop at line 114 if mines is 10 You can do this by right clicking on the the breakpoint and selecting Add condition Add breakpoint condition X Enter condition to add to breakpoint e g n 1 mines 10 OK Cancel A window is mapped allowing you type in the condition you want to try to meet The condition should be a JavaScript expression which evaluates to true if you want the breakpoint to stop execution or false if you want the breakpoint to be skipped In this example the condition isn 10 If a breakpoint has a condition associated with it a C is drawn on the circle and in the breakpoint window The condition can be edited again or removed by right clicking on the breakpoint and selecting either Edit condition or Remove condition from the popup Running the script Running the script is controlled by the buttons at the top of the debugger window By default the script will be run in the debugger in strict mode This tries to pick up things which you might not have intended by running the script in a stricter environment doing more checking You can toggle this on off by using the strict mode checkbox Starting and stopping To start the script press the Run button Execution of the s
250. ey are Belytschko Schwer plastic data or Hughes Liu stress strain data it is your responsibility to interpret the results correctly A 7 Shell Data Components For shells the following data components are available These combine with directions for the data component and in some cases a location through the shell thickness Component THIF thay XT atfile LSDA inout ASCH Stress components sx sm TE syy esn yes ves sz sonsinzz_ os Fi Tue sxy esn yes ves syz_ stressinyz yes yes SE sza esna yes E uu smx Maximum Principa Suess yes jMHHHy EEE MN Minimum Principal tess es Si OO SMS Maximum Shear Swess yes S EEE sym Von mises Stress yes fyes o sav Average Suess Pressure yes MM EN Ere O Ereoive pusio swan y Sve d exx svinn he id Tee eyy senn yes E ue Ezz Straininzz yes yes SE EXY _ swaininxy yes je uu EYZ senn yes E re eze svinn fs E TE Page A 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS X Y Moment in Y X Y x y XY Miscellaneous components rides Fe Extra components Frequency Domain Analysis For a steady state dynamic analysis SSD the following nodal data components are available For each data component both amplitude and phase angle data components are available ee u Fe d3thdt Stress components sxx Swessinxx SE e syy__ stessin yy ME jr szz___ suessinzz E eae sw __ suessinxy be o syz sressinyz_ S ies uuu sx
251. f Maxima amp Minima 5 16 11 New Operate Commands ERR WINDOW MIN MAX AVE 5 9 amp Appendix G New Automotive Commands Acceleration Severity Index ASI 5 11 13 amp Appendix E New Automotive Commands Theoretical Head Impact Velocity THIV 5 11 14 amp Appendix E Command line options amp Windows file associations Appendix I New Features for version 8 0 Manual Section Description Maximum number of points increased to 2 500 000 1 1 BLANK VISIBLE option 52 REVERSE ALL option 52 Screen Picking Curves 5 0 1 Support for RWFORC ASCII file 5 1 1 amp Appendix A New Automotive Command Exceedence plot EXC S1111 New Automotive Command Viscous Criteria VC 5 11 12 amp Appendix E New Seismic Commands Baseline Correction BLC 3 12 12 Text conventions used in this manual Typefaces Three different typefaces are used in this manual Manual text This typeface is used for text in this manual Computer This one is used to show what the computer types It is also used for equations keywords eg type PART etc Operator This one is used to show what you must type type Button text This one is used for screen menu buttons eg APPLY Notation Triangular round and square brackets have been used as follows e Triangular To show generic items and special keys For example lt list of integers gt lt filename gt lt data component gt lt return gt lt control Z gt lt escape gt Round To show optional item
252. f any length Arguments No arguments Return type string read from file or undefined if end of file Example Loop reading lines from File object f var line while line ReadLine undefined ReadLongLine Description Reads a line from a file opened for reading by a File object The line can be any length If your file has lines shorter than 256 characters then you may want to use ReadLine instead which is faster Page J 44 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments No arguments Return type string read from file or undefined if end of file Example Loop reading lines from File object f var line while line ReadLongLine undefined Rename oldname string newname string static Description Rename an existing file to have a different name Arguments Existing filename you want to rename New filename you want to rename to Return type true if successful false if not Example To get the size of the file data test file key var size File Size data test file key Seek offset integer origin optional constant Description Set the current position for reading or writing in a File object Arguments Offset to seek to in the file origin constant Origin for offset Must be one of File START File END or File CURRENT If omitted optional File START will be used Return type no return value Page J 45
253. f functions Add Curve Curve Description Adds a curve object to group Arguments Curve that will be added to group Return type No return value Example To add curve c to curve group g g Add c AddAll Description Adds all curves to group Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To add all curves to curve group g g AddAll AddID ID integer Description Adds curve by ID to a group Arguments The ID of the curve you want to add Page J 52 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Return type No return value Example To add curve 3 to curve group g g AddID 3 Contains Curve Curve Description Checks if a curve object is in a curve group Arguments Curve that will be checked Return type TRUE if the curve is in the group otherwise FALSE Example To check if a curve object n is in group g var exists g Contains n ContainsID ID integer Description Checks if a curve ID is in a curve group Arguments The ID of the curve you want to check Return type TRUE if the curve is in the group otherwise FALSE Example To check if a curve ID n is in group g var exists g ContainsID n Page J 53 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Get Name string static Description Returns a group object Arguments Name of the group to return object for Return type Group object or Null if the gro
254. f one or both of the following setup errors 1 The DISPLAY environment variable has not been set up or has been set incorrectly This tells the X11 window manager where to place windows and it must be set to point to your screen Its generic setup string is setenv DISPLAY lt hostname gt lt display number gt C shell syntax Where lt hostname gt is your machine s name or internet address for example setenv DISPLAY 0 Default display 0 on this machine setenv DISPLAY tigger 0 Default display 0 on machine tigger setenv DISPLAY 69 177 15 2 0 Default display 0 address 69 177 15 2 You may have to use the raw network address if the machine name has not been added to your etc hosts file or possibly the yellow pages server hosts file 2 Your machine strictly the X11 server has not been told to accept window manager requests from remote machines This is usually the case when you are trying to display from a remote machine over a network and you get the message similar to Xlib connection to lt hostname gt refused by server Xlib Client is not authorised to connect to server In this case go to a window with a Unix prompt on your machine and type xhost Page 1 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Which tells your window manager to accept requests from any remote client It will produce a confirmatory message which will be something like access control disabled clients can connect
255. f t 2 1 0 0 membrane 2 0 577 t 2 3 0 775 4 0 861 t 2 5 0 906 The top or outer point is on the positive local Z side of the element neutral axis The output of shell data from LS DYNA will fall into one of two categories and the surface options available in T HIS depend on this NOTE It is possible to use non default integration schemes in LS DYNA which may locate the integration points at different places This is an advanced topic contact Oasys Ltd for advice Default output case 3 surfaces In this case regardless of how many integration points the shell elements may actually have through their thickness LS DYNA writes out Top surface Top integration point Centre surface Computed neutral axis value Bottom surface Bottom integration point Note that the centre surface here is the neutral axis value For membrane elements all three sets of values will be the same Optional output case user defined number of integration points maxint other than 0 or3 The number of through thickness integration points written to the THF file can be modified using the value of MAXINT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card If this parameter is changed then all thin and thick shell output written to the THF file will have MAXINT data slots for integration points in the file regardless of how many integration points a given element may have through its thickness If MAXINT is not 3 then the order in which data is written to
256. f the button is pressed in else if this b2 Message I said don t press if b2 pushed b2 background Widget WHITE else b2 background Widget DEFAULT oil Tf the Press me button is pressed then update the text in the label widget with how many times the button has been pressed Gi Message You pressed count 12 text Button pressed count times VANILLE TATA TEA AA TAA TATA NEN TEILE ATA TAA AA ES function changed Tf the user has changed the text in the textbox then give a message in the dialogue box Message Text has changed to this text PELIPUP TA ETI EET EET EIT AT CELT TAT EAT TAPED PET EL AAT EET AT PETA function confirm exit Map confirm box var ret Window Question Confirm exit Are you sure you want to quit Tf the user has answered yes then exit from the script Bage J 114 Graphics lines circles rectanges etc can be drawn on Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets If these methods are used the resolution of the widget is 100 units in x and y and the origin is at the top left of the widget See the documentation below and the WidgetItem and Window classes for more details User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Constructor new Widget window Window or PopupWindow type constant left integer right integer top integer bottom integer text optional for LABEL BUTTON and TEXTBOX not required for CHECKBOX COM
257. finements have been incorporated e Reflection of beginning and end of curves to minimise end effects of filtering see the figure below The curve is first passed forwards through the filter then the resulting signal is passed through backwards This procedure minimises phase change errors The poles and zeros of the filter are calculated such that the desired cut off frequency is achieved after two passes Page D 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Curve Reflection Original Curve Reflected Curve T H IS Reflected Curve Version 6 1 D 4 Standard SAE Filter Options Channel Filter Classes 60 180 600 and 1000 are Butterworth filters with the following parameters Filter Class Cut off Frequency Order 60 100Hz 2 180 300Hz 2 600 1000Hz 2 1000 1650Hz The gain characteristics are compared with the limits given in BS AU228 in the following four figures D 5 Standard FIR filter option The FIR filter Finite Impulse Response is specified by NHTSA It is used for filtering thoracic accelerations from side impact dummies the filtered accelerations are then used in calculation of TTI Thoracic Trauma Index Its characteristics are A passband frequency of 100Hz A stopband frequency of 189Hz A stopband gain of 50dB A passband ripple of 0 0225dB It is based on a standard Fortran programme available from NHTSA Page D 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Class 60 SAE f
258. first curve input for any curve operation If a curve tag contains a wildcard or if a curve group is specified then the curve operation will be repeated for each curve that either the tag matches or is in the curve group e g oper hic node acc 1 0 15E 3 label Hic ed node accn hic curve tag scale 1 0 15ms period label In T HIS 9 2 onwards the user can operate on multiple input curves only the first curve can be multiple at the moment using the wildcard For example to multiply all curves starting with the tag acc e g oper mul acc 9810 0 multiply on all curves with tag acc 7 8 1 Standard operation commands Description keywordjoperation following following jadditional command word 1 word _ 2 mars _ Absolute value oper labs fcuve i curve 1 constant u _ constant Clip curve oper curve 1 x min value jx max value Input requires all 4 values auto sets the value automatically en o O ope fore ee fe _fane 1 reference a curve to dB value a curve 1 narrow TApply narrow band A weighting octave Aly octave band A weighting a e O constant BO ee en c _ _ _ constant a oper int feuern S S Least squares Joper sq kue SidSSSSCSCSSC d Map foer map fuves fovea constant Page 7 30 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS ao ss INormalise oper hor s curve curve t oper curve 1 rms EE a curve from narrow band to db
259. following data components are available JEomponent THF a3that XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASC PT foe yes yes yes er ea le ee A 13 Slipring Data Components For sliprings the following data components are available Page A 18 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Component THE a3that TF xtfile LSDA binout ASCII PT puitihrough es ves A 14 Contact Data Components For contacts the following data components are available I Jeomponenn ana Per to ESDA now nel m a eM MasterForee Magmmude XS Stavexfone Sd vs sive toe Sd zs siwez MS Slave Force Magnmade 7 ren Total energy Slave Mann Sen _ Stavesideenergy _ _ j Bl yes yes yes pes pes pes pes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes es Master side energy yes Frictional energy A 15 Nodal Reaction Force Data Components yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes For nodal reactions the following data components are available CT es FY Jerome fi mo oe S T Sd es EN Jena je Lex fowls LEY fowl Vie Sw a A 16 Airbag Data Components y For airbags the following data components are available Versions of LS DYNA 971 can also generate PART based data for AIRBAGS that use the PARTICLE airbag methods If DATABASE_CPM_SENSOR has been used to define sensors then the output for the sensors will also be avai
260. fy a border and border colour to be added around the value Connecting Line This option will draw a line connecting the value with the point it relates to on the curve The connecting line is drawn using the same colour as the border fal E Scientic 1 2345E 2 y Scientific 1 2345E 2 x kal Value The values can be displayed showing just the Y axis value or with both the X and Y axis values If both values are displayed they can either be displayed separated by acomma or one above the other Page 5 115 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Number Format The values can be displayed using 3 different formats Values are displayed using exponential format all values are displayed as values of EO E3 E6 etc e g 11 234E 03 Values are displayed using exponential format e g 1 123E 04 Values are displayed as real numbers e g 11234 000 Decimal Places In addition to specifying the format the number of decimal places can also be set between 0 and 9 5 21 3 Legend This option can be used to automatically added curve properties to the curve labels in the legend area The following curve properties can be added to each curve label Maximum value Minimum value Average value Injury Criteria HIC HICd etc Other options Off Turns off the display of curve properties in the legend Append Add the values to the same line as the curve labels in the legend
261. g curves Page 5 13 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 When the curves from the 2nd or subsequent model are automatically generated then by default v Copy curve styles E Use default styles they will be given the same colours and line styles as the curves in the original model E Set styles Colour Width Style Symbol Instead of copying the curve styles a new style for all the automatically generated curves can be specified This make it very easy to set the same style for all of the curves that are read from a model Alternatively the default T HIS curve styles can be used 5 1 1 3 Model Unit System Model Unit System This option can be used to set the default Unit System that will be applied to the model For more information on Units see Section 5 22 5 1 1 4 Entity Types Items are shown in bright green if they occur in LS DYNA _ Groups Keyword THIS Curve all the models that have been read into T HIS and Bulk Data Keyboard csv Screen are currently selected If they occur in at least one model but not all models then they are shown in a ISO LS PREPOS j DlAdem NASTRAN duller green in the case shown in the adjacent picture Beams and Joints can be found in some Global Part Groups Nodes but not all of the models Solids SO Tk Shells Geo Contacts Sliprings Reactions Joints x Sections Subsystems Rigid Bodies Spotwelds Boundarys FSls SPHs TRACERs Page 5 14 User manual Ve
262. g edited to the values at the start of the edit session Quit Quits the curve editor without making any changes to the curve Labels Allows the title axis and line label to be changed see Section 5 5 3 for more details Replace Allows curve values to be changed by overtyping the x and y values Insert Before Inserts a new point in the curve before the selected point Insert After Inserts a new point in the curve after the selected point Delete Deletes the selected point User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 points 1001 Command Curve Editor X Restart Quit Labels Replace Insert Before Insert After Delete Undo 4 Point 4 2 3 4 aon DD 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 X value 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 9 940239E 05 1 977450E 04 2 990677E 04 3 974104E 04 4 987331E 04 5 970757E 04 6 983984E 04 7 997211E 04 8 980638E 04 9 993864E 04 1 097729E 03 1 199052E 03 1 297394E 03 1 398717E 03 1 497060E 03 1 598382E 03 1 69970 1 798048E 03 1 899370E 03 1 997713E 03 2 099036E 03 Y value 1 035303E 00 2 124691E 00 3 401202E 00 4 798676E 00 6 375494E 00 7 994342E 00 9 703846E 00 1 141409E 01 1 304722E 01 1 468456E 01 1 621935E 01 1 773808E 01 1 914959E 01 2 054395E 01 2 185106E 01 2 316937E 01 2 448088E 01 2 576451E 01 2 710555E 01 2 841944E 01 2 976754E 01 9E 03 The Command text box allows control by co
263. ge H 16 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS ser_text_colourkstring FOREGROUND WHITE BLACK RED GREEN BLUE FOREGROUND YAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE TURQUOISE INDIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW GOLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN MEDIUM_BLUE HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MAROON DARK_GREEN PURPLE NAVY DARK_GREY MEDIUM_GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_34 COL_ 35 COL_36 The following control treatment of unicode Preference ype D escription Valid arguments D efault The following strings and values control the display of UNIT information in T HIS Preference Type Description Walid arguments Default model_units string gt Sets the default UNIT system for U1 m kg s SI U2 mm T s U3 mm kg ms U4 U1 m kg s models mm sm ms U5 ft slug s U6 m T s SD display_units Kstring gt Sets the default UNIT system 1 m kg s SD U2 mm T s U3 mm kg ms U4 ai m kg s sed to display results mm gm ms US ft slug s U6 m T s rite UNIT information to CSV TRUE FALSE TRUE The following is an example file Note that blank lines and lines not beginning lt programme name gt are ignored so comment lines may be added if required
264. get WHITE Widget RED Widget GREEN Widget BLUE Widget CYAN Widget MAGENTA Widget YELLOW Widget DARKRED Widget DARKGREEN Widget DARKBLUE Widget GREY Page J 111 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 foreground constant Widget foreground colour Can be Widget BLACK Widget WHITE Widget RED Widget GREEN Widget BLUE Widget CYAN Widget MAGENTA Widget YELLOW Widget DARKRED Widget DARKGREEN Widget DARKBLUE Widget GREY Widget DARKGREY Widget LIGHTGREY Widget ORANGE Widget DEFAULT imageHeight integer Height of widget image pixels read only imageWidth integer Width of widget image pixels read only constant Widget justification Can be Widget LEFT Widget RIGHT or Widget CENTRE default lineWidth Width of lines when drawing graphics initially 1 values 1 255 allowed macroTag string Tag to use for this widget when recording a macro If empty then the text property value will be used monospace boolean true ifthe widget uses a monspace font instead of a proportional width font default Label and button Widgets only onChange function Function to call when the text in a TEXTBOX widget or the selection in a COMBOBOX widget is changed The Widget object is accessible in the function using the this keyword see the example below for more details of how to define the function and how to use the this keyword To unset the function set the property to null Note that thi
265. gical gt jwhether text in GUI TRUE FALSE buttons can be scaled Down to font_size string gt Menu font size SMALL DEFAULT LARGE DEFAULT font_type string gt Menu font typeface HELVETICA HELVETICA BOLD HELVETICA and strength IMES TIMES BOLD COURIER OURIER BOLD left_handed string gt Left handed NONE MOUSE KEYBOARD ALL NONE switching of mouse and or keyboard DOWN kd kd N D gt 2 zoom_factor real gt Zoom Factor for 0 01 0 2 0 05 mouse wheel 0 01 0 2 zoom_ factor real gt Factor for right 0 01 0 2 0 05 mouse dynamic zoom 0 01 0 2 real gt Factor for 0 01 100 0 2 keyboard short cut Imouse_3d_rotation_factorkreal gt Factor applied to the 1 0 speed of rotation Page H 19 o n T HIS mouse_3d_pan_factor Factor applied to the speed of panning imouse_3d_zoom_factor file_encoding Page H 20 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX Windows File Associations 1 1 WINDOWS PC s Under Windows on PC it is possible to set up file associations so that double clicking on files with the thf xtf cur and bdf extension opens them automatically in T HIS All of these settings are optional you should be aware that under the Windows operating system associating a filetype via its extension with an application is convenient but can also be restricting and hard to undo 1 1 1 To make thf files
266. gion By default Widgets are put into the normal region of the Window This method puts the Widget to the static region of the Window Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To put widget w in the static part of the window w Static StringLength text string monospace optional boolean static Description Returns the length of a string in Widget units This can be used to find what size a Widget must be to be able to display the string Arguments Text to find the width of monospace boolean If true then width will be calculated using a monospace font If false default then the optional normal proportional width font will be used Return type integer Example To get the width of string Example var len Widget StringLength Example Tick colour optional constant Description Draws a tick symbol on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets Page J 124 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments colour constant Colour of tick symbol See foreground for colours If omitted current foreground colour is optional used Return type no return value Example To draw a red tick symbol on widget w w Tick Widget RED Totalltems Description Returns the number of the WidgetItem objects used in this Widget or 0 if none used See also Widget ItemAt and Widget WidgetItems Arguments No
267. graph next to the DATUM line can also be defined As well as 2 defining the font size and colour for Type u ler Value the label the position of the label J Constant X relative to the DATUM line can also be set Points DATUM lines can be defined as k e Constant Y values Line Colour Foreground wW Fill Above None Pr e Constant X values Curves of X Y points Line Style th Fill Below None For a constant X or Y value the line Line Width a S Fill Right will automatically extend to the edges of the graph and the areas either side of the line can be filled Label Font Default gt Fill Left using any of the standard T HIS colours Label Size automatic Pr If aDATUM line is defined using Label Colour Foreground Pr X Y points then the araes between th d th h axi l e be filled ana the graph axis can 2 S Label Position default gt Page 5 130 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS As the DATUM lines are drawn in the order they are defined then care must be taken when applying fill colours 800 400 0 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 10 1200 800 400 0 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 10 800 400 0 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 10 1200 800 400 0 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 10 1200 800 400 0 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 10 1200 800 400 0 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 10 Page 5 131 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 24 3 Read This option ca
268. group group_1 by 10 and tag the outputs as output_1 output_2 _ operate multiple amp Group 2 10 tag output Multiple all curves in curve group Group 2 by 10 and tag the outputs as output_1 output_2 _ Curve Groups can currently be used as e The first curve input in all of the operate commands Within the list of curves specified as input to curve range functions e To select a group of curves for the display command e Outputting curves to T HIS curve files and CSV files Page 7 29 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 8 PERFORMING FAST TCF CURVE OPERATIONS Description keyword following words oper command necessary words depending on operation Many curve processing operations and functions are available The syntax is common for all types of curve operation 1 the first word is oper and is followed by 2 the operation function name e g ADD int 3 the required number of arguments for the operation e g ADD requires two arguments a curve and either a curve or a value 4 the remainder of the line may contain optional requests 5 any optional requests can occur after the arguments 6 curve numbers must be in the format lt curve number gt 7 An output curve is always needed for operation commands such as hic hicd tti 3ms err the curve will be copied and the operation is executed on the copied curve 8 A curve tag containing a wildcard or a curve group can be specified as the
269. he model Any number of models to be deleted from T HIS 5 4 4 Convert Binout This option can be used to convert LSDA binout files into the older ASCII files The menu allows a number of models to be selected The Select Files button allows the user to specify which ASCII files are to be created All of the ASCII files are written into the directory containing the LSDA file TM f AX All Models Vv Vv i AG Ss 1 2 3 Model Manager Select Re Read Delete Convert Binout Show Model Titles y T HIS ARUP GENERIC SLED MODEL CRUSH TUBE FT ARUP DUMMIES OASYS VEHICLE PR Model Manager Select Re Read Delete Convert Binout Show Model Titles y ARUP GENERIC SLED MODEL CRUSH TUBE FT ARUP DUMMIES OASYS VEHICLE PR Show Model Titles IW Convert LSDA binout Files to ASCII Select Re Read Delete Convert Binout y Select Files ARUP GENERIC SLED MODEL CRUSH TUBE FT ARUP DUMMIES OASYS VEHICLE PR Page 5 43 T HIS 5 5 EDIT Options This menu allows you to examine and make modifications to the curve data points You are always working on a scratch copy of the curve The permanent curve is only updated when you SAVE it explicitly Moving around the curve data is done through the use of scroll bars on the data panel Save Saves the edited curve as either a new curve or overwrites the original Restart Resets the curve bein
270. he directory data test var fileList File FindFiles data test To return the directories in the directory data test var fileList File FindFiles data test File DIRECTORY To return the files and directories in the directory data test var fileList File FindFiles data test File FILE File DIRECTORY FindLineContaining contain1 string contain2 optional string contain3 optional string containn optional string Description Reads a line from a file which contains contain opened for reading by a File object Although this is possible using core JavaScript functions this function should be significantly faster as most of the processing is done by T HIS in C rather than in the JavaScript interpreter To enable this function to be as fast as possible a maximum line length of 256 characters is used If you expect a file to have lines longer than 256 characters then use ReadLongLine which allows lines of any length If one argument is used then the line must contain that string If more than one argument is used then lines which contain the string contain OR contain2 OR contain3 etc will be returned Arguments String which matching lines must contain maximum length of 256 characters contain2 optional string alternative string which matching lines must contain maximum length of 256 characters contain3 optional string alternative string which matching lines must contain maximum length of 256 char
271. he image is captured the colours are reset to their original values 5 8 2 1 File Format IV Postscript _ PDF All images can be output at either the screen resolution or at a resolution of either 2 or 4 times the screen resolution 5 8 2 2 Title and Fig Number By default PDF and Postscript files are not labeled and have no figure number but you may add either or both of these They are always put at the bottom of each page along the short edge regardless of the orientation used for plots 5 8 2 3 Resolution All images can be output at either the screen resolution or at a resolution of either 2 or 4 times the screen resolution 5 8 2 4 Orientation All images can be output in either landscape or portrait format 5 8 2 5 Aspect Ratio By default all images are output using a fixed aspect ratio This option can be used to stretch each image to fit the available space on the page Different scaling factors will be applied to the horizontal and vertical directions and the image will be distorted 5 8 2 6 Paper Size The paper size can be set to be either A4 210 x 296mm A3 296 x 420mm or US letter 216 x 279mm The default size is A4 5 8 2 7 Layout Multiple plots on a page are also available In landscape format there is a choice of 1 2x2 3x3 and 4x4 plots to a page In portrait format there is a choice of 1 1x2 2x3 and 2x4 plots on a page By default there is a single plot on a page When multiple plots are requ
272. hl NY Shear foreeinY Si es NZ _ Shearforeeinz je i My Momentiny es Mz Momentinz ji Te Mx Posi momen S TE Page A 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Additional Beam Results written if requested from LS DYNA In addition to the basic data components additional beam results may be output to the THF file for both Belytschko Schwer and Hughes Lui beam elements As no indication of the element type is written to the THF file it is impossible for T HIS to work out whether a specific element is a Belytschko Schwer or a Hughes Liu beam As the element type is unknown the user must know which element type a beam is in order to extract the correct results Belytschko Schwer Beams If you have used Belytschko Schwer beams with a resultant plastic material model the following plastic results will also be written out to THF file Note that these data are written even if the DATABASE EXTENT BINARY card field lt beamip gt is not set the presence of a resultant beam material triggers their output automatically This is not the case for Hughes Liu data components for which output must be requested explicitly see below Coordinate systems of results Beam results are always output in the element local coordinate system Only beams declared in beam element time history blocks will be available Extra data components Where extra results are written and T HIS cannot resolve unambiguously whether th
273. i A range or curves may be selected by either 1 Click on the first item and hold down the mouse key drag the mouse to the last item in the list All items between the first and last including the first and last are selected 2 Click on the first item hold down the SHIFT key and click on the last item in the list All items between the first and last including the first and last are selected Page 5 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 VISIBLE P age Visible F Visi This option will select all of the curves that are unblanked Misible Page Visible on Page in any graph on the current page Visible All Pages VISIBLE A ll Pages Explain This This option will select all curves that are unblanked in at least one graph PICK Alternatively curves may be picked from the screen With this option the left mouse button is used to select curves while the right button deselects curves As each curve is selected deselected its name and number will be reported to the user and it will be highlighted on the screen A range of curves can be selected interactively by dragging out an area on the screen while holding down the left mouse button FILTER This option can be used to filter the list of curves displayed by model When this option is selected a list containing all of the current models in T HIS is displayed and the models can be selected or deselected Any curves that belong to a deselected model will then be fi
274. ic running FAST TCE is integrated into the T HIS executable and can be accessed from the command line or the shell Command line syntax lt this executable gt tcf lt FAST TCF input file gt start_in lt start directory gt exit batch lt thf file name gt Page 7 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS e g this93 exe tcf side impact tcf start_in e side impact runl exit runl thf The lt thf file file gt start_in exit and batch syntax are all optional NOTES e Ifno THF file is specified then T HIS will search the directory for the latest one thf e Ifno THF file exists then T HIS will look for a d3thdt file xtf file xtfile e Ifthis does not exist then no thf or xtf input filename is passed to FAST TCF and the input file is defaulted to ASCII e The program runs in any directory you like via the start_in command line option The FAST TCF output files are created in that directory and files written out are relative to that directory Instead of opening a single model multiple models can be read using the command line option lt this executable gt tcf lt FAST TCF input file gt start_in lt start directory gt exit batch model_list lt file name gt The model_list expects a text file with a list of filenames 1 per line to read into model slots within T HIS e g e side imnpact runl runl thf e side imnpact run2 run2 thf e side imnpact run3 run3 thf e side imnpact run4 run4 thf Shell
275. icking Group CURVE_GROUP Q q Swap to Quick Pick QUICK_PICK PAGE UP Next Page PAGE DOWN Previous Page Change edit to next point EDIT_NEXT 0 Copy Axis Settings COPY_AXIS 6 6 Preferences H Preferencesfor HIS _IX File Edit Dismiss Help The Preference menu provides an interactive editor for setting options HAI programs Name this tadd ascii zero for T HIS in the oa_pref preference i F F file see Appendix H for more details G D3SPLOT Type lt logical gt on the oa_pref file options G PRIMER i Default FALSE The preferences editor reads an XML REPORTER file that contains all possible sheets preferences and their valid options EFISHELL Description Automatically add point and allows you to change them at Actas will In this example the user is HIS ctive vi al changing the background colour in T HIS a rT Value FALSE 4 Note that changes made in the auto_regul Preferences editor will not affect the current session of T HIS they will auto_upda only take effect the next time it is run checkpoint If you have write permission on the convert ti oa_pref file in the OASYS directory you will be asked if you want to file names update that file otherwise you will only be given the option of updating legend_col your own file in your HOME R USERPROFILE directory line_width datum_file For more information on the interactive preference editor see Appendix H macro_dir Prefere
276. id arguments Default The following options control the default location and name of where T HIS looks for model database files arguments database dir kstring gt Director to look in for model database XML files none gt database_file__kstring gt Default model database XML file knone gt en umber of levels to automatically expand in model database tree Sem Cael 1 ALL 2147483646 The following strings and values control display options Preference Type Description Valid arguments Default axis width real gt Default line 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 2 idth for axis pixels Page H 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 axis_colour Kstring gt Axis colour FOREGROUND BACKGROUND WHITE BLACK RED REEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE URQUOISE INDIGO LIME SKY PINK PALE_YELLOW OLD OLIVE DARK_MAGENTA MEDIUM_GREEN on HOT_PINK LIGHT_PINK SEA_GREEN MEDIUM GREY LIGHT_GREY USER_1 USER_2 SER_3 USER_4 USER_5 USER_6 COL_1 COL_2 OL_3 COL_4 COL_5 COL_6 COL_7 COL_8 COL_9 OL_10 COL_11 COL_12 COL_13 COL14 COL_15 OL_16 COL_17 COL_18 COL_19 COL_20 COL_21 OL_22 COL_23 COL_24 COL_25 COL_26 COL_27 OL_28 COL_29 COL_30 COL_31 COL_32 COL_33 OL_34 COL_35 COL_36 E border_on logical Display RUE FALSE border _ line 11 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 border_colourKstring gt B A 5 x A 3 REEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW ORANGE URQUOISE INDIGO LIME SKY PINK
277. ile then the file format will be exactly the same as for an analysis with a ve value of MAXINT 4 times larger For example MAXINT 8 and MAXINT 32 will both produce THF files with 32 integration points worth of data and there is no way for T HIS to know which value of MAXINT was used to generate the data The ZTF file generated by PRIMER can help to resolve this problem If multiple in plane integration points are written to the THF file then they are written in the following order Layer in plane int point 1 Layer 2 in plane int point 1 Layer n in plane int point 1 Layer in plane int point 2 Layer 2 in plane int point 2 Layer n in plane int point 2 Layer 1 in plane int point 3 NOTE If non fully integrated shells are included in the list of elements written to the THF file then in some versions of LS DYNA the 2nd 3rrd and 4th in plane values will all be zero Care should therefore be taken if the 4 in plane values are averaged In some versions of LS DYNA the Ist in plane integration point is correctly written out using the global axis system while the 2nd 3rd and 4th in plane values are written using the elements local coordinate system Care should therefore be taken if the 4 in plane values are averaged A 8 2 LSDA binout File Stress By default stress tensors are in the local element coordinate system Values are written out for all the through thickness and in plane integration points Page A 16
278. ile txt File WRITE for n 1 n lt 10 n Writeln n Close See the documentation below for more details Constructor new File filename string mode constant Description Create a new File object for reading and writing text files Arguments filename string Filename of the file you want to read write If reading the file must exist If writing the file will be overwritten if it exists if mode is File WRITE or if mode is File APPEND it will be appended to if it exists or created if it does not When reading a file the filename can also be a URL uniform resource locator in which case the file will be read from the remote site See File Get for more details on the format of the URL mode constant The mode to open the file with Can be File READ File WRITE or File APPEND For File WRITE or File APPEND it can also be ORed with File BINARY if required For File READ it can also be ORed with File UTF8 if required Return type File object Page J 34 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To create a new file object to read file data test file txt var f new File data test file txt File READ Details of functions Close Description Close a file opened by a File object Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To close File object f Close Copy source string dest string static Description Copies a file
279. ill automatically generate a tag for the curve using the T HIS curve number as the TAG The TAG for a curve can be redefined at anytime within a script using the tag command see section 7 10 1 for more details Once a curve tag has been redefined the original definition should not be used in any following commands a curve can only have 1 TAG defined at any time 7 6 1 Tagging curves from a T HIS curve file Curves read in from a T His curve file can be tagged by refering to each curve in the file using a negative number e g tag 1 curve 1 1st curve in the curve file tag as curve_1 tag 2 curve 2 2nd curve in the curve file tag as curve_2 If curves are read in from a T HIS curve file then then the FAST TCF tag will be generated using the following rules 1 If the data extraction command contains a TAG option then that TAG will be used as above 2 If the curve file contains curve tags then they will be used if the data extraction command DOES NOT contain a TAG option 3 If no tags are specified in the file or in the data extraction command then T His will automatically tag each curve as where is the internal T HIS curve number In the third case if for example there are three curves already in T His the curves read in from the curve file will be tagged as 4 5 6 T etc This limits how you can refer to these curves since would not be able to multiply two curves together For example the comma
280. ill only be updated when the widget is redrawn This is to allow the user to do multiple drawing commands on a widget To force the widget to be redrawn call Show Arguments Colour of circle See foreground for colours If circle should be filled or not x coordinate of centre of circle y coordinate of centre of circle Return type no return value Example To draw a red filled circle radius 25 at 50 50 on widget w w Circle Widget RED true 50 50 25 Clear Description Clears any graphics on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets Note that the widget graphics will only be updated when the widget is redrawn This is to allow the user to do multiple drawing commands on a widget To force the widget to be redrawn call Show Arguments No arguments Return type no return value Example To clear any graphics for widget w w Clear Page J 116 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Cross colour optional constant Description Draws a cross symbol on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets Arguments colour constant Colour of cross symbol See foreground for colours If omitted current foreground colour optional is used Return type no return value Example To draw a red cross symbol on widget w w Cross Widget RED CtrlPressed static Description Check to see if the Ctrl key is pressed Arguments
281. ils on the available colours By default the background colour is set to BLACK and the foreground colour is set to WHITE Initially the grid axes border and labels are all set to the foreground colour 5 16 10 Swap Swap Foreground Background Foreground Background This option can be used to swap the currently defined foreground and background colours 5 16 11 Display Max Min In versions of T HIS prior to 9 4 the display of minimum and maximum curve values was controlled in the DISPLAY menu In version 9 4 these options have been moved to the PROPERTIES menu see section 5 20 21 Page 5 99 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 17 SETTINGS 5 17 1 Data Sources This menu allows the user to specify their preferred order of data sources for the different data types Upon reading in models T HIS will read all files regardless of these preferences When T HIS extracts data for plotting the source is dependent on that currently set in this menu If you select a data component or entity that is not available in the first data source T HIS will automatically try the other data sources in order until the combination is found The Model Manager can be used to see what source has been used for each item for models already read into T HIS Page 5 100 ra User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 17 2 Files File Names By default the file filters
282. ilter Gain dB fe Frequency Hz THIS Version 6 1 C60 filler response Upper limit T H IS Lower limit Version 6 1 Class 180 SAE filter Gain dB Frequency Hz C180 filter response lt Upper limit Lower limit Version 6 1 Page D 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Class 600 SAE filter ao u fi g EOE E a Frequency Hz C600 filler response Upper limit Lower limit Version 6 1 Class 100 SAE fitter Gain dB 100 1000 10000 C1000 filter response Upper limit THIS wn Rewer MIR version 9 2 04 OCT 05 Page D 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page D 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX E INJURY CRITERIA T HIS has the option to calculate two of the injury criteria that are used currently in occupant protection These are the head impact criteria or HIC value and 3ms clip value These criteria are defined as follows E 1 HIC Value The HIC value is calculated from the resultant acceleration time history of the head centre of gravity filtered through a class 1000 filter The HIC value is then calculated from z a 23 HIC adt t t Ga Where a is the acceleration expressed in g and t and t are any two points in time It is now usual for an upper limit on the range t t of 36ms to be applied E 2 3ms Clip The 3ms clip value is the maximum v
283. in preference to ELOUT if the LSDA file contains both This option can be sed to force T HIS to use the ELOUT data hen reading Shell and ThickShell data as the ELOUT data can be in the global coordinate system instead of the element local coordinate pecify a directory for T HIS to start Any valid directory in Page 1 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 et the width of the T HIS graph xres lt size gt indow in pixels eg xres 800 et the height of the T HIS graph yres lt size gt indow in pixels eg yres 600 For this option to work you must also specify a ommand file cf filename and the ame of the PTF file to open his option will automatically set exit so hat D3PLOT terminates after playing the Ommand C eo lt filename gt eo lt filename gt is designed for the user to e0 suppress the console and redirect logfile output eo default o the specified filename In order to permit o redirect output on Unix Linux use multiple sessions to coexist on the same he shell redirection options typically machine the process id will be appended to the gt for lt stdout gt amp for lt stderr gt name gt part of the filenameto give name gt _pid lt ext gt f plain eo or eo default are found then filename generation is automatic and the first alid of STEMP this log lt pid gt txt TMP this_log_ lt pid gt txt HOMESHARE this log lt pid gt txt SUSERPROFILE this log lt pid gt txt
284. ine TAG CURVE 1 Tag line Comment line CURVE FILE EXAMPLE Title Time X axis label Displacement Y axis label Curve number 1 Curve label 0 2 0 lst data pair 1 0 4E 3 4 0 4 7 5 4 10 0 8 9 End of Ist curve CONTINUE Comment line Comment line STYLE dash white Style line CURVE FILE EXAMPLE Title Time Displacement Curve number 2 0 0 7E2 2 0 8 7E 9 Notes The abscissa x axis values are assumed to be in the correct order The free format allowed for the data points The style line must contain 5 comma separated words in the order LINE STYLE LINE COLOUR LINE WIDTH LINE SYMBOLS SYMBOL FREQUENCY to be successfully understood by T HIS If any words are unspecified in the style line as in curve 2 T HIS will take the default option Page B 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page B 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX C T HIS BULK DATA FILE FORMAT Format of a T HIS Bulk Data File A bulk data file contains a number of curves that share the same X values The format of the file is as follows Line 1 Title Line 2 Number of curves maximum 12 Line 3 Format see Note 1 below Line 4 Multipliers on values see Note 2 below Line 5 Axis labels see Note 3 below Line 6 Line labels see Note 4 below Line 7 X Y1 Y2 Y3 point 1 Line 8 X Y1 Y2 Y3 point 2 Linen 6 X Y1 Y2 Y3 point n Up to 500000 point
285. ine labels can also be modified by using the dialogue box Y Axis Label Title 5 6 8 SELECTING Select All DeselectAll ShowCurves CURVES Show Curves Show Groups Show Models list of all the current defined curves so that fin Deselect All Show Curves y the style for individual curves can be 7 1 Disp mag Node 100000 2 Disp mag Node 100000 3 Disp mag Node 100000 4 Disp mag Node 100000 5 Disp mag Node 100000 Instead of displaying individual curves the style menu can be changed to display a list Select All Deselect All Show Groups Tr of any currently defined curve groups u If curve groups are selected then the style 1 Curve Groiup 1 Displacements will be applied to all of the curves in the 2 Curve Group 2 Velocities curve group 3 Curve Group 3 Accelerations The style menu can also display a list of all the models currently loaded in T HIS Select All Deselect All Show Models y If models are selected then the style will 2 BASE T 150 be applied to any curve that was created R using data from the model 3 RUN17T 1 30 4 RUN 2T 1 40 5 RUN 3 T 1 60 6 RUN 4T 1 70 Mihara Page 5 54 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 6 9 LINE STYLE EDITING IN THE DIALOGUE BOX The dialogue box can be used to edit curve styles To access this feature enter the command style at the Command prompt Enter M at the STYLE gt gt HELP BOX me command pro
286. ing curves m and r q Operate Ncp m r Nij Shear Force Curve Axial Force Curve Moment Curve Fzc tension float Fzc compression float Myc Flexion float Myc Extension float E float static Description Biomechanical neck injury predictor Used as a measure of injury due to the load transferred through the occipital condyles This function returns an array containing 4 curve objects Curve 1 Nte is the tension extension condition Curve 2 Ntf is the tension flexion condition Curve 3 Nce is the compression extension condition Curve 4 Ncf is the compression flexion condition Page J 87 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Shear Force Curve Axial Force Curve Critical Axial Force Tension Fzc compression Critical Axial Force Compression Myc Flexion Critical bending moment Flexion Myc Extension Critical bending moment Extension Return type Array of Curve objects 1st curve Nte curve 2nd curve Ntf curve 3rd curve Nce curve 4th curve Nef curve 2nd curve PHD curve Example Calculate NIJ curves using input curves x y z and constnats Fxc 1 0 2 0 Myc 3 0 4 0 and E 0 0 c_array Operate Nij x y 2 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 0 0 Nor Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Normalise Y axis values Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Normalise Y axis values of curve m and store as curve p
287. ing gt For example this laser paper size A4 The rules for formatting are The lt programme gt lt option gt string must start at column 1 This string must be in lower case and must not have any spaces in it The lt setting gt must be separated from the string by at least one space Lines starting with a are treated as comments and are ignored Users accustomed to setting the attributes of their window manager with the Xdefaults file will recognise this format and syntax oa_pref arguments valid for T HIS Preference Type Description alid arguments Default add_ascii_zero logical gt lAutomatically add TRUE FALSE FALSE point at time zero if required auto_regularise logical gt Always regularise TRUE FALSE FALSE urves before filtering auto_update logical gt Automatically RUE FALSE RUE eplot graph after hanging axis title options heckpoint_dir string gt Directory for none gt heckpoint files o none to suppress hem altogether error_handler string gt fhow to handle o_action mini ea trap_continue mini cone errors and exceptions onvert_time logical gt Automatically mr FALSE ial onvert from ms gt s when filtering file_names string gt OASYS ARUP LSTC file filters LSTC d3thdt xtfile o ASYS ARUP Q legend_columns Kstring gt Be of olumns to PEN in leg gend e a for curves pixels datum_file string gt File containing D Pe line DIION Imacro_directory kstring gt S Specify
288. ing the channels the default is to display the filenames for each of the channel files Alternatively the channel names read from the Index file can be displayed Instead of reading an Index file and then selecting which channels to read individual channel file can be read in directly Page 5 24 Read Data x LS DYNA Groups Keyword THIS Cum Bulk Data Keyboard CS Screen ISO LS PREPOST DlAdem NASTRAN ee Index File Output Curve highest 1 File Format ISO Multiple Channels y Display Filenames r Read xl All Channels 1 Read Data LS DYNA Groups Keyword THIS Cum Bulk Data Keyboard CSV Screen ISO LS PREPOS j DlAdem NASTRAN Channel File E r Output Curve highest 1 File Format Display Read User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 10 LS PREPOST This option can be used to read in curves from files written out from LS PREPOST Two different file formats are supported LS PREPOST Curve Files LS PREPOST XY Pairs 5 1 11 DIAdem This option can be used to read in data from DIAdem format data files After selecting a DIAdem header file a list of all the available channels will be displayed so the required channels can be selected Version 11 0 of T HIS supports the following DIAdem data file formats REAL32 REAL48 REAL64 INT16 INT32 WORD8 WORD32 ASCII The MSREAL32 TWOC12 and TWOCI6 are not supported T HIS Read Data
289. integer Description Remove a curve by from a group Arguments The ID of the curve you want to remove Return type No return value Example To remove curve 3 from curve group g g RemovelID 3 Spool Description Spools a group entry by entry and returns the curve objects See also Group StartSpool Arguments No arguments Return type Curve Object of item or NULL if no more curves in group Example To spool group g var id g StartSpool while id g Spool do something Page J 56 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS SpoollD Description Spools a group entry by entry and returns the curve ID s See also Group StartSpool Arguments No arguments Return type Curve ID or 0 if no more curves in group Example To spool group g var id g StartSpool while id g SpoolID do something StartSpool Description Starts a group spooling operation See also Group Spool Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To start spooling group g g StartSpool Total static Description Returns the total number of curve group currently defined Arguments No arguments Return type Number of curve groups currently defined Page J 57 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To get the number of curve groups var total Group Total Page J 58 User manual Version 12 0 October
290. ints 0 1 0 trend 0 5 2 Curve shape full curve Size of tolerance band in X and Y as fractions of the curve 0 025 05 extent in X and Y Curve shape full curve Excursion area fraction scoring zero points It is expected that if COR1 rates Curves A and B as better correlated than C and D then COR2 would also rate the pairs of curves in the same order The percentage correlation would be greater in each case from COR2 than from COR1 COR1 will provide a greater difference discrimination between well correlated and very well correlated pairs of curves while COR2 will provide greater discrimination between averagely correlated and poorly correlated pairs of curves The purpose of offering both versions of the correlation function is to allow the user to select a calibration of the function appropriate to the typical input curves used Page F 4 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 a Q B Q 3 T 3 Bs a 2 5 D E 6 VO US ele eooy Correlailan examples US eisjeosy Page F 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Correlation Examples UONEISIBIIY Correlation Examples UONEISIBIIY Page F 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS COR3 The Correlation function COR3 provides another measure of the degree to which two curves match based on the distance between the two curves 1 000 0 800 0 600 0 000
291. ints and Nodal Locations for data extraction 7 4 4 1 Specifying Surfaces and Integration Points From version 12 0 onwards the syntax for specifying which surface or integration point to read data from for Shells Thick Shells and Beams has changed These options are now appended to data extraction as follows Page 7 11 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Shells and Thick Shells top surface e g shell 99 stress xx tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 middle surface shell 99 stress xx surface top tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 top surface shell 99 stress xx surface 3 tag curve 1 read x stress for shell 99 layer 3 Beams extra word 1 extra word 2 notes point h S e g beam 99 stress x ipoint 1 tag curve 1 read axial stress for beam 99 integration point 1 7 4 4 2 Specifying in plane integration points for Shells and Thick Shells In recent versions of LS DYNA it is possible to write out data at multiple in plane integration points for fully integrated Shells and Thick Shells for each through thickness layer For fully integrated solid elements data can also be written out for all 8 integration points By default T HIS will automatically read the average value for each element If the element isn t fully integrated then the data for the 1st point will be used if it is fully integrated and has multiple integration points then the average value will be calculated word 1 word 2
292. ion can be used to change the CSV file format between the X Y X Y X Y format where alternate columns are the X and Y values for each curve and the X Y Y Y format where there is a single column containing the x axis values for all the curves By default T HIS assumes that the columns of data are separated by commas this option can be used to change the field separator to either a Tab or Spaces If the Space option is used then multiple spaces are counted as a single field separator If curve or axis labels are defined in the file and they contain spaces then they need to be enclosed in pairs of quotes The default field separator can specified in the preference file see Appendix H for more details this csv_separator This option can be used to specify a column within the file that contains the X axis data values that should be used for all of the other columns of data This option can be used to automatically generate the X axis values if none of the columns within the file contain the data This option can be used to specify a row within the file that contains labels for each of the columns of data that can be used as the curve labels within T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Generate Labels Read Axis Labels 5 1 8 SCREEN This option can be used to automatically generate labels for each set of data A single string can be specified which will then have the column number appended to it to generate un
293. ipt Curve Group Output This option can be used to select additional curves for output to the FAST TCF script by curve group If a curve is selected that is also unblanked in one of the graphs the command to regenerate it are only added to the FAST TCF script once This option will also add the commands to regenerate the selected curve groups to the FAST TCF script Page 7 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 2 PAGE GRAPH LAYOUT AND SELECTION FAST TCF scripts can contain commands to create and position multiple graphs T HIS Pages can also be created and graphs moved between pages By default T HIS will automatically create a single graph on the Ist Page when it starts If a single graph is required then the script does not need to contain any of the commands in this section If additional graphs are required then by default they will be created on the 1st Page unless multiple pages have been selected rar prefers a Te BE ord word Layout page wide Set the page layouttotilewide _ cascade H Cr F Sethe page layouttocascade xa Set the page layout to 1 by 1 graphs per page ee py ak eae are br na ver nu fb _ISetthe page layout to 3 by 3 graphs per page ne Set the page layout to m by n graphs per page custom fF Set the page layoutto custom __ tS pP foe F EF Remove all graphs frompage n n fad foraph_ fo Add graph ID topage n 2 2 n remove graph b
294. ique labels This option can be used to specify a row within the file that contains the axis labels The SCREEN menu see right can be used to LS DYNA __ Groups Keyword TANS Curve interactively create a curve T HIS by Bulk Data Keyboard CcS Screen lecti i ing th selecting points using the mouse ISO LS PREPO DiAdem NASTRAN Start Curve End Curve Quit Curve Undo Last Title X Axis Y Axis Label Curve highest 1 End Curve Quit Curve Undo Last This option will start point selection process Once you have started creating a curve all the other T HIS menus will be disabled until you end the point selection using either the End Curve or Quit Curve options Dynamic viewing will still be available This option will end the current curve creation and save the curve This option will end the current curve creation without saving the curve This option can be used delete the last point created the middle mouse button will also delete the last point Page 5 23 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 9 ISO This option can be used to read in curves from files written using the ISO TS 13499 2003 file format The default option in T HIS is to read in an Index file containing information on multiple channels After the file has been opened and read a list of all the available channels will be displayed so the required channels can be selected When list
295. ises the curves using two factors either specified by the user or defaults calculated by the program the maximum absolute X and Y values of both graphs For each point on the first normalised curve the shortest distance to the second normalised curve is calculated The root mean square value of all these distances is subtracted from 1 and then multiplied by 100 to get an index between 0 and 100 The process is repeated along the second curve and the two indices are averaged to get a final index The higher the index the closer the correlation between the two curves Note that the choice of normalising factors is important Incorrect factors may lead to a correlation index outside the range of 0 to 100 see Appendix F for more details Weighted Integrated Factor WIFAC curve correlation function Compares curves using the Weighted Integrated Factor method WIFAC A value between 0 and 100 is calculated the higher the index the closer the correlation between the two curves See Appendix F for more details Page 5 79 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 12 SEISMIC Options DY DA YD VA AD The SEISMIC menu is shown in the figure right T HIS can be used to handle response _Av_ DS RS FFT IFFT spectra information In particular displacement P velocity or acceleration spectra can be read and _NeP BLC converted to another format 5 1 2 1 DV Displacement spectrum is converted to a velocity spectrum
296. it goes the other way model 3 gt model 2 gt model 1 gt model 3 Component Types Instead of blanking curves by model the behaviour of the TAB key can be hid Surface Int Point Curve IDs Page 6 9 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Models Default Blanks curves by model ID Components Blanks curves by component e g Node X Displacement gt Node Y Displacement gt Node Z Displacement gt Entity Types Blanks curves by entity type e g Whole Model gt Parts gt Nodes gt Solids gt Entity ID Blanks curves by ID e g Node 1 and Solid 1 gt Node 2 and Solid 2 gt Component This is similar to Component except that it lumps all the displacement curves together then Types velocity so you get x y z and magnitudes You will also get data for different entity types So Energy would show things like Whole Model KE and Contact Energies Surface Int Blanks curves by surface or through thickness integration point e g Top gt Middle gt Bottom gt Point Layer 1 gt Curves ID s Blanks curves by ID The default Auto_Blank mode can be modified using the preference file seeAppendix H for more details this auto_blank_mode 6 2 5 AB AB This option can be used to turn and off the Auto Blank option The default setting for this option can be modified using the preference file see Appendix H for more details this auto_blank 6 3 CURVE INFORMATION Model ID 1 NODE 1343 Pressing the
297. ite a CPU hungry process so it is only carried out periodically when a certain threshold is reached This can sometimes be observed during script execution as a periodic pause for thought and if you are monitoring memory usage with a system tool you may see it drop during these pauses Clearly this threshold value must be large enough not to trigger excessively frequent and costly garbage collections while at the same time not being so large that scripts build up large amounts of excess memory to the detriment of the rest of the programme The Memory size value in the JavaScript panel is the amount of memory allocated for garbage collection Every time a new object array string or double precision number is used a garbage collection thing is also allocated The Memory size is the total memory for these garbage collection things NOT the total memory for the script The total memory for the script could be significantly higher than this value e g the memory required for a Model object could be several kbytes but the memory for the garbage collection thing for the Model object will something like 10 bytes for a 64bit operating system When the memory used for garbage collection things reaches a significant proportion of Memory Size normally about 2 3 then garbage collection will take place to try to reclaim memory If no memory can be reclaimed and the total memory used for garbage collection reaches Memory size then the
298. ke the THF file the LSDA file can contain different numbers of integration points for each element This means that if Top surface is selected T HIS can correctly identify which integration point it needs to read data from By default strain tensors are only written out for the top and bottom surfaces and T HIS averages these for the mid surface values In recent versions of LS DYNA the parameter INTOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card can change this so that strain tensor values are written out for all the through thickness integration points T HIS does not currently support these additional values In plane Integration Points By default the LSDA file will contain data for all 4 in plane integration points for any fully integrated shells As with the THF file by default there is no information in the LSDA file to tell the difference between a shell with 32 through thickness integration points and a shell with 8 through thickness layers and 4 in plane points per layer If a ZTF file written by PRIMER is present then T HIS can use the extra information on the ZTF to work out which elements have multiple in plane points If the parameter INTOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card is set then the format of the LSDA file is changed and the LSDA file then contains enough information for T HIS to identify the shells with multiple in plane integration points without the ZTF file In addition to changing the format of the LSDA file setting INTOUT on the
299. kness integration points for each element T HIS can also use the information in the ZTF to identify models where MAXINT has been set to a ve number in order to generate data for multiple in plane integration points Effect of plotting Top surface on models with MAXINT 6 and MAXINT 9 whit and without a ZTF file MAXINT 6 no MAXINT 6 ZTF file MAXINT 9 no MAXINT 9 ZTF ZTF file present ZTF file file present Thick Shell 1 has 4 Undefined int Correct int point 4 Undefined int Correct int point 4 integration points points lt 6 points lt 9 Thick Shell 2 has 6 Correct int point 6 Correct int point 6 Undefined int Correct int point 6 integration points points lt 9 Thick Shell 3 has 9 Incorrect 6th Warning message as Correct int point Correct int point 9 integration points integration point int points lt 6 9 In plane Integration Points In some versions of LS DYNA it is now possible to write out data for all 4 in plane integration points for fully integrated shells by setting MAXINT on the DATABASE EXTENT_BINARY card to a ve number For example specifying a value of 8 will generate data for 8 layers each with 4 in plane integration points If this option is used then all the elements will be written out using this option regardless of whether they are fully integrated or not As there is no information in the THF to indicate that data for 4 in plane integration points has been written to the f
300. l Version 12 0 October 2014 MO Model options RE lt file gt Read Model es DA Read Data from PA lt id gt lt components Part data SL lt id gt lt components Slipring data Al lt id gt lt component gt Airbag data _C lt id gt lt component gt Geometrical Contact data RI lt id gt lt component gt Rigid Body data SPO lt id gt lt component gt Spotweld data SPC lt id gt lt component gt SPC data S lt id gt lt component gt Fluid structural In d on data SE Sele S I DE Delete Modes S SSS UU O Ll List Modes S SSS O SU Set Surface SSS O RE Read data CU Read T HIS curve fie U No Read T HIS curve file ignore any style definitions R Write options WR Write curve file CCC WA Write al curves 10 THIS cure le ST Staus o O Page K 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 DE Defaults AU Auto Scaling ON Autoscaling on MN Define new minimum y limit MX Define new maximun y limit 2DY Define new second y axis limits min max MN2 Define new minimum second y limit MX2 Define new maximum second y limit ST Stams SS O a labels both A Axes labels user AX Axis types h Ax olou R Grid lines PR Prefix Format AU Use automatic axes AA e automa X ax abe AY Use automatic y axis labels DAY Use automatic 2nd y axis labels X Window size x pixels Y Window size y pixels RV Reverse Foregorund Background
301. l Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Units class The Units class contains constants relating to curve units More Class functions e USER mass float time float length float angle float temperature float Units constants Page J 107 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Detailed Description The Units class is used to define the units for each axis of a curve p x_axis_units Units LENGTH Details of functions USER mass float time float length float angle float temperature float static Description Setup a user defined UNIT Arguments Type Description Power for time dimensions length Power for length dimensions Power for angle dimensions Power for temperature dimensions Return type 0 user defined Example To set the y axis unit of curve to m s 42 l y_unit Units USER 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 Page J 108 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS UnitSystem class The UnitSystem class contains constants relating to curve unit systems More UnitSystem constants UnitSystem U1 U1 unit system m ks s UnitSystem U2 U2 unit system mm T s Detailed Description The UnitSystem class is used to define the Unit System for a curve p UnitSystem UnitSystem Ul Page J 109 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Widget class The Widget class allows you to create components for a graphical user interface More Class functions
302. l be prompted for a Smoothing Factor gt 1 integer a smoothing factor The integer refers to the number of points included in the averaging of each point The value you want will depend on the number of points in the curve and the amount of smoothing required A certain amount of trial and error is necessary to get the required result Take the square root of the y values of a curve Converts a stress strain curve between True and Engineering Stress Strain Subtract the y axis value or constant of the second curve from the first curve If two curves are being subtracted they must have identical x axis values Subtract the x axis value or constant of the second curve from the first curve If two curves are being subtracted they must have identical y axis values Calculates the sum of a group of curves This sums up the y axis values of a group of curves and maps the result onto the x axis of the first curve Translate a curve with respect to the x and y axes The user is prompted for the x and y values X Translation 0 0000 Y Translation 0 0000 Calculate the vector magnitude from three input curves Calculate the vector magnitude from two input curves User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 9 37 WINDOW 5 9 38 ZERO 5 9 39 dB 5 9 40 dBA 5 9 41 Octave This function is typically used to modify a curve before carrying out an FFT on it The y axis values for each of the input curves i
303. l strain xtra data ial displacement isplacement in Y isplacement in Z xial rotation otation in Y otation in Z pplied X Force pplied Y Force pplied Z Force pplied Resultant force nergy from applied force pplied X Force pplied Y Force pplied Z Force pplied Resultant force nergy from applied force pplied X Force pplied Y Force pplied Z Force pplied Resultant force nergy from applied force C motion X Force C motion Y Force C motion Z Force esultant BC motion force nergy from BC motion C motion X Moment C motion Y Moment C motion Z Moment C Moment Magnitude C motion X Force C motion Y Force C motion Z Force esultant BC motion force nergy from BC motion al rJotation z2 b ending njodal loads Pt Pal I Ed wIw a SIN IN gt 13 2 N NI lt T lt lt x N m gt m gt gt D 2 o o gt gt gt rilgid body loads plressure nodal loads rvjelocity r body loads maopwlaooImI gt gt gt gt m gt gt gt gt m w lt W us 3 o o vjelocity nodal loads W ER rl a A Hl sr ry OR as e e y O en o i yO ED m Page 7 15 T HIS Cross section Cro Sec Section id User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Con Sli Contact id aster Force Magnitude lave X force lave Y force lave Z force lave Force Magnitude Total energy Slave Master lave side energy aster side energ
304. lable under the AIRBAG data components Component THIF d3that XT xtfile LSDA binout Asch Airbag components vo Volume ides es ies Page A 19 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 zZ Mass flow rate in lt oO a re oO nan Mass flow rate out oO na lt oO wn lt oO na z IT T es oO Nn lt 8 Me oO Nn Total mass oO na lt oO aA lt oO na Density gt Surface area mi Gas temperature lt oO n lt Oo n lt oO n lt oO n Reaction force lt oO n lt oO n lge 4 a S 5 gei 5 5 ee un Pressure lt oO n lt Flow rate through fabric z ett oO an Flow rate through vent lt oO n Total area Unblocked area Gas temperature mH lt oO aA S c 3 Z lt oO n A Toae es gt Z a Q gt S 5 T Q S B 5 oO 5 gt un Pressure O oe oO an Volume mH Se oO an Internal energy Z lt oO an uN Mass flow rate in Mass flow rate out Total mass lt jx Oo oO nA ja o an mi Density gt Surface area lt oO n Gas temperature Tj Reaction force CPM Sensor Components DATABASE_CPM_SENSOR OOO omon OOO ma anan Per same ESDA omoun fasc xO fkcooanacorseno bes pes v r Conntinato ot senor S y z zcooanaeofSonor pe es Vx fva Sd bes es Vz Ta ven O
305. late the exceedence plot using only the points with ve y values The Negative option will calculate the exceedence plot using only the points with ve y values Calculates the Viscous VC Alv t xC t Criteria from an A constant EER acceleration time history The user is C t DitVB prompted for the constants A and B See Appendix E for more details on the VC calculation B constant Page 5 75 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 1 1 3 ASI Acceleration Severity Apply Index This value is used Calculation Method VW 2010 to assess the performance _ 1998 of road side crash barriers Y Always reqularise curves before ASI This option Be requires 3 0 10000E 03 New X axis interval dt acceleration input curves x Acceleration Curve has The user is ae for Y Acceleration Curve FE the timits in the 3 Z Acceleration Curve directions Acceleration conversion factor MMM The calculation Acceleration Limits EAN am 10 000 method can be set to 2010 Output Curve aes a BS EN 1317 1 2010 Write To Screen or 1998 BS EN File Adefault asi C 1317 1 1998 See Appendix E for more details on this calculation 5 11 14 THIV Theoretical Head Impact Apply Velocity and the Post X Acceleration Curve aay 2 Impact Head Dean Y Acceleration Cuve M These values are used to o YawRate Cuve 7 performance of road side Dx 0 60000 Dy x
306. le Page J 41 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments No arguments Return type String name of temporary filename that can be used Example To get a temp filename var filename File Mktemp Proxy name string static Description Set a proxy for files opened by http ftp etc See also File Get File ProxyPassword and File ProxyUsername Arguments The name of the proxy Return type No return value Example To set the proxy to http example proxy com using port 80 File Proxy http example proxy com 80 ProxyPassword name string static Description Set a proxy password for files opened by http ftp etc See also File Get File Proxy and File ProxyUsername Arguments Password for the proxy server Return type No return value Example To set the proxy password to password File ProxyPassword password Page J 42 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS ProxyUsername username string static Description Set a proxy username for files opened by http ftp etc See also File Get File Proxy and File ProxyPassword Arguments username string The username for the proxy Return type No return value Example To set the proxy username to username File ProxyUsername username ReadArrayBuffer length optional integer Description Reads binary data from a file opened for reading by a File object The data i
307. le in the function using the this keyword This may be useful to ensure that certain actions are done after the background Window background colour Can be Widget BLACK Widget WHITE Widget RED window is shown It can also be used to show another window so this enables multiple windows to be shown To unset the function set the property to null onBeforeShow function Function to call before a Window is shown The Window object is accessible in the function using the this keyword This may be useful to ensure that buttons are shown hidden etc before the window is shown Note that it cannot be used to show another window Use onAfterShow for that To unset the function set the property to null onClose function Function to call when a Window is closed by pressing the X on the top right of the window The Window object is accessible in the function using the this keyword To unset the function set the property to null resize constant Window resizing By default when a Window is shown it is allowed to resize on all sides left right top and bottom to try to make enough room to show the Widgets The behaviour can be changed by using this property It can be any combination bitwise OR of Window LEFT Window RIGHT Window TOP or Window BOTTOM or 0 Note that when Window Show is called this property is set to O i e not to resize on any side right coordinate of window in range 0 0 left to 1 0 right showClose
308. lean initial optional string static Description Map a file selector box allowing you to choose a file See also Window GetFiles and Window GetFilename Page J 133 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments extension optional Extension to filter by allow new optional Allow creation of new file initial optional Initial directory to start from Return type filename string or null if cancel pressed Example To select a file using extension key var file Window GetFile key GetFilename title string message string extension optional string initial optional string static Description Map a window allowing you to input a filename or select it using a file selector OK and Cancel buttons are shown See also Window GetFile Arguments extension optional Extension to filter by initial optional Initial value Return type message string Message to show in window filename string or null if cancel pressed Example To create an file input window with title Choose file and message Choose the file to open and return the filename input var filename Window GetFilename Choose file Choose the file to open GetFiles extension optional string static Description Map a file selector box allowing you to choose multiple files See also Window GetFile and Window GetFilename Arguments Name Type Description extensio
309. ll be available for processing To get a list of available node numbers in command line mode use the M enu command yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Page A 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Coordinate system of results All nodal results are in the global cartesian coordinate system except at nodes which have been defined as accelerometers these report accelerations in the local coordinate system of the accelerometer subject to any rotations its parent rigid body has undergone A 5 Solid Data Components For solids the following data components are available I Jeomponent TIF casman KTF Gamio ESDA ins ASCH Stress components xx enna e M dr syy smesinyy yes yes e sz esn yes ives uu sxy esn ies ves syz sresnyz yes E Tue sx esn yes O ___ smx Maximum Principat Sues yes O MS Maximum Shear Stress py o VM VonMissses h FF ici Pisco Srain y Si x Srann e Sides O Swaininyy tyes S s srannzz y Sides O staininxy e Sides O i v bes yes yes yes bes i i es es es mjm jja s pS A 5 fo 5 Ss S 5 oO 5 gt un i Y ZZ Y i X Y XY Z X il E Minimum Principal Strain EMS Maximum Shear Stain yes es I EVM Von Mises ain ly je sd Bav average sain yes FE FE Extra components SOEn Extra Data Component yes es Frequency Domain Analysis Z ii MX MN For a steady state dynamic analysis
310. lt T HIS uses the data from Rigid Bodies Spotwelds SPCs Boundarys ELOUTDET as ELOUT only contains a subset of the data in ELOUDET FSls SPHs Tracers Pulleys In some versions of LS DYNA it is possible to change the Shell and ThickShell data components written to the ELOUT so that they are defined using the global coordinate system see EOCS on CONTROL_OUTPUT instead of the default element local coordinate system If this option is used then only the ELOUT file is modified the ELOUDET file is still written using the local coordinate system d Model Use ELOUT instead of ELOUTDET If T HIS detects that the LSDA file contains both ELOUT and ELOUDET and that they MISCELLANEOUS components are using different coordinate systems then ai E ees this option can be used to force T HIS to use EXTRA components the ELOUT file data components using the nn MV Use ELOUT instead of ELOUTDET This option can also be set via the preference file see Appendix H for more details and via the command line see Section 1 3 Page 5 18 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 2 GROUPS Read Data pd f LS DYNA Groups Keyword THIS Cum This option can be used to read a file containing PART group definitions If a model is read in Bulk Data Keyboard cS Screen which contains PART information then the PART groups can be used to read in and sum energies for ISO LS PREPOS j DlAdem NASTRAN a group of PARTS in one go a
311. ltered out of the curve list SHOW GROUPS This option will display a list of the currently defined curve groups instead of curves Output URLs ras In addition to selecting individual curves it is Memm JEI All None Visible P a Pick i also possible to select curves by Curve Group 7 J Filter Show Curves Key in sd if they have been defined By Curve Group e Ifa curve is defined in more than one group then it will be selected if at least one of the groups is selected 1 Model_1 CURVE GROUP LIST e If more than one group containing the same curve is selected then the curve will only be counted once as an input curve Page 5 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS By Command Line In command line mode a single curve may be selected by typing in a range A valid syntax is A single curve number e g 27 A from to range e g 10 30 no gaps mandatory A compound list in e g 1 2 10 30 3 97 In all contexts the order in which a group is defined does NOT influence the order in which it is processed It is ALWAYS processed in ascending sequential order Thus the addition operation OP ADD 30 20 10 1 2 3 40 will produce the results 40 10 1 41 20 2 42 30 3 5 0 2 Output Curves All operations that generate new curves must have a target curve defined This must be one of the following nnn a specific curve number nnn meaning
312. m and maximum values average and RMS Ymin 0 0000000 X 0 0000000 lue er Ymax 12171708 X 0 0479982 RMS 343394 38 Average 271682 56 6 3 2 Edit Labels Line Label PORSE ERON EMELE Title LGO9 LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLE This option can be used to change the title tag line label and axis labels for a curve X Axis Time Y Axis Acceleration Tag 6 3 3 Functions Automotive Operate The functions popup menu can be used to access any of the curve operations that take a single curve as the only input As well as applying an operation to a curve this menu Maths can also be used to select between ea Seismic TFT FFF F Overwriting the input curve with the output from each function Output 1st Free Writing the output to the 1st unused curve 6 4 Curve Histories Internally T HIS knows about all of the operations used to create a curve and the order that the operations were applied In addition to knowing the operations used to create each curve T HIS also knows which curves were used as inputs to operations that created other curves Page 6 11 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 4 1 Viewing E orn O T When a curve is selected and List Dependants the curve history is displayed a floating window will be displayed that shows all of the operations used to create a curve In the example opposite 3 items were read in and then combined using the VECtor operation
313. mand File Settings FAST TCF Convert LSDA gt ASCIl Edit Preferences Menu Attributes Auto Update Show Model Prefix Prefix Format Drag with curves Shortcuts User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 1 7 1 MENU Attributes This panel allows you to tune the visual attributes of the screen menus within T HIS and save them if you wish T HIS Menu Attributes HTX Dismiss HELE Display Facto 0 5 larger 2 0 smalle Default Large v Permit scaling CJK fonts unix font SEE aa ALATI en WE windows font DARSE inea pe Brightness Menu brightness 0 0 1 0 Saturation Menu saturation 0 0 1 0 Gradation Button shade gradation 0 0 1 0 Left handed None Left handed support _ Mouse swaps left and right mouse buttons and or J Shift amp Ctrl lt shift gt and lt ctrl gt All keys or all of these Dynamic viewing Presets Synch viewing Icon Caps lock r Meta key Shift key Control key Shift Ctrl keys Actions Current mode r Wireframe mode Free edge mode F Left mouse Rotation X Z Pe Rotation XYZ Pr Rotation XYZ Middle Translation Translation re Translation Right Zoom Up re Zoom Up tye re Zoom Up tye z Scroll Factor 1 Scroll age 20 Sets the factor to zoom in el j and out by using the mouse 5 wheel in graphics windows Zoom Factor 1 Cursor ag 20 Sets the factor to zoom in 77 Mm and out when using lt shift gt 5 or lt
314. mber of the model you want to check the existence of Return type TRUE if the model exists otherwise FALSE Example To check if a model n exists var exists Model Exists n GetFromID model number integer static Description Returns the Model object for a model ID or null if model does not exist Page J 61 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments number of the model you want the Model object for Return type Model object or null if model does not exist Example To get the model n var model Model GetFromID n HighestID static Description Returns the ID of the highest model currently being used Arguments No arguments Return type ID of highest model currently being used Example To get the highest model ID var id Model HighestID Total static Description Returns the total number of models Arguments No arguments Return type integer Example To find how many models there are in T HIS var num Model Total Page J 62 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Operate class The Operate class gives you access to the built in curve operations in T HIS More Class functions Abs Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Acos Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Acu Input Curve Curve Offset float Time Period float Output Curve optional Curve Ad Input Curve Curve Output Curve o
315. ment ies es es pz 2 Dsplacement hes Ives yes DM Displacement Magnitude yes pes ies Wx ix verein ies ge ies vy fy Vetosty ies des es v pos k M ves yes va Veto maenna ies ies ies far Accolertion yes M yes ar beea hes ME he AZ Acceleration ges h yes AM Acceleration Magnitude yes pes ies ex konm B ies er rcon Sd es ies ez forim GE es xo feron SS pes ifs RY o vroin bes yes RZ feromon IRM Rotation Magniude Dj pe ies Page A 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 X Rotational Velocity Y Rotational Velocity Z Rotational Velocity on Magi Frequency Domain Analysis For a steady state dynamic analysis SSD the following nodal data components are available For each data component both amplitude and phase angle data components are available d3thdt Z Velocity z BE 34 T T p O 34 C T ps velocity es es es 34 o ee Z Acceleration For a random vibration analysis PSD the following nodal data components are available al a Lo Br EEE un m d3thdt a a a Ei ee ca ae a Zi SEE ib v B OO Dm Displacement Magniude lyes es x o fava Sides SS wy frvetociy ides es vz eNelocty ides Sd esd va Veto Magnitude yes es Ax Acceleration Sides EA bs v v B Y Acceleration Z Acceleration Acceleration Magnitude Only nodes that have been declared in nodal time history blocks wi
316. mines 10 Click to add You can add any number of variables to watch To remove one right click on the variable and select Remove quickwatch from the popup If a variable exists and has been assigned to then the value is displayed e g mines in the following example If the variable exists but it has not yet had a value assigned its value is the undefined value e g pos in the following example If the variable does not exist the value is shown as invalid e g fred in the following example a mines 10 n undefined pos undefined fred invalid Click to add The call stack The call stack shows which functions have been called in the script to get to the current point It is the middle left window in JaDe Page M 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS allocate_mines minesw start_game minesweeper js 160 lt main gt minesweeper js 65 a TE The top line shows the function that the script is currently paused at The other lines show the calling functions in order The above example can be read as 1 The script starts 2 On line 65 in script file minesweeper js in the main program the function start_game is called 3 On line 160 in script file minesweeper js in function start_game the function allocate_mines is called 4 On line 114 in script file minesweeper js in function allocate_mines the script is paused This information is sometimes very useful in more complicated scripts to
317. mmand line see Section 5 5 2 for more details Page 5 44 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 5 1 Interactive Curve Editing T HIS After a curve has been selected it is displayed using a thicker line to highlight it in any graphs that it is visible in As well as being highlighted the curve points can be edited interactively and the Quick Pick menu in the main Tool Bar see Section 6 1 for more details is replaced with the EDIT menu 5 5 1 1 Modify LGOS LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLED TEST Velocity D es Pn i I I I I I 0 075 0 075 0 075 0 075 0 076 0 076 0 076 0 076 Time Vel mag Node 1343 Modify Drag X Y r Edit Points Modify Drag X Y Insert Between a Delete Point gt Locate Restart Save Overwrite Save Highest used 1 Quit Mosify Drag X Y Drag X Y Drag X Drag Y Page 5 45 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Drag Modify the point nearest to the screen pick by dragging it s X Y position in both the X and Y axis directions Drag X Drag a point in the X axis direction only Drag Y Drag a point in the Y axis direction only 5 5 1 2 Insert Insert Between Between At Cursor Split segment At Start At End Between Finds the nearest segment to the point selected on the screen and then projects the point onto the segment At Cursor Finds the nearest segment to the point selected on the screen and then inserts the a
318. mpt for a list of all available dialogue Using help box commands The following commands are available SET Curve options are READ e 1 1 2 2 WRITE DEFAULT LA Set a curve label FIX TE Set a curve title GM XL Set a curve x axis label YL Set a curve y axis label TA Set a curve tag End of text i3 if ve H DIALOGUE This option allows the user to set the style properties for individual curves Enter the curve number e g 1 for curve 1 at the Select Curve command prompt 1 T HIS will prompt the user to input the desired style properties in the order white Colour Enter the colour for the line Line Width Enter the desired line width for normal the line Line Style Enter the desired line style e g solid dashed for the line Symbol Type Enter the desired Symbol Type Symbol Frequency Enter the desired frequency of the symbols in the format triangle READ This option allows the user to read a style file containing style information and apply that style to a particular curve Enter the name of the style file at the Style File command prompt WRITE This option allows the user to write a style file containing style information DEFAULT This option allows the user to reset all the curve styles to the default settings Page 5 55 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 FIX This is an ON OFF switch which resets the curve styles when they are plot
319. n local N IC MIC IT IST IT e Sea Bel Belt id plalstic ef t hickness olna vM oJ M zo 5 3 Io gt D Mjn SEIlZlZele JABE Zlo 2 jo oo l2 F N im 215 al Slo 2 5 la I 5 2 1412 gjs 3 Is I 5182 5 gt verage strain ffective plastic strain oment in X oment in XY ear force in Y ormal force in X ormal force in Y ormal force in XY hickness nternal energy density xtra data m lt lt ee lt fr Er er m lt I a el E ef o o o i y y ME el User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Slipring Sip__ __ Slipring id plullout ull through U vj op tress in YZ AX principal stress IN principal stress AX shear stress op Ke dr in x lt szlz in D 2 in o g iD un 2 gt 3 N I lt x IN IS gt lt op IN I lt LX IN IS PX N I lt x N J lt x I lt Io N I lt x IN XS Ix wo lt N I lt x IN XS x m gt verage stress Pressure train in XX train in YY train in ZZ train in XY train in YZ ffective plastic strain xtra data force Zforce DD orce Magnitude oment in X oment in Z oment Magnitude StraininXX O in XX train in YY train in ZZ train in XY train in YZ rain in ZX ective Stress tress in YY tress in XY tress in YZ ress in ZX moothing Length i D Oo 5 Q kel 2 7 mi
320. n optional Extension to filter by Page J 134 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Return type Array of filenames strings or null if cancel pressed Example To select multiple files using extension key var files Window GetFiles key Getlnteger title string message string initial optional integer static Description Map a window allowing you to input an integer OK and Cancel buttons are shown Arguments Message to show in window initial optional Initial value Return type value input integer or null if cancel pressed Example To create an input window with title Input and message Input integer and return the value input var value Window GetInteger Input Input integer GetNumberttitle string message string initial optional float static Description Map a window allowing you to input a number OK and Cancel buttons are shown Arguments Message to show in window initial optional Initial value Return type value input float or null if cancel pressed Example To create an input window with title Input and message Input number and return the value input var value Window GetNumber Input Input number Page J 135 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 GetString title string message string initial optional string static Description Map a window allowing you to input a string OK and Cancel buttons are sh
321. n be used to read in a file containing DATUM line definitions that has previously been saved All DATUM lines must have a unique acronym When the file is read the user had to the choice to 1 Delete any existing DATUM line definitions before the file is read If a DATUM line in the file being read has the same acronym as an existing DATUM line then the existing definition will be overwritten If a DATUM line in the file being read has the same acronym as an existing DATUM line then the new definition in the file will be ignored The preference option Datum Lines List Create Read Save Apply Filename v Delete all current DATUM before reading file Overwrite exiting DATUM with matching ACRONYMs _ Ignore new DATUM with matching ACRONYMs this datum file C datum this001 dtm can also be used to define a default file containing DATUM line definitions that is read automatically when T HIS starts see Appendix H for more details 5 24 4 Save This option can be used to save any DATUM line definitions to a file so that they can be reloaded and used in future T HIS sessions Page 5 132 tatu tines MIX List Create Read Save Apply Filename AthisOO1 dtm User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 Other Options 6 1 Tool Bar File Graphs Plotting Functions Display Images Options Blank T HIS i ia The tool bar is located across the top of the main T HIS wind
322. n both ELOUT and ELOUTDET data components By default T HIS uses the data from ELOUTDET as ELOUT only contains a subset of the data in ELOUDET In some versions of LS DYNA it is possible to change the Shell and ThickShell data components written to the ELOUT so that they are defined using the Global coordinate system see EOCS on CONTROL_OUTPUT instead of the default local element coordinate system If this option is used then only the ELOUT file is modified the ELOUDET file is still written using the local element coordinate system If T HIS detects that the LSDA file contains both ELOUT and ELOUDET and that they are using different coordinate systems then T HIS will display an additional option can be used to force T HIS to use the ELOUT file data instead of the ELOUTDET data Through Thickness Integration Points surfaces layers Unlike the THF file the LSDA file can contain different numbers of integration points for each element This means that if Top surface is selected T HIS can correctly identify which integration point it needs to read data from By default strain tensors are only written out for the top and bottom surfaces and T HIS averages these for the mid surface values In recent versions of LS DYNA the parameter INTOUT on the DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY card can change this so that strain tensor values are written out for all the through thickness integration points T HIS does not currently support these additional values Page A
323. n parentheses All of the commands in the GLOBAL MENU can also be accessed via the PLOTTING button at the top of the graphics window 4 1 Page Number If T HIS contains more than one graph see section 3 1 then the graphs can be positioned on seperate Pages within T HIS This menu can be used to select a specific page or it can be used to step through the pages one by one Shortcut Key baba Goto Page 1 Home ja Go back 1 Page Page Up Goto Page n N A a Go back 1 Page Page Down a Goto Page 32 End 4 2 PLOT PL This option will plot all the curves that are currently UNBLANKED see Section 5 Page 4 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 4 3 POINT PT When selected this option waits for the user to pick a point in the main graphics screen Pick Screen Point s Once a point has been picked the lt x gt and lt y gt Curve 1 Internal energy Airbag 1 values of the point picked are reported along with as the ID of the nearest curve and the nearest point Nearest Point 0 0781994 11900125 on that curve 1 Point Number 1000 il E After a point has been selected on the screen the J slider may be used to move to other points along 783 the same curve 4 4 CLEAR CL Clears the graphics screen 4 5 ZOOM ZM The cursor appears on the screen and may be used to select the required plot area by choosing opposite corners of a box The graphs are then replotted Using ZOOM implicitly turns au
324. n the plot The default is OFF The Grid Width can be used to change the width of the grid and axis lines de grid on turns grid lines on de grid off turns grid lines off de grid th 2sets the grid thickness to 2 pixels The default grid width and visibility can be specified in the preferences file see Appendix H for more details 5 16 5 AXIS Axis P Width r Colour V Draw Top Axis IW Draw Right Axis The Axis Width can be used to change the width of the axis lines The COLOUR button can be used to change the colour of the axis lines see Section 5 6 2 for details on the available colours Draw Top Axis This option can be used to turn on and off the display of the graphs top axis Draw Right AxisThis option can be used to turn on and off the display of the graphs right hand axis The default axis width can be specified in the preferences file see Appendix H for more details The default settings for these 2 options cna also be specified in the preferences file see Appendix H for more details 5 16 6 BORDER Border v P Width P Colour This is an ON OFF switch which determines whether or not a border is drawn round the plot The default is ON The Border Width can be used to change the width of the border The COLOUR button can be used to change the colour of the border see Section 5 6 2 for details on the available colours 5 16 7 FIX LINE STYLES FixStyles _ This is an ON OFF switch which resets the curve styles when
325. n value Example Temporarily disable the plotting of curves within graphs DisableUpdate EnableUpdate static Description Re enable the plotting of curves within graphs Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Page J 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example Re enable the plotting of curves within graphs EnableUpdate ErrorMessage string Any valid javascript type static Description Print an error message to the dialogue box adding a carriage return Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to print Return type No return value Example To print the title of model object m as an error to the dialogue box ErrorMessage The title is m title Exit static Description Exit script Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example Exit with Exit GetFtcefVar name string static Description Get the value of aFAST TCE variable Page J 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments The FAST TCF variable name case independent Return type String containing variable value or null if variable does not exist Example To get the value for FAST TCF variable Job var job_name GetFtcfVar Job Getenv name string static Description Get the value of an environment variable Arguments name string The environment variable name Return type String contai
326. name will be used instead For example the line name Colour By Model Will result in the script appearing with the name Colour By Model in tha Javascript panel This does not affect the actual name of the script only the name on its library button Using the memory comment at the top of a script to change the required memory Sometimes the memory required for garbage collection needs to be changed If the string memory is found in the first ten lines of the script then the size given will be used for the memory unless the size in the memory textbox is larger than this value For example the line memory 50 Will result in the script using 50Mb for garbage collection memory 5 23 3 Running a Javascript in batch mode All the above assumes that Javascripts will be run interactively from the user interface however it is also possible to run a script in batch mode using the command line interface The relevant command line commands are JAVASCRIPT COMPILE Compiles and checks the script but does not run it EXECUTE Re compiles and runs the script MEMORY lt nnn gt Resets the Garbage Collection threshold to lt nnn gt MBytes To run a Javascript from batch these commands need to be placed in a command file and run using the command line cf command filename option For example the command file might be some other commands JAVA EXEC my script js some further commands And the command line re
327. nces Page 6 19 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page 6 20 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 FAST TCF FAST TCF CONTENTS 7 0 Overview 7 1 Introduction 7 2 Page Graph layout and selection 7 3 Input syntax to load other files 7 4 Input for data extraction requests 7 5 Units 7 6 Curve Tags 7 1 Curve Groups 7 8 Performing curve operations 7 9 Applying extra options to data requests 7 10 Setting properties for curves 7 12 Image Output options 7 13 Tabulation and presenter var options 7 14 FAST TCE Curve Output 7 15 FAST TCE additional 7 0 FAST TCF OVERVIEW FAST TCE is a scripting language for T HIS It is designed to be editable and backward compatible with previous versions of T HIS From version 9 2 FAST TCF scripts can be recorded and played back in T HIS The FAST TCF scripts are plain text files and are therefore easy to edit and manipulate 7 0 1 NEW FEATURES New Features for FAST TCF version 11 0 Version 11 of T HIS contains the following new FAST TCF commands e Support for DISBOUT data component e Support for PLLYOUT data components e style m command for setting curve styles by model New Features for FAST TCF version 10 0 Version 10 of T HIS contains the following new FAST TCF commands Support for TRHIST data components Support for CPM_SENSOR data components e New wildcard options for specifying curve tags e Quputting a range of curv
328. nd op mul 4 5 tag new_curve would multiply the curve tagged as 4 by the number 5 not by the curve tagged as 5 To avoid this limitation you will need to tag your curves using either the syntax explained above or by specifying a tag in the curve file 7 6 2 Tagging multiple curve outputs From version 9 2 onwards multiple curve outputs can be generated from one FAST TCF input line Curve tags and labels can be specified for multiple curves using the following special syntax note this only works on multiple curves e If the user specifies a wildcard in the tag or label a then FAST TCF will substitute the wildcard for the number of the curve outputted starting from 1 e If the user specifies a then the entity ID is substituted in its place which is useful if the user knows what entities are expected on output e g node 5 last accel mag tag node lab Head Accn node IDs 5 to last accel mag tags node_1 node_2 etc labels Head Accn 1 Head Accn 2 etc node 10 20 accel mag tag node lab Head Accn nodes 10 to 20 accel mag tags node_10 node_11 etc labels Head Accn 10 Head Accn 11 etc Page 7 27 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 7 6 3 Using Wildcards A number of T HIS functions and operations can be applied to multiple curves in a single command by specifying multiple curve tags using wildcards From version 10 0 onwards the following wildcards are supported a e
329. nd other required files OA ADMIN XX Users wishing to separate configuration and installation directories will be able to do so by making use of the new top levelOA_ADMIN xx directory Page L 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Installation Examples The following diagrams illustrate how the installation might be organised in various different scenarios a Single user installation on one machine There is no need to worry about separating administration and installation directories and the default installation of all files in and below the single installation directory will suffice OA_INSTALL_xx It is suggested that the xx version suffix of OA INSTALL xx is used in order to keer all files parallel installations of different releases of the Oassys Ltd software separate on the machine b A few machines on a small network each user has his own machine The top level administration directory can be Central server installed on a network server possibly also locating the manuals centrally OA_ADMIN_xx Manuals top Each user s machine has its own installation z s level oa_pref file directory to give good performance but there is no need to manage home or temporary directories centrally since each user owns his machine If network performance is good an alternative would be to install executables on the central server meaning that local OA_INSTALL directories are not required
330. ning variable value or null if variable does not exist Example To get the value for environment variable HOME var home Getenv HOME Message string Any valid javascript type static Description Print a message to the dialogue box adding a carriage return Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to print Return type No return value Example To print the title of model object m as a message to the dialogue box Message The title is m title Page J 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 MilliSleep time integer static Description Pause execution of the script for time milliseconds See also SleepQ Arguments Number of milliseconds to pause for Return type No return value Example To pause for 500 milliseconds MilliSleep 500 NumberToString number integer float width integer static Description Formats a number to a string with the specified width Arguments integer float The number you want to format The width of the string you want to format it to must be less than 80 Return type String containing the number Example To write the number 1 2345e 6 to a string 10 characters wide var str NumberToString 1 2345e 6 10 Plot static Description Updates all the T HIS graphs Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Page J 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example Upda
331. nit Y Axis Unit Setting the Unit System for a Curve If the unit system for a curve has not been defined then it will be A p l displayed as Undefined and a popup menu will be available that Undefined U1 m kg 5 SI can be used to select the correct unit system If the selected unit system is different to the unit system currently being used to display U2 mm T s results then the curve values will automatically be converted to the current display unit system U3 mm kg ns Note Once the unit system for a curve has been defined it can not U4 mm gm ms be changed US ft slug s UB m T s Page 5 121 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Setting the Axis Units for a Curve The X and Y axis units of a curve can be defined or changed at any time The popup menu contains all of the Moment per Unit Yidth basic Unit types that T HIS knows about plus an option to setup a user defined unit Force per Unit Width To create a user defined unit for a curve the unit should be User Defined defined in terms of it s basic properties The values for mass length time angle and temperature should be E the powers that are used to describe the unit in terms of it s om fundamental dimensions Some examples of common units defined using this method 1 00 are shown below Foo E isplacement Velocit Page 5 122 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 23 The Javascript Interface 5 2
332. nt point 6 integration points points lt 9 Shell 3 has 9 Incorrect 6th Warning message as Correct int point Correct int point 9 integration points integration point int points lt 6 9 In plane Integration Points In some versions of LS DYNA it is now possible to write out data for all 4 in plane integration points for fully integrated shells by setting MAXINT on the DATABASE EXTENT_BINARY card to a ve number For example specifying a value of 8 will generate data for 8 layers each with 4 in plane integration points If this option is used then all the elements will be written out using this option regardless of whether they are fully integrated or not As there is no information in the THF to indicate that data for 4 in plane integration points has been written to the file then the file format will be exactly the same as for an analysis with a ve value of MAXINT 4 times larger For example MAXINT 8 and MAXINT 32 will both produce THF files with 32 integration points worth of data and there is no way for T HIS to know which value of MAXINT was used to generate the data The ZTF file generated by PRIMER can help to resolve this problem If multiple in plane integration points are written to the THF file then they are written in the following order Page A 11 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Layer in plane int point 1 Layer 2 in plane int point 1 Layer n in plane int point 1 Layer in plane
333. o read in data from from Read Data X NASTRAN PCH files LS DYNA Groups Keyword T HIS Curve Bulk Data Keyboard CSY Screen ISO a j DlAdem NASTRAN v Filename E PHASE _MAG 2dof_mt pch _ Search Directories Recursively pch Output Curve highest 1 Options Filter Currently the following types and data components are supported along with the SORT1 SORT2 and XYPUNCH file formats Nodal D isplacements CBAR Element Forces Cot AD sme Foro By default T HIS will read in every curve that is finds in the file so if you read in a file containing nodal displacements from a SORT2 format file you will end up with 12 curves being produced in T HIS for each node X Y Z translation Real Magnitude X Y Z translation Imaginary Phase angle X Y Z rotational Real Magnitude X Y Z rotational Imaginary Phase angle Page 5 27 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 The Options button will display the following menu that will allow some components to be deselected before reading the file Read Data Wn Vudu Complex For complex data components written out as a pair of real and imaginary numbers or as a magnitude and Data phase angle either of the components can be deselected Nodal Data For nodal data any of the 4 data types can be deselected along with any of the 6 translational rotational directions Element For element forces each individual element type
334. o that illustrated The number of each type of item in the model and the sources T HIS found for that item type s data will be shown The user can select which file type is preferred for the data for each type of item see Preferences Prefix This menu can also be used to define a user defined model prefix This prefix can be added automatically to the start of curve labels to help identify which model they belong to Page 5 42 Model Manager Select Re Read Delete Convert Bino Show Model Titles AX All Models W 1 ARUP GENERIC SLED MODEL CRUSH TUBE FT ARUP DUMMIES OASYS VEHICLE PR Prefix THF d3thdt XTF xtfile LSDA binout ASCII Global Parts Nodes Solids Beams Shells Tk Shells Stonewalls Springs Seatbelts Retractors Sliprings Contacts Reactions Airbags Model Manager M1 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 gx ut z new_lg09 thf new_lg09 xtf O O a O XTF LSDA ASCII 1 1 110 110 19 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 100 107 107 107 1 1 2 2 2 11 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 4 2 Re Read The re read option can be used to rescan and update the model This will find any new data written to disk since the file was last read 5 4 3 Delete This option allows the user to select and delete models from T HIS Any curves that have been read in from a model that is deleted are NOT deleted with t
335. odal false then the user can still use other functions in T HIS If omitted the window will be modal Note that making a window modal will stop interaction in all other windows and may prevent operations such as picking from working in any macros that are run from scripts Page J 139 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Return type No return value Example To show window w w Show To show window w allowing the user to use other functions in T HIS w Show false TopBorder static Description Returns the position of the top border in range 0 1 This can be used to help position windows on the screen Arguments No arguments Return type float in range 0 1 Example To obtain the position of the top border var b Window TopBorder UpdateGUI static Description Force GUI to be updated This function is not normally needed but if you are doing a computationally expensive operation and want to update the GUI it may be necessary as the GUI update requests are cached until there is spare time to update them Calling this function forces any outstanding requests to be flushed Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To force update of GUI Window UpdateGUI Warning title string warning string buttons optional constant static Description Show a warning message in a window Page J 140 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS
336. ode 1345 LGOS LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLED TEST I d4 l F I Acceleration F r 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 Time Accel mag Node 1343 Accel mag Node 1345 Accel mag Node 1544 Page 5 93 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 on LG03 LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLED TEST This format turns OFF the 1 20 display of the graph legend and maximises the plotting area by not showing any line 1 00 labels Any text entered using the USER LINES option will be ignored in this plotting 0 80 mode I I I 0 60 0 40 Acceleration 0 20 0 00 E6 0 20 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 Time Floating LGOS LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLED TEST This format maximises the 1 20 plotting area and positions the Accel mag Node 1343 F ARS OR AR 1 00 Accel mag Node 1344 Accel mag Node 1345 0 80 0 60 0 40 Acceleration 0 20 0 00 E6 0 20 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 06 0 09 0 10 Time The size of the legend can be modified by clicking with the Accel mag Node 1343 left mouse button on the legend border corner and Accel mag Node 1344 dragging Accel mag Node 1345 The legend can also be moved by clicking with the left mouse button inside the legend and dragging Drag and Release Page 5 94 User manual Version 12 0 October
337. off by toggling the Add Units button B i ee Axis Type V Linear _ Logarithmic AXIS LIMITS Grid Spacing W Automatic _ User Defined Interval The minimum and maximum x axis values can be controlled using a combination of the Off i set text box and the popup menu opposite Units W Add Exponent to Label Autoscale Format Automatic x The axis values will be set to the maximum and minimum values of all the Decimal Places 3 EJ curves that are currently being plotted TEF Font Default x The axis limit is set to the user defined Size Automatic Y value specified in the text box If the curves are translated of scaled Colour Foreground y dynamically the limit will be reset Note The global command AUTOSCALE see Section 4 5 will reset the minimum and maximum values to AUTO AXIS TYPE The x axis can be switched between a Linear or Logarithmic scale If a Logarithmic scale is selected a warning will be generated if an attempt is made to plot points that have ve or zero X values and the points will be skipped GRID SPACING By default T HIS will automatically set the grid line intervals for the x axis when the grid is tuned on see Section 5 16 6 If the GRID option is changed from Automatic to Manual a grid Interval and Offset my be specified If the Interval is set to 0 1 and the Offset to 0 02 then grid lines will be produced at 0 02 0 12 0 22 Page 5 88 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS UNITS Units V A
338. oft EXCEL The columns written are x values for the 1st selected curve y values for the 1st selected curve x values for the 2nd selected curve y values for the 2nd selected curve Page 5 30 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS CSV This option 5 X Y Y Y Y Y also ne Time Values Use Curve y out a CSV ank GelectCuve i curves are output using a single consistent set of X values that can either Start Time allzu Interval Kell be taken from one of the curves or they can be generated automatically Time Values Generate y Summary Gives a summary of the curve This includes the type of data being plotted and the maximum and minimum values in the curve Summary CSV CSV comma separated variable vesrion of the summary file From version 9 4 onwards the CSV files generated by T HIS can also contain information on the UNIT Output Format CSV RYAN Y system and the X and Y axis units for each curve If V Write UNIT information to CSV file you don t want to output this information then you can turn it off The default setting for this option can be set via the preference option this write_csv_units This option can also be turned on and off in FAST TCE scripts see section 7 XX 5 2 2 WRITE TO SCREEN Output Type Write to screen x Writes data to a text window on the screen 5 2 2 1 OUTPUT FORMAT List Summary Scan LIST This option will write out all the points in the selected cu
339. olution output options Background images Extended colour palette plus user defined colours Enhanced FAST TCE options Curve Groups New Curve Correlation Function Setting File Added support for shell and solid strain data components from LSDA file Added support for Airbag Part data components from LSDA file New Features for version 9 2 Description New menu interface Page 0 2 Manual Section 7 4 5 amp Appendix A 17 Manual Section Nn n N Nn O oo BAR of N N yoy lo lo NID Nn n EN po oO u ut NIN vw Im afa EN SI 1 N 3 endix A 25 Fi endix A l endix A 4 endix B i Appendix A 5 amp Appendix A 7 7 4 5 amp Appendix A 16 Manual Section W n User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Read MODEL data User defined preferences for LS DYNA data sources Multiple Models Enhanced FAST TCE scripting all data components and T HIS curve functions MACRO Functions Automatic FAST TCF Script Generation Interactive FAST TCF playback Right click curve operations from within graphics window Enhanced interactive control of graph fonts colours and text size Embedded preference editor Extended oa_pref options New Features for version 9 0 Description Graphics Box Options and Screen Layout Multiple Data Component Selection Improved Curve Operations New Maths Commands LOG x LOG10 x Show HIC 3ms Clip New Automo
340. omatic groups Curve Group 5 Curves that belong to an automatic curve group are highlighted in yellow The name of an automatic curve group can be changed Select Curve s Apply Cancel Visible Page Fitter None Pick Visible All Listed Show Groups CURVE LIST er TMT Cit a Mone bose ATP ETIS ee TT ENS Me Peter oT Oop A Oe Tost Tene SE 4 M1 Vel x Node 1343 Pelvis 3 M1 Vel x Node 1344 6 M1 Vel x Node 1345 Chest 7 M1 Accel x Node 1343 Pelvis 0 M1 Accel x Node 1344 9 M1 Accel x Node 1345 Chest Page 5 110 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 19 3 Automatic Automatic Curve Group Settings By default T HIS will automatically create a pone curve group for each model that is read in and Create groups automatically based on will add any curves read in from that model into the curve group v Model ID This option can be used to create other m Entity Type automatic curve groups _ Component Name using component _J component_entity_type _ Curve File Index Update Groups Model ID The default one group is created for each model Entity Type This option will create one group for each Entity type Modal Node Solid etc that data is read from If data is read from multiple models then a single group for each entity type will be created containing curves from multiple models
341. omatic x Colour Foreground 7 Layout _ Column List v Auto Sor _ Floating I _ 1 Column v 2 Columns _ 3 Columns Background Colour 0 Transparency 100 r User Lines VW Display Lines Size Reset automatic y automatic y automatic y automatic y automatic y automatic y Font Default Colour Foreground 7 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 15 5 2 Layout T HIS has 4 different plotting formats as described below The number of columns used to display the curve legends can also be set between 1 amp 3 When multiple columns are used curve labels will automatically be truncated to fit the available space Column List default This format fixes the size of the plotting area The maximum number of curve legends that can be displayed will depend on the font family and size selected by the user and the number of columns If any USER LINES have been defined then the area used to display the legend will be reduced so that the text does not cover the Automatic This format automatically adjusts the plot size to maximise the plotting area while still showing a maximum of 18 line labels Any text entered using the USER LINES option will be ignored in this plotting mode LGOS LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLED TEST 1 20 0 60 0 40 Acceleration E6 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 Time Accel mag Node 1343 Accel mag Node 1544 Accel mag N
342. on Pure Butterworth Filter Arguments X axis interval optional If defined then T HIS will automatically regularise the curve using this value first Return type Curve object or NULL Example Filter curve m using a cut off of 400Hz and order 2 and output as curve p Regularise the input curve using an interval of 0 0001 first p Operate Pbut m 400 0 2 0 0001 Power Input Curve Curve Power float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Raise to the power Page J 90 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Raise the Y axis values for curve m to the power 2 5 and store as curve p p Operate Power m 2 5 Rave Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate rolling average of a curve Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate rolling average of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Rave m Rec Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate reciprocal Arguments Page J 91 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate receprocal of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Rec m Reg Input Curve Curve X axis interval float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Regularise X axis intervals for a curve Arguments New X axis int
343. on a tick box sets the status for all the selected curves K E Whole Model LE Whole Model E EEE As well as blanking and unblanking curves in graphs a number of other options can be applied to selected curves by right clicking on them LE Y hole Model s ISHRUN1 2 Model KE Whole Model Eitest CRUSHIRUND 3 Model Maina LE Whole Model test CRUSHIRUNZ Cee 9 to Group Delete K E Whole Model E test CRUSHIRUNS 5 LE Whole Model E test CRUSHIRUNS 4 Model 4 9 KE Whole Model EitestiCRUSHIRUNG 5 Model Line Width 5 1 2 Model Colour 10 1E Whole Model Eitest CRUSHIRUNd Model ne Style 11 Disp mag Node 100 E ttest CRUSHIBASE Node Disp mag Node 100 E test CRUSHIRUNI Node 7777 Symbol Dismiss The viewing options popup can be used to control which columns of data are displayed and what items are displayed in the curve table By default all 8 columns of information will be displayed y each column can be turned on and off but T HIS will ensure that at least one column is always displayed The columns that are initially displayed can be specified in the preference file see Appendix H Save to pref for more details If the columns are changed then Save to Pref can be used to update the preference file Page 5 37 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Display Display All ttems This option can be used to control how
344. onds Page 5 118 Models Labels Curves Undefined x Model x 1 000000 1 000000 Show 1 000000 Unknown Model Titles x v x v ke Ig09 Large Test 9 Belted sled test User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS In addition to specifying a unit system for each model a separate unit system can also be selected to use to display results If the model unit system and the display unit system are different then T HIS will automatically calculate the correct factors to apply to the X and Y axis as the curve data is read from the file All curves are stored inside T HIS using the currently defined Display unit system 5 22 2 Labels This option will display the labels that will be used for each of the built in units Each Unit System has it s own set of labels which can be modified if required The default labels for each unit system are shown below Page 5 119 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 eee m str Work mJ fbf Ko E EN E lt ER Displacement m mm pm m t e Velocity ms mm s m ms m ms ts o ms peceleralian nis Imi mms mins h h Rotation o Rotation _ Badia Badians Radian Bagians Badias Badane Badans Rotational Velocit Radians s Rotational Pasiansis ans ers cores EEE a CIC d OF DE de Area _____ r a a mmi2 Bali Volume 4S mm3 mm3 mt a ee CT D Mass 723 Momentum kgms Tmms
345. onents displayed will automatically update to show the components for all the V Model KE Model I E V Node Disp mag curves that are currently stored in T HIS In the example opposite only curves that are either Model Kinetic Energy or Nodal Displacement Magnitudes are displayed Include Include Curves and Group By default the curve table contains both curves and curve groups This option can be J Curves Only used to display either just the curves only or just the curve groups J Groups Only 5 3 5 Summary Displays a window from which a group of curves may be chosen The maximum and minimum values of the selected curves are then displayed 5 3 6 List Displays a LIST CURVES window from which a number of curves may be selected The data point values for the selected curves are then listed in a listing box Page 5 40 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 3 7 Scan Displays a window from which a group of curves may be chosen The maximum and minimum values of the selected curves are then displayed 5 3 8 CURVE RANGE SELECTION The range buttons in the Curve Control menu can be used to when you are working with more than 1000 curves to move between groups of 1000 curves Pressing the green tab will display the next group of 1000 curves in the menu whilst pressing the red tab will display the previous group of 1000 curves Alternatively pressing the Select button will bring up the follo
346. ont itransparenc Mi teger 0 100 colour Page 7 35 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 jo cial a smaximum_fon summary smaximum as maximum _ properties curves curve 1 curve 2 en Page 7 36 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 11 Defining Datums 7 11 1 Creating Datum Definitions The following options can be used to setup DATUM definitions keyword second word Mt startdatum Starts a Datum definition Specifies the datum acronym label label Specifestie datumlabe o type Defines the datum as a constant x value Defines the datum as a constant y value Defined the datum as a set of x y points num_points points Specifies the number of points used to define a datum followed by pairs of x y values x1 y1 y2 y2 label fon Define the font used to display the label Above Centre Position label at centre above line Above Left Position label on left above line Above Right Position label on right above line Below Centre Position label at centre below line Below Left Position label on left below line end datum Endsa Datum definition SS y yO Each DATUM definition must start with a start_datum keyword and end with a end_datum keyword Any lines between a start_datum and end_datum keyword that do not form part of a datum definition are ignored The following creates a DATUM definition at Y 1000 0 with a label Hic Limit the area below the line is fill
347. ontains a No Change option EE No Change 5 6 6 CURVE PALETTE By default T HIS uses 6 colours White Red Green Blue Cyan and p Magenta for any curves that have not had a colour explicitly defined Default Default 6 for them Curves 1 7 13 will be White 2 8 14 will be Red Extended 1 3 This option can be used to change the default number of colours T HIS uses No Grey 27 Full 30 user The default value for the curve palette can also be specified in the preferences file see Appendix H for more details 5 6 7 MODIFYING LABELS Line Label Search I UNDO Replace Multiple curve labels may be edited using the Search and Replace option to enter the string to search for and the string to replace it with can be used to insert text at the beginning of a label while can be used to append to the end of a label The table below shows the effect of 2 search and replace examples Original Label Displacement N1034 Search String Modified Label Displacement Node 1034 The GO button will initiate the search and replace on all the curves that are currently selected highlighted in the bottom half of the menu while the UNDO button can be used to reset the labels to what they were before the search and replace Page 5 53 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 ee Line Label LineLabel being modified to be swapped between the Line Label X Axis Label and the Y Axis Label x Axis Label L
348. ontains any warnings or errors that FAST TCF has detected Make sure nothing is obviously wrong with the input file using this report file e The input_file tmp or input_file output file contains the actual file inputted into FAST TCF after includes have been found and special characters removed Check this is correct and all the include files have been accounted for Identifying if FAST TCF is processing the line correctly e It s possible that FAST TCF has processed the line incorrectly If so open the input_file tcf or input_file output file to investigate what FAST TCF is asking T HIS to do e Identify which line is going wrong using the above procedure and then find this section in the tcf file Input the entire tcf request for the line into the T HIS command box to step through what is being asked from T HIS This may highlight where things are going wrong The command lines contain special characters such as r m and l These are used internally in T HIS and should be ignored by the user Using Primer to check a FAST TCF file Primer has a FAST TCF check menu under the main check menu This can be used to check the FAST TCF file data requests against a certain keyword deck e Read the deck into Primer and select MODEL gt CHECK gt CHECK FAST TCF FILE Select the FAST TCF file and press APPLY Details can be found in section 3 9 of the Primer manual e Primer will highlight any errors that have occurred with the input file with regar
349. or the purposes of calculation During the collision the Axial Force Fz can be in either tension or compression whilst the occipital condyle bending moment Mocy can be in either flexion or extension This results in 4 possible loading conditions corresponding to the 4 curves output by T HIS tension extension Nte tension flexion Ntf compression extension Nce and compression flexion Ncf At each point in time only one of these 4 conditions can be met hence the NIJ value is calculated for that condition and the value for the other 3 conditions is considered a value of zero The expression for calculating each NIJ loading condition is given by NIJ Fz Fzc Mocy Myc where Fz and Mocy are as defined above Fzc and Myc refer to the axial force and Bending moment critical values given below The values of Fzc and Myc vary depending on the occupant the occupants position and the sign of Fz and Mocy For the dummy to pass the test the following conditions must be met i None of the 4 NIJ values may exceed 1 0 at any time during the event ii Peak Tension Force Fz measured at the upper neck load cell may not exceed the specific dummy s limit e g 2070N for the Hybrid III small female at any time iii Peak Compression Force Fz measured at the upper neck load cell may not exceed the specific dummy s limit e g 2520N for the Hybrid III small female at any time For more information on the use and calculation of N
350. ords Image output Page 7 44 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS The available image output options are ower po BE word word bit bmp filename aeh i zene page all current Gene l n ge filename ze active in page all current Ge l n filename ati ae Generate an imag n ive page all current Genere ln age Bitmap 8 bit Bitmap 8 bit uncompressed v 3 a z filename arap i active m page all current i age ach pa the current Fay a um s Bitmap 24 bit bit24 filename all active ll gt cont N ir vial bmp24 n f graphs graph number n page all current Gener n image gt ach pa the current n e number r ppm pix filename a y plaane jenerate an i onta page all current Generate an image for eac n ge pi number n jpg jpeg filename aan ae jenerate age conta Im ne page all current Generate an image for n age page number n png24 filename zu active page all current ne in image for e n 19 age number n filename Lee active Gene n image cc Im et page all current Generate an ima n gt numbe wc ae Generate an image conte ta 3 ERE 7 5 Q S A N o A T a In addition to the image formats the following image output options can also be specified Description caesar s word 4x resolution fo f Postscript PDF pes fgroon 2 TE tion tc ar the san resolution 4x
351. ore details Change data sources and other settings see Section 5 17 for more details Generate playback FAST TCF scripts see Section 5 10 for more details Convert a LSDA binout file to ASCH see Section 5 4 4 for more details Displays the preference editor see Section 6 6 for more details Modify menu fonts size and colours see Section 6 1 7 1 for more details Turn on off automatic update Turn the model prefix on off or set it to automatic see Section 5 15 5 1 for more details Select the prefix format displayed for each model This option can be used to set the format used for the curve prefix This option has 4 settings Model The model number will be used as the Number prefix e g M1 Directory The directory name the model was read from will be used at the prefix e g run1 THF File The root name of the THF file will be used as the prefix e g sled_test User A used defined prefix will be used The Defined prefix can be defined on a model by model case using the Model Menu Turn on off the display of curves when dragging axis borders and legends On some slow machines the time taken to update the display when a large number of curves is displayed makes the dragging response too slow This option will automatically turn off the display of curves while the dragging operation is active Setup keyboard shortcuts for commonly used function see section 6 5 for more details A Options Com
352. orrelation percentage is stored internally in T HIS with the 2 output curves NOT the input curves The correlation percentage can be accessed from within FAST TCF scripts by requesting the correlate property for either of the 2 ouptut curves e g operation correlate strict curve 1 curve 2 tag curve 3 curve 4 Calculate correlation between curve_1 and curve_2 Tag the curves containing the peaks as curve_3 and curve_4 tab output txt curve 3 correlate Output the curve correlation value from curve_3 to the file output txt taba output txt curve 4 correlate Append the curve correlation value from curve_4 to the file output txt Selection of Parameters The Correlation algorithm has many tolerance limits and other inputs Two sets of these parameters have been pre selected to offer strict or less strict judgement of correlation buttons COR1 and COR2 in the Automotive menu The parameters selected are Value Value Peak matching Fraction difference in timing that scores zero points for this peak Peak matching and peak Fraction difference in value that scores zero points for this 0 25 0 5 values peak Page F 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Area matching Fraction difference in integral that scores zero points Curve shape low frequency Size of tolerance band in X and Y as fractions of the curve 0 025 0 05 trend extent in X and Y Curve shape low frequency Excursion area fraction scoring zero po
353. ortcut key G can also be used to create new graphs Number of This option can be used graphs to to create multiple graphs create ee a x Create Create Graphs s Number of graphs to create _ Create using preference settings _ Create using current settings IV Copy settings from graph width ARIE pixies Height pixies Automatic Page Layout W Tile Wide _ Tile Tall _ Cascade i 4x4 ML A383 BRETT Page Size Manual Page Layout Advanced E Create Create Graphs s Number of graphs to create _ Create using preference settings _ Create using current settings IV Copy settings from graph Page 3 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 When new graphs are created the initial settings for each graph can be copied from 3 different sources Create using preference The Display and Axis Settings are copied from the preference file settings Create using current The Display and Axis Settings are copied from the current settings in the settings Display and Axis menus Copy settings from graph n The Display and Axis Settings are copied from the specified graph 3 2 Page Size Page Size Width pixies Height pixies These options can be used to specify the total size of the area in pixels used by the graph windows 3 3 Page Layouts 3 3 1 Automatic Page Automatic Page Layout Layout Tile Wide _ Tile Tall If an Automatic page layout is used and the layout is set
354. oup_files see Appendix H for more details If the option to read groups files is set and the directory contains more than one group file then T HIS will use the newest file Page 5 19 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 3 T HIS Curve Read Data Pad LS DYNA Groups Keyword THIS Curve This option can be used to read in curves stored in T HIS curve file format see Appendix B for Bulk Data Keyboard CSV Screen detail ee ISO LS PREPOST DiAdem NASTRAN By default this option can be used to select a single file After selecting the file it will W Cure File Va e o a automatically be opened and read and all of the curves in the file will be read in _ Search Directories Recursively cur a Output Curve highest 1 Read IV Read Style Data Filter In addition to reading a single file this option can IE also be used to search directories recursively for l Curve File multiple files V Search Directories Recursively After the search has finished a list showing all of the files that have been found will be displayed so bs that multiple files can be selected and read in one operation Output Curve By default T HIS will search for files with the file extension cur this can be changed if required IW Filter In addition to changing the default file extension the list of files can also be filtered The filter string can contain the following wildcard
355. ow and provides easy access to all of the main T HIS menus from a series of drop down menus In addition to the menus the drop down menus also allow a number of items to be changed dynamically and it provides a constant feedback of the cursor position within the graph area Each graph window contains it s own tool bar that provides a subset of the functions in the main toolbar see Section 6 2 6 1 1 File The File drop down menu can be used to access the following menus Read see Section 5 1 for more details Write see Section 5 2 for more details Curve see Section 5 3 for more details Manager Model see Section 5 4 for more details Manager Edit see Section 5 5 for more details Page Setup This option is only available on PC s and can be used to access the standard Windows Page Setup menu Print This option is only available on PC s and can be used to access the standard Windows Print menu Manual Displays this manual 6 1 2 Graphs The Graphs drop down menu can be used to create new graphs and to change layout options Create Create a new graph see Section 3 1 for more details Options Modify graph layout options see section 3 1 for more details Auto hide graph This option can be used to automatically hide the tool bar tool bar see Section 6 2 at the top of each graph window File Read Write Curves Models Edit Page Setup Print Manual Options Auto hide graph tool bar
356. own Arguments Message to show in window initial optional Initial value Return type value input string or null if cancel pressed Example To create an input window with title Input and message Input string and return the value input var value Window GetString Input Input string Hide Description Hides unmaps the window Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To hide window w w Hide Information title string info string buttons optional constant static Description Show information in a window Page J 136 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Information to show in window optional Window NO If this is omitted an OK button will be used By default the window will be modal If Window NONMODAL is also given the window will be non modal instead buttons The buttons to use Can be bitwise OR of Window OK Window CANCEL Window YES or Return type Button pressed Example To show information Information in window with title Example with OK and Cancel buttons var answer Window Information Example Information Window OK window CANCEL if answer Window CANCEL Message You pressed the Cancel button MasterResolution static Description Returns the resolution of the master programme window in pixels Arguments No arguments Return type Array containing x and y resolution in pixels Exam
357. own in bold oa_pref name shown in brackets Cd View Controls A a Autoscale AUTOSCALE Autoscale Y axis Y_AUTOSCALE P p Plot PLOT SPACE Plot PLOT Z z Zoom ZOOM n u u _ Zoom in ZOOM_IN ZZ n u u _ Zoom out ZOOM_OUT Blanking B b Blank All BLANK R r Reverse curve blanking REVERSE U u Unblank all curves UNBLANK Menus Automotive Menu AUTOMOTIVE_MENU Command Files Menu CFILE_LMENU C c Curve Menu CURVE_MENU Curve Properties Menu PROP_MENU Curve Table CURVE_TABLE Display Menu DISPLAY_MENU Edit Menu EDIT_MENU Groups Menu GROUPS_MENU Image Menu IMAGE_MEN U F FAST TCF Menu FAST_TCF_MENU Macros Menu MACROS_MENU Maths Menu MATHS_MENU Model Menu MODEL_MENU Operate Menu OPERATE_MENU Page Layout Menu PAGE_MENU Preferences Menu PREF_MENU Read Menu READ_MENU Shortcut Menu SHORTCUT Seismic Menu SEISMIC_MENU Settings Menu SETTINGS_MENU Style Menu STYLE_MENU Title Axes Menu TITLE_MENU Units Menu UNITS_MENU Write Menu WRITE_MENU Page 6 18 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Page Layout 1 Page Layout Tile Tall TILE_TALL 2 Page Layout Tile Wide TILE_WIDE 3 Page Layout Tile Cascade CASCADE 4 Page Layout Tile 1x1 LAYOUT_1X1 5 Page Layout Tile 2x2 LAYOUT_2X2 6 Page Layout Tile 3x3 LAYOUT_3X3 Miscellaneous G g Create anew graph Window NEW_WINDOW T t Tidy Menus TIDY_MENUS V v Change Curve P
358. p 5 F Remove graph ID from paget size m n 5 Sethe page size to mbynpixes size fauto fF F F Sethe page size to automatic graph total f oF ooo o Fo Setthetotainumberofgraphstotny create b o Fo Create anew graph 7 delete fal f F F EE Deletes all graphs exceptthe first one delete n Fo o ko EE Delete graph n i Er n x1 y1 x2 y2 Position graph n with the bottom left hand corner at screen location x1 y1 and the top right hand corner at x2 y2 All coordinates should be in the range 0 0 to 1 0 select Eh 1 Selectalgrapnas a u a FF se ati Bene I ee a ng axes position right bottom Set the position of the left right top and bottom axis for graph n The positions given should be in the range 0 0 to 1 0 or the word Auto legend position left right bottom Set the position of the left right top and bottom of the legend for graph n The positions given should be in the range 0 0 to 1 0 or the word Auto legend format lt type gt Set the legend format to one of ne full off automatic floating for hang ro to 3 legend background standard Set a background colour for the floating colour legend legend transparency integer Set the background transparency for the 0 100 floating legend format lt type gt Set the x axis unit format to one of automatic general scientific for graph n n y format lt type gt Set the y axis unit format to one of automatic gene
359. ple To get the resolution of the main window var res Window MasterResolution Message title string message string buttons optional constant static Description Show a message in a window Arguments Message to show in window Window NO If this is omitted an OK button will be used By default the window will be optional modal If Window NONMODAL is also given the window will be non modal instead buttons The buttons to use Can be bitwise OR of Window OK Window CANCEL Window YES or Page J 137 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Return type Button pressed Example To show message Press YES or NO in window with title Example with YES and NO buttons var answer Window Message Example Press YES or NO Window YES Window NO if answer Window NO Message You pressed No Question title string question string buttons optional constant static Description Show a question in a window Arguments Question to show in window optional Window NO If this is omitted Yes and No button will be used By default the window will be modal If Window NONMODAL is also given the window will be non modal instead buttons The buttons to use Can be bitwise OR of Window OK Window CANCEL Window YES or Return type Button pressed Example To show question Do you want to continue in window with title Question var answer Window Question Question Do you w
360. pment History New Features for version 12 0 Description Selecting element integration points and elment nodal data values Support for reading CSV files with TAB or SPACE field separators Modified Clip function Modified Rolling Average Function WIFAC Curve Correlation Function Measure JavaScript Datum Class New Features for version 11 0 Description Read data from DIAdem format data files Read data from NASTRAN Punch files Enhancements to curve table New options for the ZERO funciton New dB curve function New dBA curve function New Octave curve function New Automatic curve group options DATUM Lines Added new Auto_Blank option FAST TCE style_m command for specifying curve styles by model Added LSDA binout support for ELOUT_DET ELOUT_SSD and ELOUT_PDS Added support for DCFAIL file Added support for DISBOUT file Added support for PLLYOUT file New Features for version 10 2 Description Added support for Local X Y Z forces from NODFOR file New Features for version 10 0 Description New Curve History menu for viewing and modifying curves New JavaScript capability for creating and modifying curves New curve palette options for default curve colours New FAST TCF wildcard options for specifying curve tags FAST TCE Outputting a range of curves to a file Added support for CPM_SENSOR ASCI file Added support for TRHIST ASCII file and LSDA data 2 2 NM 6 5 Nn jo
361. point at the screen location between the 2 ends of the segment Page 5 46 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Split Segment Finds the nearest segment to the point selected on the screen and then splits the X segment in 2 or more parts At Start Inserts a new point at the screen location before the first point in the curve At End Inserts a new point at the screen location after the last point in the curve 5 5 1 3 Delete Delete Point gt Point To End From Start Point Finds the nearest point to the screen pick and deletes it ToEnd Finds the nearest point to the screen pick and deletes all points in the curve from that point onwards From Finds the nearest point to the screen pick and deletes all points in the Start curve up to that point 5 5 1 4 Locate Finds the nearest point to the screen pick and updates the list of points in the main edit panel so that the points either side of the picked point are displayed 5 5 1 5 Restart Resets the curve being edited to the values at the start of the edit session 5 5 1 6 Save Overwrite Overwrite the original curve with the edited one 5 5 1 7 Save Highest used 1 Save the edited curve as a new curve without overwriting the original curve Page 5 47 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 5 1 8 Quit Quits the curve editor without making any changes to the curve 5 5 2 Command line mode In command line mode editing of curve
362. ptional Curve Add Input Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Adk Ist Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Asi X Acceleration Curve Y Acceleration Curve Z Acceleration Curve Acceleration conversion factor float X Acceleration Limit float Y Acceleration Limit float Z Acceleration Limit float Calculation method string X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve Asin Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Atan Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Ave Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve Blc Input Curve Curve But Input Curve Curve Frequency float Order integer X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve on nput Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve C180 Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve Coot Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve C600 Input Curve Curve X axis interval optional float Output Curve optional Curve Cat 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Clip Input Curve Curve X min float X max float Y min float Y max float Output Curve optional Curve Com 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional
363. pts the user for a new time step The points of the output curve are calculated by linear interpolation Regularising a curve may alter its peak values and could change filtered output slightly Calculate the vector magnitude of three input curves Calculate the vector magnitude of two input curves Airbag control Unit User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 11 23 COR1 5 11 24 COR2 5 11 25 COR3 5 11 26 WIF Curve correlation function The Correlation function provides a measure of the degree to which two curves match When comparing curves by eye the quality of correlation may be judged on the basis of how well matched are the patterns of peaks the overall shapes of the curves etc and can allow for differences of timing as well as magnitude Thus a simple function based on the difference of Y values such as T HIS ERR function does not measure correlation in the same way as the human eye The T HIS correlation function attempts to include and quantify the more subtle ways in which the correlation of two curves may be judged The input parameters for the COR1 function have been chosen so as to produce a strict judgement of the correlation see Appendix F for more details The COR2 function is the same as COR1 except the input parameters have been chosen so as to produce a less strict judgement of the correlation see Appendix F for more details Another curve correlation function This function first normal
364. put_script output so if you see this file then FAST TCF didn t finish cleanly input_script tcf are the commands passed to T HIS from FAST TCF This is merged after completion into input_script output so if you see this file then FAST TCF didn t finish cleanly The command lines contain special characters such as r m and l These are used internally in T HIS and should be ignored by the user 6 input_script sngval contains summaries of every curve outputted nn oo Other files will be made such as postscript or bitmap plots but these will have names specified by the user Page 7 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 1 4 Debugging FAST TCF files Complicated FAST TCF files will inevitably go wrong There are a number of things the user can do to help identify where it is going wrong Assuming the command line syntax is correct and the correct files are in the run directory these typical procedures are as follows Identifying errors using the interactive playback option in T HIS e Read the model s into T HIS e Read the FAST TCE script into T HIS under the FAST TCF gt Run sub menu e Step through the FAST TCF script manually keeping an eye on how FAST TCE is translating the lines and the output T HIS is producing tden iag if FAST TCF has found an error If FAST TCF finds an error then it is stored and T HIS then resets the command line and continues to translate the input file If 10 errors are found then
365. py to Return type No return value Example To copy curve 1 to curve 4 var curve Curve Copy 1 4 To copy curve a to curve b Curve Copy a id b id Page J 16 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Delete curve integer static Description Deletes a curve Arguments ID of curve to delete Return type No return value Example To delete curve n Curve Delete n DeletePoint ipt integer Description Deletes a point in a curve The input for the point number should start at 1 for the Ist point not zero Arguments ipt The point you want to insert the data before or after Return type No return value Example To delete the 3rd point in curve 1 1 DeletePoint 3 Exists curve integer static Description Checks if a curve exists Arguments ID of curve to check Return type TRUE if the curve exists otherwise FALSE Page J 17 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To check if a curve n exists var exists Curve Exists n First static Description Returns the first curve Arguments No arguments Return type Curve object or null if there are no more curves in the model Example To get the Ist curve var curve Curve First FirstFreelD static Description Returns the ID of the first free curve Arguments No arguments Return type ID of first unsued curve Example To get the ID of the first free cur
366. quired to run T HIS might be something like SOASYS this10 exe d default cf command_file exit analysis name Obviously multiple script invocations may be placed in a command file For more information see Command and Session files Describes command files and explains how to create and use them T HIS command line arguments Describes the various command line arguments and how to use them 5 23 4 Running a Javascript from with a FAST TCF script JavaScripts can also be run from within a FAST TCF script using the javascript option javascript E javascripts new function js Page 5 127 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Within a FAST TCF script curves are usually accessed via curve tags If a JavaScript is used within a FAST TCF script it is recommended that the Curve GetFromTag function is used to access existing curves If a new curve is created by a JavaScript within a FAST TCF script then the new curve can be accessed within the FAST TCF script using the tag parameter of the curve creation function new curve new Curve id tag label x axis label y axis label If a tag is not specified in the curve creation function new curve new Curve id then a curve tag will be generated automatically for the curve The Ist curve created within the script will be tagged curve js_1 the 2nd curve js 2 5 23 5 The T HIS Javascript API All of the T HIS JavaScript API functions are described in detail in Appendix J
367. r none gt string a string LI Ul Wl 2 J 7 Ol N Ny lt gt SO KI 2 z Q z bej le 2 g Q l 5 a S g 8 Fl Bl gl Fl amp E 5 212 ae lt j ae g S ee Z 8 J ie gt oD a ERCENT_key Shortcut for none gt string string INGLEQUOTE_key Shortcut for none gt string Shortcut for string U gal 4 w a gt Q m E 3 lt none gt none gt none gt ASTERISK_key Shortcut for string string OMMA _ key Shortcut for string a string i string LASH_key Shortcut for string string EMICOLON_key Shortcut for string Shortcut for lt string Shortcut for Page H 15 string O e 2 S 2 gt 4 G cS T 2 gt lt 5 F z 2 2 a lt string T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 string string I gi I string string string string string NDERSCORE_key Shortcut for _ ZOOM_OUT string IBACKTICK_key Shortcut for none gt string string PIPE_key Shortcut for none gt string string ILDE_key Shortcut for none gt string The following strings control the T HIS header and version number at the bottom right of the plot space Preference Type _ Description Valid arguments Default fee me esse a a me 2 Se a a E B a a a me 4 a a a E n Posen a a _ me A seret Jon Kingston for elvetica_ Medium Helvetica_Bold Courier_Medium ser text Bold Ti Medi Ti d Defaul Pa
368. r orthotropic materials CMPFLG on DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY By default results are available at top and bottom integration points and mid surface but values can be output for all through thickness integration points by using MAXINT on DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY Strain The Strain tensors output is optional Values are in the global cartesian system unless the option to use material axes has been invoked for orthotropic materials CMPFLG on DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY Only values at the top and bottom integration points are output T HIS will average these values for the mid surface NEIPS on DATABASE_EXTENT_BINARY These are output for the same surfaces integration points as Extra The Extra Historyl data components will only appear in the menu if they have been selected for output the stress tensor values Through Thickness Integration Points surfaces layers NOTE The top and bottom surfaces are not the outer fibres if the default Gaussian integration rules are used but rather the outer and inner integration points The relationship between integration point location and shell thickness depends on the number of integration points used Page A 14 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS The following diagram shows locations of integration points with respect to shell half thickness t 2 assuming the default Gaussian integration rules have been used No of PointsDistance of outer fibres from neutral axis as a proportion o
369. r HHS Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate VC for curve m using A 1 3 B 0 229 and the ECER95 method p Operate Vc m 1 3 0 229 ECER95 Vd Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert velocity spectrum to a displacment spectrum Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m and store as curve p p Operate Vd m Vec 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real 3rd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Vector magnitude of 3 curves Page J 100 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate vector magnitude of curves m n o and store as curve p p Operate Vec m n 0 Vec2d 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Vector magnitude of 2 curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate vector magnitude of curves m and n and store as curve p p Operate Vec2d m n Wif 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve static Description Weigthed Integrated Factor WIFAC Correlation function Arguments Page J 101 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Return type Correlation value Example Calculate the correlation between curves m and n val Operate Wif m n Window Input Curve Curve Window Type string
370. r d new Datum my datum Datum CONSTANT Y 100 To create a new datum with acronym my_datum and some X Y points var points new Array 6 points 0 0 0 points 1 10 0 points 2 1 0 points 3 15 0 points 4 2 0 points 5 17 0 var d new Datum my datum Datum POINTS points Page J 27 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Details of functions AddToGraph graph graph int Description Adds a datum to a graph Arguments graph graph Optional list of graphs to add the datum to If undefined then the datum is added to all graphs Return type No return value Example To add a datum d to graphs 1 and 3 d AddToGraph 1 3 To add a datum d to all graphs d AddToGraph Delete datum string static Description Deletes a datum Arguments Acronym of datum to delete Return type No return value Example To delete datum my_datum Datum Delete my datum Exists datum string static Description Checks if a datum exists Page J 28 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Acronym of datum to check Return type TRUE if the datum exists otherwise FALSE Example To check if a datum my_datum exists var exists Datum Exists my datum First static Description Returns the first datum Arguments No arguments Return type Datum object or null if there are no datum in the model E
371. r of processing is ascending sequential not the order in which you define them These functions display a menu in which one f group of curves may be selected see right 47 gt Head CofG Node Node 1354 13 h M1 Disp x Node 1355 3 Single Output From A Single Group These functions require a single group of curves as input like the functions above The output is a single curve Page 5 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 READ Options T HIS can READ data from a number of sources including LS DYNA binary output files LS DYNA ASCII files and tabulated x y data files In addition this menu allows data for new curves to be entered directly using the keyboard 5 1 1 LS DYNA Users are strongly advised to run each LS DYNA Groups Keyword THIS Curve LS DYNA analysis in a separate directory Bulk Data Keyboard CSV Screen Some of the default names for the files generated by LS DYNA that T HIS can read ISO LS PREPOS j DlAdem NASTRAN are not unique and T HIS can not tell which files belong to which model If you do read multiple models from the same directory T HIS will generate a warning message if you read the same file for more than 1 model 5 1 1 1 Selecting Models There are three ways to select the LS DYNA LS DYNA _ Groups Keyword THIS Curve models that you want to read into T HIS Bulk Data Keyboard CSV Screen i Select a single model see Section 5 1 1 1 1
372. r to either the ARUP set or the LSTC names When the user selects Apply the selected file are then opened and the contents scanned After the Model Unit System Undefined y files have been scanned the list of available data types will automatically be displayed see Section 5115 Apply THF d3that File V E Mest sled inew_Ig09 thf XTF xtfile File WM E testisledinew_lg09 xtf LSDA binout Database VW E test sled binout ASCII Files W deforc gistat matsum nodout reforc sbtout sleout spcforc ZTF Additional Model data MV E test sledinew_Ig09 ztf Page 5 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 1 1 2 Search Directories Read Data Recursively one Multiple models can be opened by using the option to search directories recursively After a directory has been specified T HIS will display a list of all the models it can find in the directory structure and each file can be selected Multiple Models Search Directori Y m Undefined r kaktaka Page 5 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 1 1 3 Select Models From Database Read Data LS DYNA Groups Keyword T HIS Curve From version 10 0 onwards T HIS can select models from a model database The database Bulk Data Keyboard CSV Screen file is an XML format file that contains ISO LS PREPOS j DlAdem NASTRAN information on where models are located along with a brief description of
373. ral scientific for graph n n y2 format lt type gt Set the second y axis unit format to one of automatic general scientific for graph n n x precision m Set the number of decimal places displayed for the x axis values to m in graph n n y precision m Set the number of decimal places displayed for the y axis values to m in graph n n y2 precision m Set the number of decimal places displayed for the second y axis values to m in graph n Page 7 8 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 3 INPUT SYNTAX TO LOAD OTHER FILES FAST TCF has the option of reading in curve files and other FAST TCF files nested within the input file T HIS now writes out and reads in curve styles and internal tags FAST TCF recognizes these tags if the user wishes to refer to them later on in the input file If they are relative then the include files must be relative to where T HIS is running from Filenames can contain spaces but if they do then they must be enclosed in quotes e g read c my documents filename cur word _ CSV 1 X Y X Y readcsv csv file Ir lt row number containing l line labels gt axis labels gt CSV 2 X Y Y Y readesv2 csv file type 2 bsec interval gt ons O number gt line labels gt ar lt row number Ben axis ar ey number comand u DE Keyword readk keyword file name FAST TCF Include ile DIiAdem read_diademjheader file channel number to read Keyboard entry can also be add
374. rface to the LS DYNA time history th file there is a limit of 100 000 items in each of the node solid beam shell and thick shell time history blocks thus 500 000 items overall In the interface to the LS DYNA extra time history xt file up to 100 000 nodal reactions or groups of reactions may be processed Number of colours By default T HIS curves wrap around the following six colours in order WHITE RED GREEN BLUE CYAN MAGENTA However a further 24 predefined colours are available if required and 6 user defined ones can be created Title The title can contain up to 80 characters Labels Labels for axes and lines can contain up to 80 characters Page 1 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 1 2 Running T HIS 1 2 1 Starting the code For users on a device with a window manager T HIS is run from the T HIS button in the SHELL If your system has been customised locally you may have to use some other command or icon consult your system manager in this case 1 2 2 Graphics Driver and Platforms T HIS 9 3 onwards use a OpenGL graphics driver Both the 32 and 64 bit versions of T HIS use 32bit single precision numbers to store and plot data The 32 bit version is limited to a maximum of 4GB of memory on all platform 3GB on windows Page 1 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 1 2 2 1 Batch Mode T HIS 12 0 can run in batch mode where the main application window is not displ
375. ring on Tum on the display of the y axis label et the y axis minimum value to automatic numerical value et the y axis minimum value off S numerical value S y_unit auto Set the y axis unit label to be defined automatically manual Set the y axis unit label to a user defined label on Turn on the display of the y axis unit label off Turn off the display of the y axis unit label Page 7 42 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 2nd Y Axis Properties y2_lab label string y2_min numerical value y2_max moo E numerical value gt y2_unit unit is 7 12 3 1 Deprecated Plot Setup Options The following setup commands are still supported in Version 9 4 but they have been superseded by the new properties keyword see section 7 10 mer ie he on Showmaxvalue rn fin Mm ams 7 12 4 Curve Display The list of curves displayed in each graph is controlled by the display keyword The list of curves can contain a mixture of curve tags curve numbers prefixed with or curve groups If curve tags are specified in the curve list then they can contain wildcards word The following option can aapended to the display keyword after the curve list Additional format following word lowing word u word 1 a em In version 9 4 the the following additional options that can be appended to the display keyword after the curve list are still supported although there use is not recommended Eqiuvalent command
376. ript will contain all of the commands required to regenerate all of the active graphs All of the graphs will be positioned on page 1 using the currently defined layout This option will only be available if T HIS only contains a single page see Section 3 2 on Only Graph n The FAST TCF script will contain all of the commands required to regenerate the selected graph The graph will be positioned on page 1 FAST TCF Script Image Output If this option is selected then the FAST TCF script will contain the commands required to generate an image of each of the pages graphs selected for output The Image Format can be set to any of the supported image types see_ Section 5 8 If the FAST TCF script generates multiple pages then the Filename specified will be used for the first image Subsequent images will use the specified filename with _2 _3 appended FAST TCF Script Curve Output By default the FAST TCF script will only contain the command needed to reproduce the curves that are unblanked in 1 or more of the graphs selected for output This option can be used to select additional curves for which the commands required to generate them are also added to the FAST TCF script If a curve is selected that is also unblanked in one of the graphs the command to regenerate it are only added to the FAST TCF script once In addition to selecting additional curves this option can also be used to add commands to the FAST TCE script to
377. rsion 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 1 5 Data Components Reread Model When reading data from any of the LS DYNA binary files or the LS DYNA ASCII files multiple components and entities may be selected at the same time Each data extraction menu consists of a list of available data components and a list of entities Data Components Individual data components can be selected using the mouse If a component has been selected and a second item is subsequently selected the first item will be deselected TE Total energy Multiple components may be selected by 1 Holding down the CTRL key when xM X momentum selecting items to add individual items to the list of selected components YM Y momentum 2 Holding down the SHIFT key when ZM Z momentum selecting items to add a range of items to the list of selected components 3 Clicking on the first item to be selected and then dragging down the list of items without letting go of the mouse button Page 5 15 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 1 6 Entities A Te en SotByiD yl y Individual entities can be selected deselected using the mouse Sort By Model Multiple entities may be selected by aL Sort By ID 1 Holding down the CTRL key when selecting items to add them DEE Common IDs H Sort By Name to the list of selected entities 2 Holding down the SHIFT key when selecting items to add a range of items to the list of sele
378. rtcut for E none gt string F_key Shortcut for F IFAST_TCF_MENU string string IH_key Shortcut for H none gt string a T ee string _key Shortcut for J AVASCRIPT_MEN string a ee IE a string ee ERBE AG string M_key Shortcut for M none gt string De a d string O_key Shortcut for O string Be er string Q_key Shortcut for Q string R_key Shortcut forR string 7 Page H 13 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 string a BEE string SEE EEE O a string ee per string A 7 EEE ER string SEHE ee E e string ae o string De ge a string ee string e string Pr a string Ee E string ee string EEE I cn string a SEEN string e oe string ABER 2 DEN ERDE NEE string SA na E BREER string De e O ee string Be nn string en FREE BEER string ee Tee string De ee a string I a I ee string a I ee string I ar I ic string Eee E string e CE string 2o a E DE string 37 cu ee string e 57 AA string GAREN 8 u EEE BEE string Page H 14 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Shortcut for y _AUTOSCALE string Si ES SO string a cs E string Shortcut for 0 OPY_AXIS string string WO_key Shortcut for 2 ILE_WIDE string string Shortcut for 4 ILAYOUT_1X1 string Shortcut for 5 LAYOUT_2X2 string string EVEN_key Shortcut for 7 none gt string ee Eo string Shortcut for 9 none gt string rn ee string E BR N e string Shortcut fo
379. rve tag maximum Y description User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 14 FAST TCF CURVE OUTPUT Curves can be written out to either T HIS curve files or CSV files from within a FAST TCF script by using either the app cop csv or csv2 keyword eee fey BE 2 word Copying o uelet ks i eave TPE curve al Sera Zei ill ove CV file TYPE csv2 Se curve list last word auto will overwrite any previous csv file CSV has the forma 2nd last word x V rite any previous csv file CSV has the format start time X1 Y Y3 last word x axis start time an interval The curve list for all of these commands can contain either curve tags with or without wildcards curve numbers prefixed with curve groups or to select all curves e g copy output file cur curve 1 amp group 1 Write curve_1 and all the curves in curve group group 1 to a new file output_file cur append output file cur curve 1 amp group 1 Append curve_1 and all the curves in curve group group 1 to the file output_file cur csv output csv curve _1 curve 2 Write all curves with tags that start with curve_1 or curve_2 to a CSV called output csv NOTE There is no limit to the number of curves that can be output to a file but there is a limit to the number of items that can be specified in the curve list currently 100 If more than 100 curves are to be output to a file then a curve group containing
380. rves Summary Gives a summary of the curve This includes the type of data being plotted and the maximum and minimum values in the curve Scans a group of curves and reports the maxima and minima values for each SCAN individual curve along with the overall maxima and minima Page 5 31 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 3 Curve Manager In screen menu mode curves are managed using the CURVE MANAGER window shown in the figure right By default the CURVE MANAGER menu only displays 1000 curves An unlimited amount of curves can be used and these are displayed in the menu in blocks of 1000 If an attempt is made to use a curve higher than 1000 then the Range options are used to select which group of 1000 curves you wish to display Against each curve that currently contains information is a curve number button The colour of this button indicates the current blanking status of a curve The curve is unblanked in all active graphs see section 3 5 The curve is blanked in all active graphs The curve is unblanked in some active graphs The blanking status of each curve can be changed by clicking on this button The Curve Table can also be used to change the blanking status of a curve A range of curves may either be blanked or unblanked by selecting the first button in the range and then holding down the SHIFT key while selecting the last button in the range All buttons that lie between the first and
381. s A gt All Curve Files matches multiple characters 7 matches a single character ACRUSH BASE base cur Note The filtering ignores case CRUSH BASE results cur WCRUSH RUMN1 results cur ACRUSH RUN1 runt cur WCRUSH RUNZ2 results cur CRUSHYRUNZYrUn2 cur CRUSH RUNSYresults cur CRUSHYRUNSYrUN3 cur ACRUSH RUN4 results cur WU 008 Page 5 20 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 1 4 KEYWORD Read Data mx Read data into T HIS from an LS DYNA Beds ER Ae aias WE Min KEYWORD input file All X Y data defined Bulk Data Keyboard CSV Screen using DEFINE CURVE will be read in from the specified input file Any X and Y axis scaling or ISO LS PREPOS j DIAdem NASTRAN offsets defined within the DEFINE CURVE definition will be applied to the X Y as it is read ile testisled default k in Ifthe TITLE option has been used the the ey lies 0 Al title will be used as the curve label otherwise the curve ID number will be used Curve highest 1 From version 9 3 onwards this option will also process any files specified using the INCLUDE option re kw read all curves from filename KEYWORD input file filename 5 1 5 BULK re LS DYNA Groups Keyword T HIS Curve Read data into T HIS from a Bulk Data file The format of a Bulk Data file is described in Bulk Data Keyboard CSY Screen Appendix C Assedi E ISO LS
382. s Input Curve Curve Period float Translate Input Curve Curve X value float Y value float Output Curve optional Curve Tti Upper Rib Acceleration Curve Lower Rib Acceleration Curve T12 Acceleration Curve Va Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Ve Input Curve Curve A float B float Calculation method string Output Curve optional Curve Vd Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve Vec 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real 3rd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Vec2d 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve Wif 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve Window Input Curve Curve Window Type string Yage lead in optional cosine only float Output Curve optional Curve Zero Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve ZeroX Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve ZeroY Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve dB Input Curve Curve Reference Value float Output Curve optional Curve dBA Input Curve Curve Weighting Type String Output Curve optional Curve Detailed Description The Operate class allows you to use the built in curve operation
383. s becoming too full or quotas exceeded This section gives only a brief summary of the installation organisation and you should refer to the separate Installation Guide if you want to find out more about the details of installation licensing and other related issues Version 12 0 Installation structure In version 12 0 the option is provided to separate a top level administration directory from the installation one where the executables are located For large installations on many machines this allows central configuration and administration files to exist in one place only but executables to be installed locally on users machines to give better performance Version 12 0 also allows the following items to be configured e The location for user manuals and other documentation e The definition of a user s home directory e The definition of the temporary directory for scratch files In addition parsing of the oa_pref preferences file will now handle environment variables so that a generic preference can be configured to give a user specific result and preferences may be locked so that those set at the administration level cannot be changed by users These changes are entirely optional and users performing a simple installation on a single machine do not need to make any changes to their existing installation practice Status Directory Content and purpose oa_pref file option OA_ ADMIN xx Optional Top
384. s can be read in for each curve Note The format for the point data must be given as a standard Fortran format statement for example F10 3 1 4F10 2 The external brackets around the format must be included If the data can be read in as a free format then type FREE or leave this line blank Note however free data is read in more slowly than formatted data Note The multipliers are the amount by which the values read in are to be multiplied For example you may wish to 2 correct from ms to s or units of G gravity to mm s On this line give the multipliers in the order X value Y1 value Y2 value etc Separate each multiplier by a space or comma A zero value is assumed to be 1 If all curves are to be read in as defined leave this line blank Note The axis labels are character strings separated by commas given in the following order X axis label Y1 axis label Y2 axis label etc Note The line labels are character strings separated by commas given in the following order 4 Line label 1 Line label 2 Line label 3 etc A comment line may be included any where in the file by starting the line with a The following shows a bulk data file with three curves and seven points on each curve Comment line Title of the curves 3 FREE A multiplier of 10 on X values and 5 on Y2 values 10 5 x axis yl axis y2 axis y3 axis curve 1 curve 2 curve 3 Now for the data J FP NBEO or O O O uu e U pe 0 0 0 5 8 N
385. s created in a script Previous versions of T HIS only supported English text so the default ASCII encoding was used for script files this is still the Page 5 123 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 default encoding for script files If you want to use unicode text in widgets then you must use a file encoding that is capable to representing the unicode chracters you require The File encoding popup allows you to change the file encoding used when reading the script file T HIS supports the following file encodings BK 150 2022 CN Please contact Oasys Ltd if you have problems or require another encoding to be supported To show the unicode text the appropriate font must be used This can be set using the preferences primer cjk_unix font and primer cjk_windows_font 5 23 2 2 Dealing with errors in scripts Script errors come in two forms Syntax Are mistakes of Javascript grammar or spelling resulting in error messages during compilation errors These are easy to detect and correct since the line number and offending syntax are both described by the compiler The script needs to be edited to correct the problem and then recompiled Sometimes several iterations of the compile edit cycle are required to eliminate all errors from a script Page 5 124 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Run time Are errors of context or logic in scripts that are syntactically correct and thus have compiled but
386. s during input for example lt command gt lt optional command gt lt optional number gt And also to show defaults when the computer prompts you eg Give new value 10 Give model number 12 e Square To show advisory information at computer prompts eg Give filename key THIS gt gt gt H for Help Page 0 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 1 Introduction T HIS is an x y plotting program specifically written to perform two functions 1 To produce time history plots from transient analyses such as those performed using LS DYNA 2 To plot any form of x y data that is produced either by a program or by directly typing in values T HIS is a graphically driven interactive program Input and manipulation of data is through a graphical user interface on systems capable of running X Windows applications selections are made through pressing buttons using a mouse On machines not capable of running X Windows it is also possible to use T HIS in a command line mode of operation instructions are entered through the keyboard to perform the required operations 1 1 Program Limits There are a number of limits in T HIS of which the user should be aware These are listed below Number of graphs T HIS can have a maximum of 32 graphs Number of curves The number of curves is unlimited Number of points The number of points that can be defined per curve is unlimited Time history blocks In the inte
387. s for the SHELL lines commencing shell THIS lines commencing this D3PLOT lines commencing d3plot PRIMER lines commencing primer and REPORTER lines commencing reporter All lines take the format lt preference name gt lt preference value gt The general copy of the preference file should be present in the OA_ADMIN_xx and or 0A_INSTALL directory This should contain the preferences most suitable for all software users on the system An individual s specific preferences file can be stored in the individual s home area This can be used to personally customise the software to the individual s needs Whenever one of the programs whose preferences can be stored in the oa_pref file is fired up the program will take preferences first from the general preference file in the OA_ADMIN_xx directory if it exists then the OA_INSTALL directory then from the file in the user s home area then from the current working directory Preferences defined in the general oa_pref file can be modified in the user s personal file but they can t be removed by it From version 9 4 onwards preferences can be locked If a preference is locked it cannot be changed in an oa_pref file in a more junior directory To lock a preference use the syntax this rather than this The interactive Preferences Editor You are free to edit oa_pref files by hand but there is an interactive Preferences Editor that may be called from within T
388. s function is called when the user actually types something into the textbox or selects an item in the combobox NOT when the Widget text property changes onClick function Function to call when aBUTTON CHECKBOX or COMBOBOX widget is clicked The Widget object is accessible in the function using the this keyword see the example below for more details of how to define the function and how to use the this keyword To unset the function set the property to null Note that this function is called when the user actually clicks on the button NOT when the Widget pushed property changes For the COMBOBOX widget the function is called before the list of items is mapped onPopup function Function to call when a BUTTON LABEL or TEXTBOX widget is right clicked to map a popup The Widget object is accessible in the function using the this keyword The PopupWindow can then be found by using the popup Window property of the Widget The function is called before the popup is mapped so you can change the widgets in the popup as required onTimer function Function to call for a widget when timerDelay ms have elapsed after setting this Additionally if timerRepeat is set this function will be called repetitively every timerDelay ms The Widget object is accessible in the function using the this keyword To unset the function set the property to null Note that as soon as this property is set the timer starts popupDirection cons
389. s have been added to the Plot Setup commands along with a number of new options Additional format following word following word not format word 1 2 X axis options xax if numeric 1 xaxis if numeric 2 xaxis Tal min max otherwise xaxis label _Jotherwise xaxis label Page 7 43 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Y axis options yax if numeric 1 yaxis fif numeric 2 yaxis Takes following words as a label until another min max keyword is found otherwise yaxis label otherwise yaxis label 2nd Y axis options 2ya if numeric 1 yaxis fif numeric 2 yaxis Takes following words as a label until another min max keyword is found otherwise yaxis label Jotherwise yaxis label e g display curve 2 curve 1 display curve_1 and curve_2 display amp Curve group 3 title SLED TEST curve 2 xax Time yax Displacement display curve_2 and all the curves in Curve group 3 Set the plot title and x and y axis labels 7 12 5 Image Generation Many different types of image format can be outputted from FAST TCF In T HIS 9 4 onwards the FAST TCF image output options have been revised to allow multiple graphs and pages to be selected for output The old pre 9 3 syntax see Section 7 12 6 is still supported for existing scripts but users are strongly advised to move to the new command format where all options are prefixed with either the display or image keyword Description keyword following w
390. s in T HIS to generate new curves Most of the curve operations generate a new curve and return the curve object for the new curve A few functions NIJ FFT etc generate multiple output curves and these return an array of curve objects See the documentation below for more details Details of functions Abs Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert a curve to absolute values Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Return type Curve object or NULL Page J 64 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To convert curve m to absolute values and store as curve p p Operate Abs m Acos Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Arc Cosine Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Arc Cosine of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Acos m Acu Input Curve Curve Offset float Time Period float Output Curve optional Curve static Description Evaluates the integratal of a curve over a user defined period Arguments User defined offset Return type Curve object or NULL Example Integrate c curve over 0 07 seconds with a 0 1 offset p Operate Acu m 0 1 0 007 Page J 65 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Ad Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert acceleration spectrum to a displacment spectrum Arguments
391. s involving only one group of curves where the result is of the form lt Rn gt OP lt Gin gt 3 Single output from only one group of curves where the result is of the form lt R gt OP lt G1 1 n gt 4 Separate functions involving three groups of curves where the result is of the form lt Rn gt lt G1n gt OP lt G2n gt OP lt G3n gt Currently the only function that has 3 curves groups as input is the VEC operation 1 Separate Functions On Two Groups o i highe st 1 These functions display a menu in which two f groups of curves may be selected see right Sroun 1 4 None Visible You must define one or more curves in group 2 1 and group 2 must be Show ET i Keyi u either A group of as many curves as there are in group 1 or A single curve Every curve in group 1 is applied to this curve or A constant value entered in the Key in text box You can pick curves in either group from theirlg menus or type a range into the Key in box NOTE the order in which they are processed g is ascending sequential not the order in which you define them Group All None Visible P gt Pick Filter Show Groups Key in Page 5 4 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 2 Separate Functions On A Single Group 5 hi ghe st 1 wo Wone None Visible P Operations apply separately and uniquely to Show Key i in 2 each selected curve As before the orde
392. s is done in a similar fashion using the following commands Moving around the curve F Forward Move forward 16 lines B Back Move back 16 lines T Top Move to the top of the curve End Move to the end of the curve N Number Move to given line number Modifying the curve Cn Change Change line n In Insert Insert points before line n An Append Append points after line n D ni n2 Delete Delete lines nl to n2 L Label Change the line label R Reset Reset the curve back to the original curve Saving and Plotting the curve W Write Write the curve S Save As write PE Plot Edited Plot the edited curve PA Plot All Plot the edited and original curve PL Plot Plot the current T HIS curves Q Quit Quit the editor In command line mode the EDIT menu is reached by typing ED Page 5 48 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 5 3 Curve Labels Each curve has four labels associated with it Title The title string at the top of the plot X label The label for the X axis of the plot Title Y label The label for the Y axis of the plot Label The label applied to the line itself X Axis gt EUC Y Axis Label Enfla The first three are only used on a plot if this curve is the first or only curve to be plotted and the relevant labels are in automatic mode see TITLE and AXIS You can change any of these by simply overtyping whatever is currently there When you are happy with the result use the APPLY button to dismiss this box
393. s multiplied by a factor between 0 and 1 Three different window shapes are available The Store Window Curve option can be used to output the multiplying factors to a separate curve if required Translate a curve so that the first data point is moved to 0 0 By default this option will translate the curve in both X and Y alternatively the curve can be translated in X only or Y only f x 20log y ref Converts a curve from dB to dBA by applying El A weighting factors to the curve values e Narrow band A weighting values are 7 calculated using a formula e 1 3 Octave A weighting values are calculated from a lookup table Converts a curve from narrow band to either Octave bands or 1 3 rd Octave bands The input curve can either be a curve that has already been converted to dB or it can be an unconverted linear curve The output curve can also be generated using either Mean values or RMS values Page 5 71 T HIS 5 10 MATHS Options The MATHS menu is shown in the figure right This menu allows mathematical operations to be applied to curves These options are self explanatory and work on the y value of the curve except where explicitly User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 SORT Loc exp Locio n LOG x Loc1om SIN ASIN cos ACOS TAN ATAN stated Note Trigonometrical functions expect the user to work in radians 5 10 1 SQRT 5 10 2 LOG 5 10 3 EXP 5 10 4
394. s returned as an ArrayBuffer object For more details on how to use an ArrayBuffer see the following links https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays ArrayBuffer https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays ArrayBufferView https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays DataView Arguments length integer Number of bytes to try to read from the file If omitted all the remaining data from the file optional will be read Return type Array Buffer object or undefined if end of file Example To read data as 32bit unsigned integers from File object f var ab f ReadArrayBuffer var u32 new Uint32Array ab for var i 0 i lt u32 length i var value u32 i Page J 43 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 ReadChar Description Reads a single character from a file opened for reading by a File object Arguments No arguments Return type character read from file or undefined if end of file Example Loop reading characters from File object f var C while c ReadChar undefined ReadLine Description Reads a line from a file opened for reading by a File object To enable this function to be as fast as possible a maximum line length of 256 characters is used If you expect a file to have lines longer than 256 characters then use ReadLongLine which allows lines o
395. s two input curves e A reference curve to compare against the first curve selected e The curve to compare against the reference Once 2 curves have been selected the a check is carries out to see if the two curves contain the same number of points and if the range of x axis values the same for the two curves If any inconsistencies are found then a warning message is generated The following values are then calculated Maximum difference and time of variation Maximum difference as a age of the reference value at the same time Maximum difference as a age of the peak reference value Average difference Average difference as a age of the peak reference value Area weighted difference y Jy ade yak where y Reference Curve Y Data Curve T HIS Regression coefficient yc Data Curve ya Average of Data and Reference Curve 4 yc yr n Number of Data Points This is a value between 0 and 1 where 1 means 100 correlation Page G 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Page G 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS APPENDIX H The oa_pref preference file This file contains code specific preferences that can be used to modify the behaviour of T HIS It is optional and where entries or the whole file are omitted T HIS will revert to its default settings oa_pref naming convention and locations The file is called oa_pref It is looked for in the following places in the ord
396. s value this will depend upon the element integration scheme In addition where the centre value has been averaged from a pair of points when the number of layers is an even number it will definitely not be the neutral axis value consider plastic strain in a section in pure bending The ZTF file generated by PRIMER can help to resolve some of these problems THF File ZTF File If a ZTF file had been generated using PRIMER then T HIS can use additional information from the ZTF to correctly work out the number of integration points each shell element was defined with If an attempt is made to output data for a surface that does not exist in the THF file then T HIS will generate a warning message and a NULL curve will be generated In addition to working out the correct number of through thickness integration points for each element T HIS can also use the information in the ZTF to identify models where MAXINT has been set to a ve number in order to generate data for multiple in plane integration points Effect of plotting Top surface on models with MAXINT 6 and MAXINT 9 whit and without a ZTF file MAXINT 6 no ZTF MAXINT 6 ZTF file MAXINT 9 no IMAXINT 9 ZTF file present ZTF file file present Shell 1 has 4 Undefined int points Correct int point 4 Undefined int Correct int point 4 integration points lt 6 points lt 9 Shell 2 has 6 Correct int point 6 Correct int point 6 Undefined int Correct i
397. s values for curve n by curve m and store as curve p p Operate Dix m n To devide the X axis values in curve m by 20 0 and store as curve p p Operate Dix m 20 0 Ds Input Curve Curve Broadening Factor float Redefine Frequencies string Output Curve optional Curve static Description Generate a design spectrum from a reponse spectrum Arguments Broadening Factor Spectrum broadening factor Redefine Frequencies T HIS selects a new set of frequencies for the output yes or no Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m and let T HIS determine the new frequencies store as curve p p Operate Ds m yes Dv Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Convert displacment spectrum to a velocity spectrum Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m and store as curve p p Operate Dv m Page J 77 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Env Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve static Description Generate an Envelope that bounds the min and max values of a group of curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Envelope of curves stored in curve array x and store as curve p p Operate Env x Err 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate the degree of correlation between 2 curves Arguments Return
398. se 10 To raise to power gt LIN ne L Q C AN Tangent N A ne o A osine ATAN Arc tangent SE Seismic options DV Displacement to velocity spectra DA Displacement to acceleration spectra D Velocity to displacement spectra A Velocity to acceleration spectra AD Acceleration to displacement spectra AV Acceleration to velocity spectra DS Produce a design spectrum from a response spectrum RS Produce response spectra from input accelerations an OrMat on UT Utility functions L Colour laser output L Greyscale laser output ne Width SA Solid axes x 0 amp y 0 axes solid RE Read in style file R Write out style file DE Reset styles to default settings SET Set a T HIS line style IX Turn fix line styles on off HE Help U Curve editing options X RO Group options Page K 5 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 IM Image output options BMP c files Capture a compressed Bitmap i PREF Define T HIS user preferences ONV Set unset automatic conversion from ms to s when filtering ILE Turn on off output of injury criteria values and error calculations to ASCII files SHOW Turn on off display of HIC 3ms clip values ZERO Turn on off automatic creation of 0 0 point when reading data from Page K 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Installation organisation The version 12 installation can be customised to try and avoid a number of issues th
399. sed to select deselect all the curves Line Styles can also be edited using the dialogue box 5 6 1 APPLY Apply No Change r Colour No Change P Symbol F Frequency No Change a Width Line Label r Reload All No Change r Style Default Palette Select All Deselect All Show Curves z RARE BSRRA EH BR gt gt 5 Ea E A E ze E Eas 347 Head CofG Node 13 Node Node Node 135 Node 1 Node 1356 This button will APPLY the current line colour symbol width and style selection to all the curves that have been selected Page 5 50 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Pressing the right mouse button while over the colour button will invoke a colour z E a ea BEE T HIS has a built in palette of 30 predefined colours and 6 user defined colours Colours are defined using 6 digit Hexadecimal values using the format E o o m Bl ae on mm RR Red Component 0 255 GG Green Component 0 255 BB Blue Component 0 255 ColorrID Name Alternative Name Value Bo RED EU 0 Bo OL GREEN OFFOO Ho OG BLUE 000FF Bo OS YAN OFFFF BOL MAGENTA FFOOFF po OL ELLOWFFFFOO Bo OO ORANGE FFICOD po koL9 CPURQUOISE BIFFO4 DD 20 koL20 MEDIUM BLUE BBE pon koL216 PUR PIE Bor pp koL213 DARK GREY 19939 Do COL 29 MEDIUM GREY BBB Bo kor30 LIGHT GREY BDBDBD Bh OL USER B23 SER a B33 SER
400. seperated with commas an be specified on the same line for use with Model Database file mdb lt filename gt hat contains information on where models are pecify the name of the default model eg mdb database xml located along with a brief description of each database file model The model database can be used to easily select multiple models HIS curve file cur lt filename gt or curve lt filename gt pecify a T HIS curve file containing one or more curves for T HIS to automatically open eg cur test cur HIS curve file list curve list lt filename gt The curve list file should contain the full or curve lt filename gt pathname of each cure file that you want T HIS pecify a file containing a list of curve o open Each file should be on a separate line files for T HIS to automatically open eg cur test cur HIS bulk data file bdf lt filename gt pecify a T HIS BDF file containing kg bdf test cur one or more curves for T HIS to open Automatically maximises the T HIS maximise indow so that it occupies the full screen Read ASIIC files pecifying a custom oa_pref file pref lt filename gt filename gt must be a valid oa_pref file his causes an extra optional If it has no path prefixed the file is assumed to oa_pref file to be read be in the OA_INSTALL directory Any legal filename may be used se ELOUT instead of ELOUTDET use elout lt yes no gt y default T HIS uses the ELOUTDET part of he LSDA file
401. ser manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Curve number tag optional Tag used to reference the curve in FAST TCF scripts Line label optional Line label for the curve X axis label optional X axis label for the curve Y axis label optional Y axis label for the curve Return type Curve object Example To create a new curve with label 200 var 1 new Curve 200 Details of functions AddPoint xvalue real yvalue real Description Adds a point at the end of the curve Arguments The x value of the point The y value of the point Return type No return value Example To add the point x 3 5 y 5 5 to curve 1 1 AddPoint 3 5 5 5 AddToGraph graph graph int Description Adds a curve to a graph Arguments graph graph Optional list of graphs to add the curve to If undefined then the curve is added to all graphs Page J 15 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Return type No return value Example To add a curve c to graphs 1 and 3 c AddToGraph 1 3 To add a curve c to all graphs c AddToGraph ClearFlag flag integer Description Clears a flag on the curve Arguments flag Flag to clear on the curve Return type No return value Example To clear flag f for curve 1 1 ClearFlag f Copy source integer target integer static Description Copies a curve Arguments ID of curve to copy from ID of curve to co
402. shows the script file If your script is broken up into separate file by using Use then you can get a list of the different files and view them by using the Source popup To go to a particular line in the file use the goto line textbox A list of the functions in the script is shown in the Functions menu on the top left If you want to look at a particular function then click on the function name and the main text window will jump to the correct file and line Adding removing breakpoints A breakpoint is a line in the script where execution will pause in JaDe To add a breakpoint either left click on the line you want the breakpoint on or right click on the line and select Create breakpoint from the popup A red circle is then drawn on the line to show that there is an active breakpoint Page M 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 112 function allocate mines 113 amp 114 Var n mines 115 116 while inj 117 Additionally the breakpoint will also be added to the list in the breakpoint window bottom left of JaDe You can click on this at any time and the main text window will jump to the correct file and line Active breakpoints are shown with ared circle Breakpoints can be activated deactivated by clicking on the line again Unactive breakpoints are shown as a grey circle instead of ared one They are also shown in grey text in the breakpoint window To delete a breakpoint right click on the line and select Del
403. side tree is significant macro_directory master_group_file plot_format prefix_format regularise_dt second_y_axis I e Preferences Means that the option has been read from your HOME USERPROFILE file Means that the option has been read from the OA_INSTALL file YAREN Means that the option had been read from the OA_ADMIN file In either event regardless of the data source the updated option will be written to the file chosen when you started the preferences editor Because of the order of file reading see above and option read from the master OASYS file amended and written to your local HOME file will take precedence when you next run T HIS Locking Preferences From version 9 4 onwards preferences can be locked Beside each option in the un preference editor is a padlock symbol If the symbol is green then the option is unlocked Active v a if it is red then it is locked If a preference option has been locked in a file that the user can not modify then an error message will be generated if the user tries to edit that option Active v l If a user manually edits the oa_pref file to try and set an option that has been locked in another preference file then the option will be ignored in the users preference file Page H 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Format of the oa_pref file Entries are formatted in the following way lt programme gt lt option gt lt sett
404. sing Screen Menus 2 1 Basic screen menu layout 2 2 Mouse and keyboard usage for screen menu interface 2 3 Dialogue input in the screen menu interface 2 4 Window management in the screen interface 2 5 Dynamic Viewing Using the mouse to change views 2 6 Tool Bar Options 3 Graphs and Pages 3 1 Creating Graphs 3 2 Page Size 3 3 Page Layouts 3 3 1 Automatic Page Layout 3 4 Pages 3 5 Active Graphs 4 Global Commands and Pages 4 1 Page Number 4 2 PLOT PL 4 3 POINT PT 4 4 CLEAR CL 4 5 ZOOM ZM 4 6 AUTOSCALE AU 4 7 CENTRE CE 4 8 MANUAL 4 9 STOP 4 10 TIDY 4 11 Additional Commands 5 Main Menu 5 0 Selecting Curves 5 1 READ Options 5 2 WRITE Options 5 3 Curve Manager 5 4 Model Manager 5 5 EDIT Options 5 6 LINE STYLES 5 7 Command Session Files 5 8 IMAGE Options 5 9 OPERATE Options 5 10 MATHS Options 5 11 AUTOMOTIVE Options 5 12 SEISMIC Options 5 13 MACRO Options 5 14 FAST TCF Options 5 15 TITLE AXES LEGEND Options 5 16 DISPLAY Options 5 17 SETTINGS 5 18 MEASURE 5 19 Curve Groups 5 20 GRAPHS 5 21 PROPERTIES 5 22 UNITS 5 23 The Javascript Interface 5 24 Datum Lines 6 Other Options RRS RWWWWWW W NRF RBADNNNE SUR Re ee ee RRWONNNNNNWN SA a 5 30 A b D 5 42 5 44 5 50 5 58 5 62 5 67 5 72 5 73 5 80 5 82 5 84 5 87 5 96 5 100 5 105 5 109 5 112 5 113 5 118 5 123 5 129 6 1 Page i T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 6 1 Tool Bar 6 2 Graph Tool Bar 6 3 CUR
405. sion 12 0 October 2014 dv_right_shift string gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY ZOOM_UP_ VE shift Right mouse OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N R B dv_left_ctrl string gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY trl Left mouse OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE dv_middle_ctrl string gt Dyn view action for RANSLATION trl Middle mouse A dv_right_ctrl string gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY ZOOM_UP_ VE trl Right mouse OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE D dv_left_both string gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY IROTATION_XYZ shift ctrl Left mouse ROTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N dv_middle_both kstring gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY RANSLATION shift ctrl Middle OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE mouse RANSLATION ZOOM_UP_ VE N dv_right_both string gt Dyn view action for OTATION_XYZ ROTATION_XY ZOOM_UP_ VE shift ctrl Right OTATION_Z ROTATION_SPHERE mouse RANSLATION ZOOM_UP VE dv_shift_action string gt Dynamic viewing URRENT WIREFRAME FREE_EDGE URRENT mode for shift mouselUNUSED D On dv_ctrl_action string gt Dynamic viewing URRENT WIREFRAME FREE EDGE IREFRAME mode for ctrl mouse UNUSED D On dv_both_action string gt Dynamic viewing URRENT WIREFRAME FREE EDGE IFREE_EDGE mode for shift ctrl NUSED mo ED on font_scaling logical gt whether text in GUI
406. stant Widget justification Can be a bitwise or of Widget LEFT Widget RIGHT or optional Widget CENTRE and Widget TOP Widget MIDDLE or Widget BOTTOM If omitted the default is Widget CENTREIWidget MIDDLE Return type no return value Example To read image data from string s for widget w and place it at the top left w ReadImageString s Widget TOP Widget LEFT To remove an image from widget w w ReadImageString null Page J 121 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Rectangle colour constant fillf boolean x1 integer y1 integer x2 integer y2 integer Description Draws a rectangle on the widget Only possible for Widget LABEL and Widget BUTTON widgets The coordinates are local to the Widget not the Window See properties xResolution and yResolution for more details Note that the widget graphics will only be updated when the widget is redrawn This 1s to allow the user to do multiple drawing commands on a widget To force the widget to be redrawn call Show Arguments y coordinate of first corner of rectangle x coordinate of second opposite corner of rectangle y coordinate of second opposite corner of rectangle Return type no return value Example To draw a red filled rectangle with corners 20 20 and 80 80 on widget w w Rectangle Widget RED true 20 20 80 80 RemoveAllWidgetltems Description Removes any Widgetltems from the Widget Also see Widget AddWidgetl
407. static Description Combine Y axis values from 2 curves together Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example To combine the Y axis values for curve n to those in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Com m n Cor 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve Correlation type string static Description Curve Correlation function This Correlation function provides a measure of the degree to which two curves match When comparing curves by eye the quality of correlation may be judged on the basis of how well matched are the patterns of peaks the overall shapes of the curves etc and can allow for differences of timing as well as magnitude Thus a simple function based on the difference of Y values such as T HIS ERR function does not measure correlation in the same way as the human eye The T HIS correlation function attempts to include and quantify the more subtle ways in which the correlation of two curves may be judged The correlation can be calculated using either a strict or loose set of input parameters The degree of correlation is rated between 0 and 100 Page J 73 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments Correlation type Correlation type strict or loose Return type Correlation value Example Calculate the correlation between curves m and n using the strict input parameters val Operate Cor m n strict Cor3 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve Curve X axis factor optional flo
408. t Arguments Widget Widget that widget item will be created in This can be null in which case the WidgetItem will be created but not assigned to a Widget It can be assigned later by using Widget AddWidgetltem Text to show on widget item selectable boolean If the widget item can be selected If omitted the widget item will be selectable optional Return type Widgetltem object Page J 128 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Window class The Window class allows you to create windows for a graphical user interface More Class functions BottomBorder Error title string error string buttons optional constant GetDirectory initial optional string GetFile extension optional string allow new optional boolean initial optional string GetFilenamettitle string message string extension optional string initial optional string GetFiles extension optional string GetInteger title string message string initial optional integer GetNumber title string message string initial optional float GetString title string message string initial optional string Information title string info string buttons optional constant MasterResolution Message title string message string buttons optional constant Question title string question string buttons optional constant RightBorder TopBorder UpdateGUI Warningttitle
409. t They will keep their relative size and position as the master window is changed in size and or shape and will reappear after the main window is de iconised Page 2 1 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 The default layout of the main sub windows is as follows Main Menu Options Goaptoce Arte Meng Area Dialogue end List Hobe Comandas These windows cannot be dismissed A brief description of their functions is Main Menu Provides access to the majority of the commands and options available in T HIS through a series of Options sub menus see Section 6 Graphics area Is where graphs are drawn In T HIS 9 4 this area can contain a maximum of 32 graphs see Section 3 Alternativley if graphs have been organised into pages see Section 3 3 then this area will display a single page of graphs Dialogue amp list Allows command line input and output also provides a listing area for messages Menu Area Displays the commands and options associated the current selection fromthe main menu options Global Gives access to commonly used commands see Section 4 Commands While you are free to reposition these master windows it is recommended that you keep to this default layout This is because when further sub windows appear their position and size is designed assuming this layout and aims to obscure as little useful information as possible 2 2 Mouse and keyboard usage for screen menu interface All screen menu oper
410. tant How PopupWindow will be mapped relative to this widget Can be Widget LEFT Widget RIGHT Widget TOP or Widget BOTTOM default popupSymbol TRUE default if a symbol will be shown for a PopupWindow popupWindow PopupWindow PopupWindow for this Widget Only available for Button Label and Textbox object Widgets To remove a PopupWindow from a Widget set to null pushed logical If widget is pushed true or not false This only affects Widget BUTTON with the Widget toggle property set and Widget CHECKBOX widgets Page J 112 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS select constant Selection method for ListBox Widgets Can be Widget SELECT_NONE Widget SELECT_SINGLE or Widget SELECT MULTIPLE or Widget SELECT_ENHANCED default selectedItem Widgetltem Widgetltem that is currently selected for a ComboBox Widget If null no object Widgetltem is selected For a ListBox Widget this property contains the last WidgetItem that was de selected To get a list of all of the selected Widgetltems use Widgetltems to return all of the WidgetItems and inspect the Widgetltem selected property shown read boolean true if the widget is visible To alter the visibility of a widget use the Show and only Hide methods text string Widget text For a ComboBox Widget this will be the text for the currently selected Widgetltem textHidden boolean true if the widget text is hidden and replaced by asterisks This may be used to
411. te all graphs Plot Print string Any valid javascript type static Description Print a string to stdout Note that a carriage return is not added Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to print Return type No return value Example To print string Hello world Print Hello world To print the title of model object m with a carriage return print The title is m title n Println string Any valid javascript type static Description Print a string to stdout adding a carriage return Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to print Return type No return value Example To print string Hello world automatically adding a carriage return Printlin Hello world To print the title of model object m automatically adding a carriage return Println The title is m title Page J 7 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 ReturnFlag flag Flag static Description Return a flag used in the script See also AllocateFlag and Arguments flag Flag The flag to return Return type No return value Example To return flag f ReturnFlag f SetFtcfVar name string static Description Set the value of a FAST TCF variable If the variable already exists then it s value is updated Arguments The FAST TCE variable name case independent Return type String containing variable value or
412. ted on the screen so that the curves cycle through the default T HIS colours and styles as they are plotted This will result in the first curve being plotted always being white the second red the third green etc regardless of their curve numbers The default is OFF GM This option will display the Global Menu in a separate window 5 6 10 LABEL AND TITLE EDITING IN THE DIALOGUE BOX The dialogue box can be used to edit curve labels x axis and y axis labels and curve titles To access this feature enter the command cur at the Command prompt Enter M at the CURVE gt HELP BOX command prompt for a list of all available dialogue box commands Using help Using windows The following commands are available This option allows the user to edit the label for individual curves LA Curve options are TI ee ee ee ee LA Set a curve label TA ae Set a curve title XL Set a curve x axis label YL Set a curve y axis label TA Set a curve tag End of text a j LA j DIALOGUE Enter the curve number at the Select curve prompt Enter the desired new label at the Label prompt The current Label will be displayed in brackets TI E DIALOGUE This option allows the user to edit the 1 7 title for individual curves Enter the curve number at the Select curve prompt Acceleration vs time Analysis Enter the desired new title at the
413. tem and Widget RemoveWidgetltem Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To remove all WidgetItems from widget w w RemoveAllWidgetItems RemoveWidgetltem item Widgetltem Description Removes a WidgetItem from the Widget Also see Widget AddWidgetItem and Widget RemoveAllWidgetltems Page J 122 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Widgetltem WidgetItem to remove Return type No return value Example To remove Widgetltem wi from widget w w RemoveWidgetItem wi ShiftPressed static Description Check to see if the Shift key is pressed Arguments No arguments Return type true false Example To test if someone has the Shift key pressed if Widget ShiftPressed Show Description Shows the widget on the screen Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To show widget w w Show Page J 123 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Static Description Windows have two different regions for Widgets A normal region which can be scrolled if required if the window is made smaller scrollbars will be shown which can be used to scroll the contents and a static region at the top of the Window which is fixed and does not scroll For an example of a static region in a Window see any of the keyword editing panels The Dismiss Create Reset etc buttons are in the static re
414. ternative string which matching lines must start with maximum length of 256 characters Startn string alternative string which matching lines must start with maximum length of 256 optional characters Return type string read from file or undefined if end of file Example Loop reading lines from File object f which start example var line while line file FindLineStarting example undefined Flush Description Flushes a file opened for writing by a File object Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To flush File object f Flush Page J 38 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Get url string filename string options optional object static Description Get a file from a remote location See also File Proxy File ProxyPassword and File ProxyUsername Arguments url string URL uniform resource locator of remote file you want to get Currently http and ftp are supported For http give the full address including the leading http e g http www example com file htm For ftp an optional username and password can be given e g ftp ftp example com retrieves the directory listing for the root directory ftp ftp example com readme txt downloads the file readme txt from the root directory ftp user password ftp example com readme txt retrieves the readme txt file from the user s home direc
415. th an additional tick box for each curve that controls which curves are plotted against the second right hand y axis ID Label f EE x Node 1343 BE Sree BEE EEE 4 5 ll Label ID _ EE EE o EE Sara 4 5 TS ID Y2 Label j _ EE e Er 3 fy E x Node 1345 4 5 If only one y axis scale is used it is not possible to meaningfully plot curves with different units or very different values A second scale allows more information to be displayed at once as demonstrated below To identify which axis a curve is being plotted against the line Second Y axis Disp x Node 1343 labels on the plot are automatically modified Page 5 90 disabled Left hand Y H Disp x Node 1343 axis Righthandy 4 Disp x Node 1343 ax s User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Displacement 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 Time Disp x Node 1343 Disp x Node 1344 Disp x Node 1345 Displacement Displacement 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 Time I Disp x Node 1343 I Disp x Node 1344 Disp x Node 1345 All of the options that are available to control the label scale and type of the y axis are also available for the second y axis except for the Grid option NOTE When the DOUBLE AXIS option is used with GRID lines a grid is only plotted for the left hand y axis Page 5 91
416. the model prefix to the job directory et the model prefix tot eh amne fof the base THF model file et the modle prefix to the user defined one a ee xsize value x 4 ysize value x 3 aspect fixed Page 7 41 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Soidxandyaxs jo Ton Symbols on EVA 1177 EN EEE mau a aes Axis type hin dF Swap the x axis to a linear scale a kg LE Swap the x axis to a logarithmic scale yin rf Swap theyaxistoalinearscale yoo fF Swap the y axis to a logarithmic scale yaiin fF Swap the second y axis to a linear scale y209 f Swap the second y axis to a logarithmic scale Plot setup description plot setup word following word s nes _ _ Graph Ttitle tite on dF Turn on the display of the graph tite tite oft H Turn off the display of the graph tite X Axis Properties x_lab auo Set the x axis label to be defined automatically manual Set the x axis label to a user defined label label string Set the user defined x axis label on Tumon the display of the xaxislabel on o e Set the x axis minimum value to automatic the x axis minimum value to automatic et the x axis minimum value ff S i S Set the x axis minimum value to automatic numerical value Set the x axis minimum value x_unit auto Set the x axis unit label to be defined automatically unit string on Tum on the display of the x axis unitlabel y_lab auo Set the y axis label to be defined automatically label st
417. they are plotted on the screen so that the curves cycle through the default T HIS colours and styles as they are plotted This will result in the first curve being plotted always being white the second red the third green etc regardless of their curve numbers The default is OFF 5 16 8 Background Background Image _ This option can be used to modify the background colour see Section 5 6 2 for details on the available colours or to set a background image By default the background colour is set to BLACK Page 5 97 T HIS Image The IMAGE option can be used to display a background image behind a graph instead of a solid background colour If the image dimensions do not match the graph window dimensions then the image can be scaled to fit or it can be tiled User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Display Options Background aX Done Filename Reread File HE Scaling Positioning M No scaling Single Scale to Width Tiled _ Scale to Height _ Stretch Width amp Height Image Justification North Nw West sw Displacement Disp x Node 1343 Disp x Node 1344 Disp x Node 1345 Page 5 98 LG09 LARGE TEST 9 BELTED SLED TEST 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 Time User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 5 16 9 Foreground Foreground a This option can be used to modify the foreground colour see Section 5 6 2 for deta
418. thname for temporary files gt versions although they could be different if desired Pathnames in the oa_pref file may contain environment variables which will be resolved before being applied The hierarchy of oa_pref file reading It will be clear from the above that in a large installation the oa_pref files have a significant role Each piece of software reads them in the following order exe sisal The rules for reading these files are e Ifa given directory does not exist or no file is found in that directory then no action is taken This is not an error e Amore recently read definition supersedes one read earlier therefore local definitions can supersede global ones unless it was locked e If two of more of the directories in the table above are the same then that file is only read once from the first instance Locking Preference Options From version 9 4 onwards preference options can be locked If a preference option is locked in a file then that preference option will be ignored in any of the subsequent preference files that are read Therefore by locking a preference in a top level file in the hierarchy above eg in OA_ADMIN_ xx and then protecting that file to be read only an administrator can set preferences that cannot be altered by users since any definitions of that preference in their private oa_pref files will be ignored Preferences are locked by using a hash rather than an asterisk between th
419. tion input curves should be in units of g If the input curves are in any other unit a conversion factor can be input to convert back to g When selecting input curves it is assumed that the X curve is numerically the first curve the one with the lowest id of the ones selected and the Z curve is the last If they are in a different order then the acceleration limits can be modified to reflect the different order For more information on ASI see BS EN 1317 1 NOTE For the BS EN 1317 1 2010 calculation T His assumes the curves have been filtered through a Class 180 filter and padded with 0 5seconds of data as per the specification E 5 Theoretical Head Impact Velocity amp Post Impact Head Deceleration Page E 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS The theoretical head impact velocity concept has been developed for assessing occupant impact severity for vehicles involved in collisions with road vehicle restraint systems The occupant inside the vehicle is considered to be a freely moving object that as the vehicle changes its speed due to the contact with the restraint system continues moving until it strikes the vehicle interior The velocity magnitude at the time of impact with the vehicle interior is considered to be a measure of the vehicle to vehicle restraint system impact severity After impact the head is assumed to continue moving with the vehicle during the rest of the impact event The post impact head deceleration P
420. tive Commands HIC d NIJ TTI Curve Style manipulation Curve Title and axis manipulation Curve tags Working with more than 1000 curves LSDA file reading SETTINGS menu New Preference file options Fast TCF Fast automated LS DYNA results extraction and plotting using T HIS New Features for version 8 2 Description Curve reordering New Line Styles for colour plots Read KEYWORD option Read CSV option Write NASTRAN TABLE D1 option Write CSV option User defined Grid Intervals Multiple Y Axis New plot formats Improved COMbine function Improved Automotive filter functions New Preference file options New Features for version 8 1 Description Support for DEFORC ASCII file Support for NODOUT ASCII file Nn NJ N I Nn R Nn T t OJU u REE Bale Nl Hin lone oe Nn endix H 5 11 9 5 11 15 5 11 16 Appendix E 6 amp Appendix E 7 5 6 amp Appendix B 5 12 8 15 amp Appendix B 1 1 Fi Nn Nn n fs je Nn I endix H L Manual Section n en NIN o 02i L02 janja NIN 100 ayn mn BIN U En Nn in p n O SI Nn mn endix H Manual Section Nn 1 1 amp Appendix A 1 1 amp Appendix A Nn Page 0 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Support for RCFORC ASCII file 5 1 1 amp Appendix A Support for SBTOUT ASCII file 5 1 1 amp Appendix A Automatic Labelling o
421. tles R axis labels colours fonts and E All Active Graphs scaling 6 Generate the output image and or mi Only Graph curve file 7 Generate curve groups FASTTCF Script Image Output MV Before generating the FAST TCF script the following options can be set Format 8 bit BMP Compressed x Fiename FASTTCF Script Curve Output Filename script_output cur C __ Unblanked Curves _ Select Curves FASTTCF Script Curve Group Output Y WV All Curve Groups __ Select Curve Groups er Page 5 84 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Generate For All Paaes The FAST TCE script will contain all of the commands required to regenerate all of the pages that contain or more graphs If the option to generate images is selected then the FAST TCF script will contain the commands to generate multiple images with the page number appended to the filename specified Current Page The FAST TCE script will contain all of the commands required to regenerate the currently displayed page Only Page n The FAST TCE script will contain all of the commands required to regenerate the selected page All Graphs The FAST TCE script will contain all of the commands required to regenerate all the currently defined graphs All of the graphs will be positioned on page 1 using the currently defined layout This option will only be available if T HIS only contains a single page see Section 3 2 a All Active Graphs The FAST TCF sc
422. to on coy n M For Shell and Thick Shell elements the menu Teer will include all of the through thickness lt Go Back Surface Int lt integration points plus 3 additional options 7 z F TE TOP MIDDLE and BOTTOM In plane int points For Beam elements the menu will just display E Average the integration points Vv In plane 1 Middle In plane int points _ In plane 2 zu Int Point 1 In olane 8 Int Point zi P Int Point 2 In addition to the through thickness integration points recent versions of LS DYNA can also In plane 4 output data for multiple in plane integration points for fully integrated Shell and Thick Shell ha oat elements If T HIS can identify that the model contains data for multiple in plane integration points then these options can be used to select TES the individual in plane integration points or to average the 4 in plane points For more information on selecting integration points for beams shells and thick shells see Sections A 6 A 7 and A 8 Page 5 17 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 1 1 8 Shell and ThickShell Global Part Groups Data Components Solids Beams Shells Tk Shells Stonewalls Springs Airbags Contacts If Shell and ThickShell data is being read from the LDSA binout file then the file can Fea oa diate commoncits in bor the BLOUT Geo Contacts Seatbelts Retractors Sliprings and ELOUTDET branches Reactions Joints X Sections Subsystems By defau
423. to be output and any additional inputs that property requires The format should be specified directly after the format keyword and should use standard C programming syntax to specify a floating point format using either f e E g or G format specifiers e g tab output txt head max max y of curve 1 file output txt curve tag maximum Y description tab output txt head max format 6 3f max y of curve 1 file output txt curve tag maximum Y format description tab output txt head max format 3f max y of curve 1 file output txt curve tag maximum Y format description Example formats Number Format Output 12 3456 5 2 12 35 12 3456 7 3e 1 2345e 01 12 3456 7 3E 1 2345E 01 2345678 9 0f 2345678 2345678 9 6 5g 2 3457e 06 2345678 9 6 5G 2 3457E 06 0 000013583 4 3e 1 358E 05 7 13 6 Description From Version 9 3 onwards the description specified as part of the output for a curve property can contain the following keywords that will automatically be replaced with the corresponding curve property Curve Property FAST TCF curve tag label Curve label Entity ID that the curve was created from Model Model ID curve was created from Page 7 49 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 e g tab output txt file output txt tab output txt file output txt Page 7 50 head max Max accl of node id curve tag maximum Y description head max Model model max accl of node id cu
424. to1x1 2x2 3x3o0rXxY E Cascade T HIS will automatically create multiple pages and position the graphs on each page if _ 1241 required ee es Tiana ater x EH Ei Tile Wide All of the graphs are positioned on a single page P Page 3 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Tile Tall All of the graphs are positioned on a single page a u Cascade All of the graphs are positioned on a single page 1x1 Each graph is positioned on it s own page 2x2 Graphs are arranged in a2 by 2 grid If there are more than 4 graphs then graphs 1 to 4 are positioned on page 1 5 to 8 on page 2 Page 3 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 3x3 Graphs are arranged in a 3 by 3 grid If there are more than 9 graphs then graphs 1 to 9 are positioned on page 1 10 to 18 on page 2 XxY Graphs are arranged in a X by Y grid 3 3 2 Manual Page Manual Page Layout Layout Advanced E Manual page layout can be used to give more control over which graphs appear on which page Unlike the Automatic page layouts a graph can appear on more than one page Advanced E E gt a ES Page Number The Advanced option displays the Page Layout All 1 2 3 4 5 menu Wide F wider Wide F Wider Wide F Wide F This menu can be used to select which graphs appear i All E 4 M A E on each page Each graph can appear on more than 1 A v Ej E Bi Bi een a A v m m O E
425. top and exit after command file exit do ooo y Some examples for T HIS might be pathname this12 exe d x run 2 thf Use device X open a th file pathname thisl2 exe d tty cf batch tcf exit No graphics run command file Note that no spaces should be left in the syntax lt arg gt lt value gt For example d x is illegal Correct syntax is d x Page 1 6 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 2 Using Screen Menus 2 1 Basic screen menu layout 2 2 Mouse and keyboard usage 2 3 Dialogue input 2 4 Window management 2 5 Dynamic Viewing Using the mouse to change views 2 6 Graphics Box Options Versions of T HIS prior to release 6 1 only had a command line interface This has been preserved for backwards compatibility but a screen menu interface has been added which allows you to drive the program almost entirely with the mouse 2 1 Basic screen menu layout T HIS runs within a single window owned by the window manager which has several sub windows inside it A typical T HIS session will look like this Fie Graphs Peang Furctonstmpay mages Cptcen me B SEN ae Sey Br 00 QOZ Qai m 00 Oo een Time Dep x Mode 1243 p n Mode 14 Dep k Node 1245 i Ding T Mode 1543 Diap mag Mode iJi ia I Mode 14d E Cre mij Mage 13 f Case mig Node iM oo ange The various sub windows always exist within the master window and may be moved and resized at will inside i
426. tory Filename you want to save the file to options object Options for get Currently the only available properties are username string password string optional and response boolean If username and password are set then basic authorization using the username and password will be used If response is used and is true then the response code will be returned instead of true false This can be used to retrieve error messages and codes when the file is not returned successfully Return type true if file was successfully got false otherwise Example To get the file http www example com file html and save it to C temp File Get http www example com file html C temp file html IsAbsolute filename string static Description Check if a filename is absolute or relative Arguments Filename you want to check Return type true false Example To see if the filename data test is absolute which it is if File IsAbsolute data test do something Page J 39 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 IsDirectory filename string static Description Check if a filename is a directory See also File Exists File IsFileQ File IsReadable and File IsWritable Arguments Filename you want to check Return type true false Example To see if the filename data test is a directory if File IsDirectory data test do something
427. toscaling off 4 6 AUTOSCALE AU Autoscales the plot size for all current unblanked curves in the graphics window and re displays the plot 4 7 CENTRE CE Pick a point on the screen using the cursor to be the new plot centre It affects the x y offsets but not the scales 4 8 MANUAL Displays the online HTML version of the manual 4 9 STOP Some operations like reading a file containing many curves in to T HIS can take a long time This button can be used to stop some long opertaions without having to exit from T HIS 4 10 TIDY This option can be used to reset the menu layout to the default settings Page 4 2 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 4 11 Additional Commands A number of additional global commands exist in command line mode These functions exist in screen menu mode within other menu levels PF BL UB RM ER GS CO LM FT EX Creates a postscript plot file Either A4 landscape or A4 portrait formats may be chosen A title and figure number are also requested Other plot setting may be made in the command line mode UTILITIES menu Blank a currently displayed curve Unblank a curve that has been blanked Remove delete a curve Once a curve has been removed it is lost from the system Erase delete all existing curves from T HIS Equivalent to the command RM Global status displays the current number of curves their labels and whether they are blanked Condense
428. turn type Curve object or NULL Example Convert curve m to dB s using a reference value of 10 0 and store as curve p p Operate dB m 10 0 dBA Input Curve Curve Weighting Type String Output Curve optional Curve static Description Applies A weigthing to a curve converst from dB to dBA Arguments Weighting Type Apply either Narrow band narrow or Octave band octave A weighting Return type Curve object or NULL Example Apply narrow band A weighting to convert curve m from dB to dBA and store as curve p p Operate dBA m narrow Page J 104 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS PopupWindow class The PopupWindow class allows you to create popup windows for a graphical user interface More Detailed Description The PopupWindow class allows you to make popup windows that you can place Widgets in and link them to Widgets The popup window is then displayed by right clicking on the Widget the popup is linked to The following very simple example shows how to create a popup window and link it to a label Widget Create popup window var pw new PopupWindow Create some widgets in the popup window var pl new Widget pw Widget LABEL IL 3 01 de 7 Label var pb new Widget pw Widget BUTTON Ty 30 7 13 Button var pt new Widget pw Widget TEXTBOX 1 30 20 26 Textbox Create window with title Popup example from 0 8 1 0 in x and 0 5 0 6 in y var
429. type Curve object or NULL Example To calculate the correlation between curves n and m and store as curve p p Operate Err m n Exc Input Curve Curve Output option string Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate and displays an EXCeedence plot This is a plot of force Y axis versus cumulative time X axis for which the force level has been exceeded By default the Automatic option will create an exceedence plot using either the ve OR the ve values depending on which the input curve contains most of The Positive option will calculate the exceedence plot using only the points with ve y values The Negative option will calculate the exceedence plot using only the points with ve y values Page J 78 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Arguments Input Curve Input Curve Output option Select between automatic positive or negative Output Curve optional Curve to overwrite Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Exceedence plot for curve m using the positive option and store as curve p p Operate Exc m positive Exp Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate E to the power of Y axis values Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate E to the power of Y axis values for curve m and store as curve p p Operate Exp m Fft Input Curve Curve Output option string X axis interv
430. un 4 define the model description that is displayed for the new model Insert Insert anew branch within a the selected branch Delete Delete this branch and everything within it Page 5 11 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Right clicking on a model description will Ejmaodel_database display 3 options Template Demo Modify Modify the model location E iteration 1 aiid and description y Base Run 1 Run 2 The selected model will be Run 3 moved into the new branch Insert Insert a new branch Run 4 Delete Delete the model Saving the Database After modifying the database use the Save option to save the changes for future sessions Apply Filename Creating a new Database If you do not have a database or if you want to create a new one then T HIS can create the new database for you To create a new database click the CREATE button and simply enter the name of the new database file in the text box that appears T HIS will then check that the file does not already exist and if it doesn t it will create a new empty database Alternatively if you type in the name of a file in the main Open Plot File window that does not exist then T HIS will ask if you want to create a new empty database using that filename Once you have done this you can use the Modify options above to add items into the database and then save the file before exiting Database Format The Model Database uses an ASCI
431. up does not exist Example To get the group called left var group Group Get left GetCurvelDs Description Returns an array of Curve ID s for all the Curves in the group Arguments No arguments Return type Array of Curve ID s Example To make an array of Curve ID s for all the curves in group g var curves g GetCurvelDs GetCurves Description Returns an array of Curve Objects for all the Curves in the group Arguments No arguments Return type Array of Curve objects Page J 54 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To make an array of Curve objects for all the curves in group g var curves g GetCurves GetFromID ID integer static Description Returns a group object Arguments ID of the group to return object for Return type Group object or Null if the group does not exist Example To get the group number 1 var group Group GetFromID 1 Remove Curve Curve Description Removes a curve object from a group Arguments Curve that will be removed from group Return type No return value Example To remove curve c from curve group g g Remove c RemoveAll Description Removes all curves from a group Page J 55 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments No arguments Return type No return value Example To remove all curves from curve group g g RemoveAll RemovelD ID
432. urn type Curve object or NULL Page J 95 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Example To subtract the Y axis values for curve n from m and store as curve p p Operate Sub m n To subtract 20 0 from the Y axis values in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Sub m 20 0 Sum Curve arry array Output Curve optional Curve static Description Sum of a group of curves Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Sum of curves stored in curve array x p Operate Res x Sux 1st Curve Curve 2nd Curve or constant Curve or real Output Curve optional Curve static Description Subtract X axis values Arguments 2nd Curve or constant 2nd Curve or constant Return type Curve object or NULL Example To subtract the X axis values for curve n from m and store as curve p p Operate Sux m n To subtract 20 0 from the X axis values in curve m and store as curve p p Operate Sux m 20 0 Page J 96 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Tan Input Curve Curve Output Curve optional Curve static Description Calculate Tangent Arguments Return type Curve object or NULL Example Calculate Tangent of curve m and store as curve p p Operate Tan m Thiv X Acceleration Curve Y Acceleration Curve Yaw Rate Curve Dx float Dy float X0O float static Description Theoretical Head Impact Velocity and the Post Impact Head Decel
433. urrently the only available properties are username and password If both optional of these are set then basic authorization using the username and password will be used Return type true if file was successfully uploaded false otherwise Example To upload the file C temp file txt to http www example com file txt File Upload C temp file txt http www example com file txt Write string Any valid javascript type Description Write a string to a file opened for writing by a File object Note that a carriage return is not added Arguments Any valid javascript type The string item that you want to write Return type No return value Example To write string Hello world to File object f Write Hello world n To write the title of model m to File object f f Write The title of model 2 is m title n Page J 47 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 WriteArrayBuffer buffer ArrayBuffer length optional integer Description Writes binary data to a file opened for writing by a File object The data to write is an ArrayBuffer object For more details on how to use an ArrayBuffer see the following links https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays Array Buffer https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays ArrayBufferView https developer mozilla org en JavaScript_typed_arrays DataView
434. urve 101 by 10 This means it is possible to play a script containing curve numbers multiple times within a session without having to either delete all the existing curves or modify the script each time Page 7 28 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS 7 7 CURVE GROUPS Curve groups can be defined within FAST TCF scripts using the cgroup keyword After a curve group has been defined in a FAST TCF script it can then be used as an input to some FAST TCF commands Each curve group should be given a unique name within the FAST TCF script Keyword Second Third following rte word word word ERBE E create name curve list remove name curve list e es a list of cu jan ace St IC should e g cgroup create group 1 Create a curve group called group_1 cgroup add group 1 curve 1 curve 2 Add curves with tags curve_1 and curve_2 to group group_1 egroup create Group 2 Create a curve group called Group 2 cgroup add Group 2 curve 1 Add all curves with a curve tag containing curve_1 to group Group 2 cgroup remove Group 2 curve 11 Remove curve with tag curve_11 from group Group 2 To use a curve group as the input to another FAST TCF command the curve group name is preceeded by an amp If a curve group name contains spaces then the name should be enclosed in double quotes and the amp should be before the first e g operate multiple amp group 1 10 tag output Multiple all curves in curve
435. ut in the macro script will be replaced by 1 Page 5 82 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS An example macro script follows This macro asks the user for a filter option e g c60 c600 c1000 and also an input curve number The macro then filters the input curve and divides by 9810 Macro to convert a file to g after filtering macro acr to g macro title filter and convert curve to g Macro curve macro_input input curve macro const macro filter filter to use model none model 1 oper macro filter Smacro_input tag filtered oper div filtered 9810 0 Page 5 83 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 5 14 FAST TCF Options The FAST TCF menu can be used to capture and playback FAST TCF scripts FAST TCF is a simple and intuitive scripting language for T HIS See FAST TCE section 7 for more details and commands 5 14 1 Create FAST TCF Script X T HIS 9 2 onwards has the ability to Create Run automatically generate FAST TCE scripts using the CREATE menu Apply The FAST TCE script will contain all of f e 3 Z the commands required to Script Name ion93 this93 Debug default inp C 1 Create and position multiple graphs on pages Generate for M All Pages 2 Extract the data from models or other files _ Current Page 3 Carry out any curve operations required to reproduce the chosen E Only Page curves 4 Set any curve styles and labels El All Graphs 5 Set plot attributes such as ti
436. ution of the script again Next continues to the next line in the current function i e it will step over a function call Step continues execution to the next source line which may be in a different function i e it will step into a function call Finish will finish executing the current function and stop at the next line in the calling function the function above this in the call stack Alternatively if you want to continue until a particular line you can right click on the line you want to continue until and select Continue to here from the popup Printing the value of a variable If you want to see the value of a variable you can type the name of the variable you want to see in the textbox at the top of the debugger and press Print JaDe will evaluate the variable and output the result in the statusbar at the bottom of the debugger Using Quickwatch If you want to look at the values for lots of variables it is annoying to have to type the variable name in and press Print for each one A better way is to use Quickwatch at the top left of JaDe Page M 3 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Click to add Type the name of the variable that you want to watch in the Click to add textbox A line will be added for the variable showing its name and value e g in the following image the variable mines is being displayed and its current value is 10 If the value is very long hover over the value to get the whole string
437. ve var curve Curve FirstFreeID j FirstID static Description Returns the ID of the first curve Arguments No arguments Return type ID of the first curve defined Page J 18 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Example To get the Ist curve var curve Curve FirstID FlagAll flag integer static Description Flags all of the curves with a defined flag Arguments Flag to set on the curves Return type No return value Example To flag all of the curves with flag f var curve Curve FlagAll f Flagged flag integer Description Checks if the curve is flagged or not Arguments Flag to check on the curve Return type true if flagged false if not Example To check if curve d has flag f set on it if d Flagged f do something GetFromID ID integer static Description Returns the curve object for a curve ID Page J 19 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Arguments ID of curve to return object for Return type Curve object or null if the curve does not exist Example To get the curve n var curve Curve GetFromID n GetFromTag TAG string static Description Finds a curve from it s Tag This function is only available when running a Javascript from within a FAST TCF script Arguments TAG of curve to return object for Return type Curve object or null if there are no free curves Example To get
438. w the curves are styled The plot style setup keyword style allows the user to define a plot specific styling that applies the styles to the curves only when they are requested for a plot It is independent of the curve id but dependent on the order the curves are requested in the plot command The style is given its own tag which the user can request on the image FAST TCF line This is useful for producing plots from FAST TCF that all have the same curve appearance For the following words each space represents a new curve style definition The styles for each curve are defined by the type keywords below separated by commas e g style ENERGIES solid green norm dash blue heavy sol bold yel 500 style name curve 1 curve 2 curve 3 When a plot is requested FAST TCF will apply the curve styles to the list of curves in order in the plot So in the example above the first curve would appear green the second curve blue and the third yellow The individual curve style keyword stylec is the more traditional way of styling a curve that a T HIS user would be more familiar with FAST TCF styles the single curve id instantly The user can only define one style at a time e g stylec 12 solid green norm style curve number 12 style to apply 7 12 1 1 Line Styles Style options solid Line style none 7 12 1 2 Line Colours Style options word options default Page 7 39 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 O
439. wing new window Select the appropriate group of 1000 curves and press apply to display those 1000 curves in the Curve control menu 5 3 10 CURVE TAGS Curves can be given tags to act as internal identifiers within T HIS which can be used to reference curves in order to perform operations on them In order to display the curve tags toggle on the Show Labels arrow and select Show Tags The tag names can be defined in the input boxes When a curve file is written T HIS will save the tags of all the tagged curves in the file When performing operations in the dialogue box curves can be referenced by their tags The tag must be placed in double quotes lt lt Undock Curve Manager Concense TT Ta Dec Tene Labels Curve Range Select Sort by CureID Curve ID Curve ID Curve Selector 1 1 APPLY CANCEL lt lt Undock Curve Manager condense ETE TEE Table Labels Display Labels gt Select Sort by Display Tags Surve ID Curve ID Label A Disp x Node 1343 dif Yel_x_n_123 2050 Page 5 41 T HIS 5 4 Model Manager 5 4 1 Select This allows the user to turn models on off Deselecting a model will result in removal of its entities as options when reading data Models can be displayed according to their titles or alternatively by the directories they were read in from Clicking on the button displaying a model title will produce a menu similar t
440. xample To get the Ist datum var d Datum First GetFromAcronym datum string static Description Returns the datum object for a datum acronym Arguments Acronym of datum to return object for Return type Datum object or null if the datum does not exist Example To get the datum my_datum var d Datum GetFromAcronym my datum Page J 29 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Next Description Returns the next datum in the model Arguments No arguments Return type Datum object or null if there are no more datums in the model Example To get the next datum after datum d var datum d Next RemoveFromGraph graph graph int Description Removes a datum from a graph Arguments graph int Optional list of graphs to remove the datum from If undefined then the datum is removed from graph all graphs Return type No return value Example To remove a datum d from graphs and 3 d RemoveFromGraph 1 3 To remove a datum d from all graphs d RemoveFromGraph Page J 30 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS Entity class The Entity class contains constants relating to Entity types More Entity constants Entity BOUNDARY Entity GEOMETRIC_CONTACT Entity NODE_GROUP Entity PART_GROUP Entity PRETENSIONER Entiy TRICK_ SHELL Page J 31 T HIS User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Detailed D
441. y oment in Y force force oment Magnitude centroid coord centroid coord rea of section ressure force force force orce Magnitude nI lt lt lt lt D m m un In In 2 T o Q 2 S IN lt px lt SJs S S S jo Jo aJo on n e nergy e nergy nizo lt Jx TJN lt lt lt x lt TIN lt I lt florce LS IN lt lt TIN lt X SG U so mm M sy er J ee Page 7 16 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 Joint id Joint id T HIS force force force orce Magnitude mJoment oment in Z oment Magnitude CONSTRAINED_JOINT_STIFFNESS_GENERALIZED ph i hi angle Phi dt hi stiffness moment har hi damping moment psli lt x lt lt I lt N TI l U hi total moment heta angle Theta dt heta stiffness moment heta damping moment heta total moment si angle si stiffness moment si total moment otal joint energy allpha Alpha dt Beta dt eta stiffness moment eta damping moment amma scale factor fllexion otal joint energy CONSTRAINED_JOINT_STIFFNESS_TRANSLATIONAL translational Ya displacement Z dt d stiffness total zZ Z v0 Qa UVlujoQ gt gt I lt ul gt gt O W W jw galmma dt lt e2 1x i lt x damping stiffness damping total en Total joint energy lt T lt NININ
442. y re test development cycle very quick and easy 5 23 2 1 Compiling and Running a script Encrypt vlerge File i a File encoding Memory size MB as Run Will both compile and run the script unless it contains syntax errors in which case it stops with an error message when compilation fails Check Only compiles the script reporting any errors found and does not run it Encrypt A script can be encrypted so that the source code is hidden but the script can still be run when compiling and running the script T HIS decrypts the file in memory Once encrypted the source code cannot be retrieved by an ordinary user so make sure that you keep the original file somewhere safe As a last resort contact OASYS Ltd who can decrypt the script if required If a script is split up into separate files by Use the files are all combined together into the main file before encrypting Merge Ifa script is split up into separate files by Use the files are all combined together into a single file This may be useful if you want to give the script so someone else and you do not want to have to give lots of different files Debug Starts the JavaScript debugger JaDe to debug the script Memory size is the memory allocated for garbage collection in the JavaScript engine Please see the garbage collection section for more details File encodings for scripts Version 10 0 of T HIS introduced the ability for unicode text to be used on widget
443. ype of file but only if T HIS allows it Page 7 10 User manual Version 12 0 October 2014 T HIS word e g node 42 displacement x read data from default file define file LSDA node 42 displacement x read data from LSDA file node 42 displacement x ASCII read data from ASCII file 7 4 2 2 Specifying components for Steady State Dynamics SSD analysis For a SSD analysis LS DYNA generates 2 data values an amplitude and an angle for each component in the NODOUT and ELOUT parts of the LSDA binout file By default FAST TCF will extract the amplitude for each data component but this can be changed if required to extract the angle value Keyword _ second word mee e g define ssd_comp angle read angle value for all SSD analysis data components define ssd _ comp amplitude read amplitude value for all SSD analysis data components 7 4 3 Defining Groups of Parts Group definitionlgdet_ roupid partis The line starts with gdef and is followed by an integer for the group i d and then part i d numbers separated by spaces or for a range of parts separated by a 2 No options should be applied to this card because all the words on the line are written out as integers 3 The input is on one line which may result in a long line e g gdef 1 1234 10 20 30 40 group define i d 1 parts 1 2 3 and 4 parts 10000 to 20000 and 30000 to 40000 7 4 4 Specifying Surfaces Integration Po

T/HIS 12.0 user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents